1

ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LTD.

BID DOCUMENT FOR

R&M OF 33/11kV MUKALMUWA & NALBARI(POILA) SUB-STATION

ON “TURNKEY” MODE

UNDER RANGIA ELECTRICAL CIRCLE,

APDCL (LAZ)

SCHEME: “ANNUAL PLAN - 2011-2012” NIT No.CGM (PP&D)/ APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M/Mukalmuwa-Poila/01

2

SECTION -1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

3

ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION CO. LTD PROJECT PLANNING & DESIGN

NIT No.CGM (PP&D)/ APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M/Mukalmuwa-Poila/01

Sealed Tenders are invited from experienced & financially sound Electrical

Contractor(s) (individual or joint venture)/Firm(s) having valid electrical contractor license up to

33kV issued by the competent authority of the Govt. of Assam for R&M of 33/11kV

Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila) substation [( excluding power transformer at Nalbari (Poila)] and

construction of 2.6 Km new 11kV outgoing feeder from 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation under

Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL (LAZ) on “Turnkey” mode.

Cost of Tender Paper: ₹ 6000/-(Rupees Six thousand) only in the form of ‘A/C Payee

Demand Draft/Banker’s Cheque (non-refundable) duly pledged in favour of “ASSAM POWER

DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED”. Tender papers can be purchased in all working days

up to 4 PM w.e.f. 30.03.2012 to 11.04.2012 from the office of the Chief General Manager

(PP&D), APDCL, 6TH

Floor, Bijulee Bhawan, Paltan bazar, Guwahati-1

Details may be seen in the website www.apdcl.gov.in

Chief General Manager (PP&D),

APDCL, 6th floor, Bijulee Bhawan.

Guwahati-1

Memo No. CGM(PP&D)/APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M of Mukalmuwa-Poila/4(a) Dt. 22.03.2012

Copy to: -

1. The CGM (D), APDCL(LAZ), Bijulee Bhawan, Guwahati-1 for favour of kind

information.

2. The General Manager, Guwahati Zone, APDCL(LAZ), Six mile, Guwahati-22 for

information.

3. The DGM, Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL (LAZ), for information & necessary action.

4. The PRO, ASEB, Bijiulee Bhawan, Paltan Bazar, Guwahati for publication of the above

tender in one issue of “The Assam Tribune” and “Dainik Janambhumi”.

5. The OSD to MD, APDCL, Bijiulee Bhawan, Paltan bazaar, Guwahati for publication in

the official website.

Chief General Manager (PP&D),

APDCL, 6th floor, Bijulee Bhawan.

Guwahati-1

4

ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION CO. LTD PROJECT PLANNING & DESIGN

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

NIT No.CGM (PP&D)/ APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M/Mukalmuwa-Poila/01

Sealed Tenders are invited from experienced & financially sound Electrical Contractor(s)

(individual or joint venture)/Firm(s) having valid electrical contractor license up to 33kV issued by the

competent authority of the Govt. of Assam for R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila)

substation( excluding power transformer at Nalbari (Poila) and construction of 2.6 Km new 11kV

outgoing feeder from 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ)

on “Turnkey” mode.

Source of Fund: Annual Plan 2011-12

Eligibility Criteria:

1. Average Annual turnover of the bidder for the last three financial years for the work should be

as mentioned below and duly certified by registered Chartered Accountant with Registration

No.

2. Past and present performance of the bidder in ASEB or in any of its successor companies will

be taken into account to decide the eligibility as per clause 4(b) of sec-2.

3. The bidders must have adequate experience in doing similar electrical construction work and

to be substantiated through certificate issued by an Engineer not below the rank of DGM/SE

along with supporting copies of the work executed under any reputed utility / department.

Lack of experience of the bidders will render the bid liable for rejection. The certificate should

form a part of the techno-commercial bid.(as per clause no 4 of Sec-2)

4. The bidder must not be involved in any litigation with ASEB/ or any successor company of

ASEB. The bidder should submit a declaration to that effect.

5. Earnest money should be as mentioned below. However Earnest money deposit (EMD) will

be 50% for SC, ST & OBC bidder subject to submission of caste certificate along with the

Techno-Commercial bid of the tender.

Work description

Average annual

turnover

(₹ in lakh)

EMD

amount

(₹ In lakh)

Period of

completion

In days

R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa &

Nalbari (Poila) substation( excluding

power transformer at Nalbari (Poila)

and construction of 2.6 Km 11kV

outgoing feeder from 33/11kV

Mukalmuwa substation under Rangia

Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ)

300.0 3.75

285 (Two

Hundred eighty

five) days from

the date of issue

of work order

Bid validity: 180 days from the date of submission of Bid.

Cost of Tender Paper: ₹ 6000/-(Rupees Six thousand) only in the form of ‘A/C Payee Demand

Draft/Banker’s Cheque (non-refundable) duly pledged in favour of “ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION

COMPANY LIMITED”. Tender papers can be purchased on all working days up to 4 PM w.e.f.

30.03.2012 to 11.04.2012 from the office of the Chief General Manager (PP&D), APDCL, Bijulee

Bhawan, 6TH

Floor, Guwahati-1.

5

Alternatively, the Bid Document can be downloaded from the website: www.apdcl.gov.in for

tender submission purpose. The bid can be downloaded upto 4 pm of 11.04.2012. The Bidders using

downloaded document will attach with their Bids(Techno-commercial) an ‘A/C Payee Demand

Draft/Banker’s Cheque (non-refundable) of ₹ 6000/-(Rupees Six thousand only) duly pledged in

favour of “ Assam Power Distribution Company Limited, Guwahati-1”as a cost of tender paper.

Bidders will ensure that the complete document in full is downloaded and used. Any bid without the

payment of ₹ 6000.00 as above will be rejected outright ; the date of purchase of said A/C

Payee Demand Draft/ Banker’s Cheque should be within the date of issue of Tender paper.

Date of submission of Tenders: Up to 13-00 Hrs. of 30.04.2012

Date of opening of Bid: Techno-commercial bids will be opened on 30.04.2012 at 13-30 Hrs.

and the price bid on a date to be notified later on.

Terms & Conditions:

1. The work should be carried out as per latest REC specification and construction standard.

2. In case of a joint venture firm, the relevant deed in support of joint venture, an agreement

duly registered or certified by Notary must be submitted along with the bid. In absence of

such documents, the tender from a joint venture firm shall be rejected.( for joint venture

requirement refer Sl 5 of Sec-2)

3. The Techno-Commercial& Price bids must be submitted in two separate sealed cover

superscripting the following on both the covers

a) Name of bidder with full address

b) “Techno-Commercial bid with earnest money” for envelope containing Techno-

commercial Bid and “Price bid” for envelope containing the price bid.

c) NIT reference number.

4. Rates should be quoted both in figures and words legibly and no overwriting will be accepted.

5. Earnest money as stipulated should be submitted with the Techno-Commercial bid in the

form of Bank Guarantee (BG) of Nationalized Bank/ Bank Call Deposit/NSC/Term

Deposit pledged in favour of “ ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED,

Guwahati-1” valid upto 28th Feb’ 2013. Any tender without earnest money will be rejected

outright.

6. Quoted rate should be firm and inclusive of all taxes and duties.

7. Quoted rate must be valid for a minimum of 180 days.

8. There will be pre-bid discussion with the intending tenderer to be held on 20.04.2012 at 1500

Hrs in the office of the undersigned regarding terms and conditions and scope of work.

9. The tender should be submitted in the office of the Chief General Manager (PP&D), APDCL,

Bijulee Bhawan, 6th floor, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-1 and will be opened on the scheduled date

& time in presence of the intending tenderers.

10. The Company reserves the right to accept or reject any tender in part or in full or spilt the

work or cancel/withdraw the Notice inviting tender without assigning any reason thereof

whatsoever and in such case, no tenderer/ intending tenderer shall have any claim arising out

of such action.

Chief General Manager (PP&D),

APDCL, 6th floor, Bijulee Bhawan.

Paltan bazar,Guwahati-1

6

SECTION 2

TENDER INVITING PROPOSAL

7

ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION CO. LTD PROJECT, PLANNING & DESIGN

TENDER INVITING PROPOSALS WITH TERMS & CONDITIONS FOR

R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila) substation( excluding power transformer at

Nalbari (Poila) and construction of 2.6 Km new 11kV outgoing feeder from 33/11kV Mukalmuwa

substation under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ) on TURN KEY MODE as per details below.

1. Intent of the Tender Enquiry

The intent of the Tender Enquiry is to invite proposals from the prospective and relevantly

experienced and financially sound contractor(s) (individual or joint venture)/firms to carry out the work

of R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila) substation( excluding power transformer at Nalbari

(Poila) and construction of 2.6 Km new 11kV outgoing feeder from 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation

under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ) ON TURNKEY MODE.

2. Scope of Work

The various activities under the scope of work shall among other related aspects cover the

following.

i. Procurement and supply of all materials required for the work.

ii. Site unloading, storage and handling of all materials supplied including watch and ward for

safe custody.

iii. Site fabrication work as per requirement.

iv. Submission of implementation schedule from the date of award of contract for: -

Route survey for laying new lines wherever required

Erection, testing and commissioning of all materials/equipment supplied/system installed.

v. Project management and site organization.

vi. Obtaining clearance from statutory Agencies, Government Departments, Village Panchayats

etc. wherever necessary

vii. Submission of specification/Test Certificate/Drawings etc. of all materials supplied.

viii. A list of various items normally involved in proposed type of work is provided in this

document. This, however, is not to be considered as limiting but only typical. Vendors’ scope

will include all other items and materials as may be required to effectively complete the work.

Above all, the scope of work of the vendor/contractor will include all items and facilities as

may be necessary to complete the electrification work on turnkey basis and as binding requirement.

3. Basic specification of the various equipment/ works to be supplied /carried out.

i. All equipment supplied shall conform to the requirement of relevant ISS (BIS) as approved by

ASEB/Company and that of REC specification and construction standards.

ii. All materials supplied shall be erected, protected as per approved standard practice for

proposed type of electrical work so as to supply electricity to the consumers most effectively

and in an intrinsically safe manner.

iii. All equipment supplied and installed shall provide easy and effective:

Maintainability

Reliability

Availability

Long life

8

All equipment supplied and installed shall be provided stable and adequate weather

protection, system earthing etc. LA should be earthed separately.

iv. All items, which may require frequent opening up/ dismantling for maintenance, shall be

adequately sealed against any tampering/ theft etc.

v. Generally supply and erection of materials and system shall meet the requirement of

construction standard being followed in the electrification work.

4. Basic qualifying requirement:

The prospective bidder must fulfill the following pre-bid qualifying requirement

a. The bidder must have valid electrical Contractor’s and Supervisor’s License (HT) issued by the Licensing

Authority of Govt. Of Assam.

b. The bidder must have successfully erected and commissioned at least 1 no. of 33/11kV substation during

last 10 years as on the date of bid opening and which must be in satisfactory operation for at least 1 (one)

year as on the date of bid opening alongwith experience of construction of 11kV line ( at least 5 km).

c. The bidder shall furnish details of the work / works along with its value already in hand either of APDCL, or in

any other successor companies of ASEB along with date of completion as per Letter of Award and actual

date of completion duly certified by the competent authority as per format enclosed as Annexure-IA. This

shall be treated as one of the major qualifying criteria for technical evaluation of the bid.

d. bidder shall furnish details of the work / works along with its value already in hand either of APDCL, or in any

other successor companies of ASEB .

e. Average annual turnover of the bidder for best of three financial years out of five/ last three consecutive

financial years should be as per NIT and the annual turnover should be certified by a registered Chartered

Accountant.

f. The bidder shall furnish latest VAT registration and clearance certificate, WCT, CST Registration certificate,

Service tax registration, Employee Provident fund and valid Labour License.

g. The bidder shall furnish copy of their Pan Card. The card must be in the name of the firm if the bidder is a

firm. If it is a joint venture copy of Pan Card of both the partner must be submitted.

h. Joint venture agreement should be a registered one or certified by Notary.

i. Power of attorney should be a registered one.

j. Formal authority Registered/Notorised for signing the tender or other documents on behalf of the

firm / individual must be submitted along with the bid. In case of registered company Board’s

resolution of the company for authorized signatory

5. Joint Venture Requirement

i. The Bid and, in case of successful Bid, the form of agreement shall be signed so as to

be legally binding both the partners.

ii. One of the partners shall be authorized to be as the lead partner and this authorization

shall be evidenced by submitting a Power of Attorney signed by legally authorized

signatories of the partners. Also the lead partner must have valid electrical Contractor’s and

Supervisor’s License (HT) issued by the Licensing Authority of Govt. Of Assam

iii. The lead partner shall be authorized to incur liabilities, receive payments and receive

instructions for and on behalf of any or all partners of the joint venture and the entire

execution of the contract.

iv. All the partners of the joint venture shall be jointly and severally liable for the

execution of the contract in accordance with the contract terms and a relevant

statement to this effect shall be included in the authorization mentioned under (ii)

above as well as in the bid form and the form of agreement (in case of successful

bidder).

v. A copy of the agreement entered into by the joint venture partners shall be submitted

with the bid.

vi. The figure of average annual turnovers for the joint venture partners shall be added together to determine the bidder’s compliance with the minimum average turnover requirement for the package. However, the lead partner must meet at least 40% and

9

other partner must meet the at least 25% of the minimum average annual turnover criteria given in the Tender.

6. Other requirements: The Bidder

i) Should be acquainted himself with relevant conditions of the local geography and socio economic setup of the different location of the State and being capable accordingly to mobilize, organize and expedite the activities.

ii) Should have adequate working personnel comprising of Electrical/ Mechanical engineers, electrical supervisor, skilled and unskilled labour to be deputed to the proposed assignment.

iii) Should be conversant with the code/ standards applicable to proposed type of work. ISS, REC guidelines

7. Submission of bid

The bidder shall submit the bid/bids in sealed envelope/envelopes as follows:

a. Techno-commercial bid Techno-commercial bid should be submitted in a sealed envelope, Superscribing “Techno-commercial bid with EMD” with name of bidder, full address and NIT reference, package no. and under this will be included and defined vendors scope of work, responsibilities, guarantees, specification of equipment, commercial terms and conditions, vendor’s company credentials, experience of similar assignments, registration details, etc. as per requirement. Tender proforma for techno-commercial Bid is enclosed as Annexure-I. b. Earnest Money Deposit (EMD):

The Tender must be accompanied with earnest money as mentioned in the NIT against the work to be deposited in the form of Bank Guarantee (BG) of Nationalized Bank/ Bank Call Deposit/NSC/KVP /Term Deposit pledged in favour of “ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED. Guwahati-1”. The EMD should be submitted along with Techno- Commercial bid. The earnest money will be released to the unsuccessful bidders on finalization of the tenders. The EMD to the successful bidder will be released on submission of Security Deposit at the time of execution of the agreement as per clause 10.3 c. Submission of documents with technical bids.

i) Detail list of makes and materials offered with catalogues, technical specification etc. ii) Certificates and testimonials in support of credentials of the bidder’s organization. iii) Details past experience along with present works in hand with awarded amount and

progress report. iv) Brief write-up on methodology to carry out the assignment, if awarded. v) Details of manpower to be engaged for the assignments. vi) Any other information, the vendor may feel facilitative in evaluating the bid. vii) Copies of bidder and supervisor’s license, etc. viii) Certificate from Registered Charted Accountant in support of Annual turn over ix) Solvency certificate from Bank x) Certificate in support of performance of the bidder d. Price Bid

Price bid should be submitted in a sealed envelope superscribing “Price Bid” with name of bidder, NIT reference No. Under this will include rates of supply and erection of different items for electrification. The tender proforma for price Bid is enclosed as Annexure-II

10

e. Submission of bid Both the envelope should be placed in a bigger envelope duly sealed superscribing name of bidder, NIT reference and addressed to CGM(PP&D), APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati.

Note:-: a. If there is discrepancy between the unit price and the total price that is obtained by

multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and total price should be corrected. If there is a discrepancy between the words and figures, the amount in word should prevail. If the bidder does not accept the correction of the errors as above, his bid will be rejected and the amount of bid guarantee/security will be forfeited.

b. No separate declaration offering discount on price will be allowed. Offered price in the price schedule will be final.

8. (A) Estimation of material requirement: The total quantity of materials required is indicated in the BOQ

B) Quantity Variation: There may be increase or decrease in quantity of individual item subject to the condition that the corresponding change in total contract value does not increase or decrease by more than 15% keeping the unit rate of individual material and labour unchanged.

9. Award of work:

i) The evaluation of bids will be carried out, first of techno-commercial bid and thereafter opening the price bid of only those who qualify and meet the technical requirement.

ii) Company reserves the right not to order/ award the job to the price-wise lowest party if the party during evaluation is found technically non responsive.

iii) Work should be started within fifteen (15) days from the date of issue of the work order, failing which order will be cancelled without further correspondence.

iv) The Sub-station equipments installed shall be under custody of the contractor till the date of commissioning and charging. The properties will be taken over by APDCL,UAZ after satisfactory commissioning and charging.

10. Period of completion: 285 (Two Hundred eighty five) days from the date of issue of work order .

11. Implementation schedule:

Comprehensive implementation schedule of work for R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila) substation( excluding power transformer at Nalbari (Poila) under Rangia Electrical Circle,

APDCL(LAZ)

Sl no.

Description

EXECUTION PERIOD

10 d

ays

15 d

ays

120

days

100

days

25 d

ays

15 d

ays

1 Signing of Agreement

2 Survey works

3 Manufacture &

supply of materials

4 Erection of equipments

5 Testing &

commissioning

11

12 Termination of work order:

Company reserves the right to terminate the work order at any stage in accordance with the Company’s General Condition of Supply and Erection in force.

13. Terms of Payment:

During the currency of the contract, maximum of 3(three) nos. of progressive payment on the actual work done can be made against the claims preferred by the contractor subject to 80% of the claimed amount. 20% will be retained as security deposit which will be released along with final bill on satisfactory completion including commissioning.

All payment shall be made from the office of the CGM(F&A), APDCL on the bill submitted to the concerned CGM(D) after due verification by the concerned SDE and duly passed by the Sr. Manager concerned and countersigned by the DGM concerned and on submission of work progress report ( as per format which will be enclosed at the time of awarding work order ). Bills whether progressive or final shall be entertained only after completion of both supply and erection of works of specified items.

14 Security deposit and agreement:

The successful bidders shall have to deposit security money in the form of Bank Guarantee issued by any Nationalized Bank/Scheduled Bank in Company’s standard proforma on non-judicial stamp of appropriate value for an amount equal to 2.5% of the contract value at the time of execution of agreement. The security deposit is liable to be forfeited in case of non-execution of contract/ work order. The security deposit will be released on successful commissioning and testing of the materials ordered and after depositing performance B/G as per clause 14(d).

15 Project Management and site Organizations:

In Consideration of the tight schedule of the project, the successful bidder(s) /Contractor(s) shall exercise systematic closely controlled project management system with the aid of commonly used soft tools. Following are the major activities/deliverables to be organized /generated for submission to the Board. (I) Liaison/Construction offices will be established in each Circle of APDCL,UAZ. (II) Work Progress Report:

Progress monitoring by the contractor as per implementation schedule and approved milestones.

Fortnightly progress report will be submitted to the concern Deputy General Manager, Senior Manager & Sub-Divisional Engineers. The progress report will highlight the points like, work completion vis-à-vis planned, plan for next working period, delay analysis vis-à-vis committed schedule with reasons and remedies, etc.

(III) Site Organization.

The vendor at each working site shall establish the following.

Store house

Site fabrication facilities

Construction supervision office All offices shall be adequately furnished and staffed so as to take all site decisions independently without frequent references to head Work’s/offices.

12

16 Guarantees and Penalties

(a) Liquidated Damages (LD) The proposed work is on top priority of Government of Assam and therefore has to be completed within stipulated/agreed schedule. Any delay beyond that will attract penalty as per Company’s General condition of supply and erection.

(b) Equipment and system installed shall be guaranteed individually for integrated operations for a period of 18 (Eighteen) months from date of commissioning of a system. In case of detection of any defect in individual equipment or system as a whole, the same shall be replaced by the vendor free of cost within 15 days of intimation by the Company’s representative.

(c) Warranty from the manufacturer shall be produced along with manufacturer’s test certificate for all equipment/ materials covered under Manufacturer’s warranty.

(d) A performance Bank Guarantee from a Nationalized Bank/Scheduled Bank in Board’s standard proforma on Non judicial stamp paper of appropriate value with a validity of 18 (eighteen) months @ 10% of total value of work executed shall have to be furnished by the Contractor before final payment.

17 Approvals/Clearances: 1. APDCL, concerned DGM shall approve all site and documents prepared by the

contractor for construction of the Line. 2. GTP and drawings of all equipment/ materials shall be approved by CGM (PP&D),

APDCL. 3. The contractor shall obtain all statutory approvals and clearances from the statutory

authorities before charging the system at his/her own cost. 18. Environmental Considerations:

While carrying out the assignment, no damage to environment /forests will be caused by the contractor. If so done, the contractor will have to compensate the same to the satisfaction of the concerned Authority.

19. Submission of documents.

i. With bids. i) Detail list of makes and materials offered with catalogues, technical specification etc.

ii) Certificates and testimonials in support of credentials of the bidder’s organization. iii) Details past experience along with present works in hand with awarded amount and

progress report. iv) Brief writ-up on methodology to carry out the assignment, if awarded. v) Details of manpower to be engaged for the assignments. vi) Any other information, the vendor may feel facilitative in evaluating the bid. vii) Copies of contractor and supervisor’s license, etc. viii) Certificate from Registered Charted Accountant in support of Annual turn over ix) Solvency certificate from Bank x) Earnest money deposit along with Techno- Commercial bid xi) Certificate in support of performance of the bidder. xii) List of materials that are to be brought from outside the state.

b) During project execution

i) All documents for approval shall be submitted in 6 copies. ii) All final documents to be submitted to statutory organizations will be furnished as per

requirement of the authority. 20. Funding of the project. The proposed work is funded by the G.O.A. under “Annual Plan 2011-12”

13

21. Disclaimer:

While the Company will make every endeavor to extend necessary facilitation in expediting the work, the contractor shall be responsible to organize and arrange all necessary inputs right from mobilization activities up to completion of the project. Company will not entertain any failure / delay on such accounts. Also, Company will not be responsible for any compensation, replenishment, damage, theft etc. as may be caused due to negligent working, insufficient coordination with Government / non Government / Local Authority by the contractor and/ or his personnel deputed for work. The contractor shall take necessary insurance coverage under LIC/GIC. etc. for his working personnel and the goods in store as well as in transit. The contractor will be deemed to have made him acquainted with the local working conditions at site(s) and fully provide for into the bid submitted.

22. Ceiling on acceptance of bid value

As a deterrent for cartel formation APDCL at its discretion have the right to scrap the tender if values quoted by all the bidders is above 25% of the estimated cost. Also the price bids whose total quoted value is below 15% of the estimated cost, the bid is liable to rejected by APDCL

23. Termination of contract on Contractor’s default If the Contractor shall neglect to execute the Works with due diligence and expertise or shall refuse or neglect to comply with any reasonable order given to him, in the Contract by the Engineer in connection with the works or shall contravene the provisions of the Contract, the owner may give notice in writing to the contractor to make good the failure, neglect or contravention complained of. Should the contractor fail to comply with the notice within thirty (30) days from the date of serving the notice, then and in such case the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other workmen and forthwith execute such part of the works as the Contractor, may have neglected to do or if the owner shall think fit, without prejudice to any other right he may have under the Contract to take the work wholly or in part out of the contractor's hands and re-contract with any other person or persons to complete the works or any part thereof and in that event the Owner shall have free use of all Contractor's equipment that may have been at the time on the site in connection with the works without being responsible to the Contractor for fair wear and tear thereof and to the exclusion of any right of the contractor over the same, and the Owner shall be entitled to retain and apply any balance which may otherwise be due on the Contract by him to the contractor, or such part thereof as may be necessary, to the payment of the cost of executing the said part of the work or of completing the Works as the case may be. If the cost of completing of Works or executing a part thereof as aforesaid shall exceed the balance due to the contractor, the contractor shall pay such excess. Such payment of excess amount shall be independent of the liquidated damages for delay which the contractor shall have to pay if the completion of works' is delayed. In addition, such action by the Owner as aforesaid shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability to pay liquidated damages for delay in completion of works as defined in clause no.26 of GCSE Such action by the Owner as aforesaid, the termination of the Contract under this clause shall neither entitle the contractor to reduce the value of the contract Performance Guarantee nor the time thereof. The contract Performance Guarantee shall be valid for the full value and for the full period of the contract including guarantee period.

24. Termination of contract on owners’ initiative The Owner reserves the right to terminate the Contract either in part or in full due to reasons other than those mentioned under clause entitled "Contractor's Default." The Owner shall in such an event give fifteen (15) days notice in writing to the Contractor of his decision to do so. The Contractor upon receipt of such notice shall discontinue the work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice, make all reasonable efforts to obtain cancellation of all orders and contracts to the extent they are related to the work terminated and terms satisfactory to the Owner, stop all further sub-contracting or purchasing activity related to the work terminated, and assist the Owner in maintenance, protection, and disposition of the Works acquired under the Contract by the Owner. In the event of such a termination, .the Contractor shall be paid compensation, equitable and reasonable, dictated by the circumstances prevalent at the time of termination.

14

If the Contractor is an individual or a proprietary concern and the individual or the proprietor dies and if the contractor is a partnership concern and one of the partners dies then unless the Owner is satisfied that the legal representatives of the individual contractor or of the proprietor of propriety concern and in the case of partnership, the surviving partners, are capable of carrying out and completing the Contract, the Owner shall be entitled to cancel the Contract as to its uncompleted part without being in any way liable to payment of any compensation to the estate of deceased Contractor and/or to surviving partners of the contractor's firm on account of the cancellation of the contract. The decision of the owner that the legal representatives of the deceased contractor or surviving partners of the contractor's firm cannot carry out and complete the contract shall be final and binding on the parties. In the event of such cancellation, the Owner shall not hold the estate of the deceased Contractor and/or the surviving partner of the Contractor's firm liable to. damages for not completing the Contract

25. Frustration of contract In the event of frustration of the contract of supervening impossibility in items of Section 56 of the Indian Contract Act, parties shall be absolved of their responsibility to perform the balance portion of the contract. In the event of non-availability or suspension of funds for any reasons whatsoever (except for reason of willful or flagrant breach by the Owner and/or contractor) then the Works under the contract shall be suspended. Furthermore, if the Owner is unable to make satisfactory alternative arrangements for financing to the contractor in accordance with the terms of the Contract within three months of the event, the parties hereto shall be relieved from carrying out further obligations under the Contract treating it as frustration of the Contract. In the event Performance Bank Guarantee, the parties shall mutually discuss to arrive at reasonable on all issues including amounts due to either party for the work already done on "Quantum merit" basis which shall be determined by mutual agreement between the parties

26. Inspection and testing: All the equipments/materials to be supplied and erected shall be tested/inspected at manufacturer’s work by authorized officer of APDCL before despatching them to work site. The contractor shall intimate CGM(PP&D) sufficiently in advance the date of inspection of materials at manufacturer’s works. The materials should be despatched to site only after receipt of despatch clearance to be issued by CGM(PP&D) after satisfactory testing of the same.

27. Before submitting the tender the bidder should inspect the location and the scope of work and have discussion with concerned Sub-divisional Engineer /Asstt. General Manager. Terms and conditions, which are not specified, herein above will be governed by Company’s General Conditions of supply and erection in force

15

Annexure - I

Tender Proforma part – I (Techno-commercial Bid)

NIT No.CGM (PP&D)/ APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M/Mukalmuwa-Poila/01 1. Name and full address of the Bidder. : 2. Particulars of payment made for Purchase of

tender document in the shape of . : 3. Amount of earnest money paid in the shape of : 4. Whether Sales Tax clearance : Yes / No

certificate submitted 5. VAT Registration. No/ Service Tax Regd No. : 6. Acceptance of guarantee clause of :

Materials /equipment and system Installed individually and for integrated Operation.

7. Acceptance of penalty clause : 8. Acceptance of terms of payment : 9. Certificate/ documents regarding adequate :

Experience of doing similar job 10. Details of work presently in hand with amount :

(Awarded by APDCL and other successor Companies of ASEB)- a separate sheet if Required may be enclosed.

11. Details of manpower and T&Ps including :

Vehicles available with the firm to be Enclosed separately.

12. List of documents enclosed : .

a) ….

b) ….

c) ….

Signature with full name and designation of bidder or

his/her authorised representative with seal

16

SECTION 3

BILL OF MATERIALS

&

PRICE BIDDING SCHEDULE

17

Bill of Quantity (BOQ)

NIT No.CGM (PP&D)/ APDCL/AP-2011-12/R&M/Mukalmuwa-Poila/01 Scheme: Annual Plan 2011-12

BOQ for R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ)

Sl no

Items Unit Qty

1 Pole,9.75 mtr No 10

2 GI Channel for 33kV bus (100x50x6)mm Mtr 36

3 Disc Insulator 70 kN, B&S porcelain No 48

4 Hardware fittings for Disc Insulator B&S tension type set 12

5 Tension clamp for "Wolf" conductor No 12

6 33 kV Pin Insulator with GI Pin No 30

7 AAAC "Wolf" conductor for bus Mtr 200

8 33 kV VCB with GI mounting structure and marshalling box No 3

9 33 kV Relay & Control Panel for Transformer with differential relay(numeric type & with static TVM)

No 2

10 33 kV Relay & Control Panel for feeder with differential relay(numeric type & with static TVM)

No 1

11 33 kV,10kA Lightning Arrestor with Surge Counter & GI mounting structure (station type)

Set 3

12 33 kV Isolator, 630A with earth blade complete with mounting structure

set 1

13 33kV Isolator, 630A without earth blade complete with GI mounting structure

set 3

14 33kV Current transformer outdoor type(CT Ratio 200-100/5-5) with terminal connector and all accessories, mounting structure & Marshalling box

set 1

15 33kV Current transformer outdoor type(CT Ratio 200-100/5-5-5A) with terminal connector and all accessories, mounting structure & Marshalling box

set 2

16 33 kV Potential transformer outdoor type with terminal connector and all accessories with GI mounting structure & Marshalling box(set comprising of three unit)

set 1

17 Battery Bank of 110V, 100AH, 55 cells Maintenance free value regulated lead acid

set 1

18 110V DC 100AH, Battery Charger suitable for charging of 110 V DC 100AH Battery bank

No 1

19 AC Distribution Board No 1

20 110V, DC Distribution Board including connected cables with terminations.

No 1

21 11 kV Pin Insulator with GI Pin Set 12

22 11kV 9 unit VCB panel for 11kv feeder set 1

23 11 KV Isolator,400A without earth blade complete with mounting structure

Set 2

24 11kV GAOB switch 150 Amp set 5

25 11kV LA line type set 8

26 11 KV XLPE cable, 3-core, 300 Sq. mm. Mtr 100

27 11 KV XLPE cable, 3-core, 185 Sq. mm. Mtr 200

28 11 KV XLPE cable, 3-core, 95 Sq. mm Mtr 20

29 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE, 3-core, 300 Sq. mm.(outdoor) No 2

30 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE, 3-core, 300 Sq. mm.(indoor) No 2

31 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE,3-core, 185 Sq. mm.(outdoor) No 4

32 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE, 3-core, 185 Sq. mm.(indoor) No 4

33 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE, 3-core, 95 Sq. mm.(outdoor) No 1

18

34 11 KV Cable Kit for XLPE, 3-core, 95 Sq. mm.(indoor) No 1

35 Supply and laying of Cu. Control Cable, 7-core, 2.5 sq. mm. and terminating arrangements completely wired with equipments as per direction.

Mtr 200

36 Supply and laying of Cu. Control Cable, 4-core, 2.5 sq. mm. and terminating arrangements completely wired with equipments as per direction.

Mtr 200

37 GI nuts and bolts with GI washer Kg 70

38 Aluminium lugs 300 sqmm No 12

39 Aluminium lugs 240 sqmm No 36

40 11kV DO fuse set 1

41 Construction of control room building [120 sqm]including water supply & sanitary works, rubber mats, internal electrification

No 1

42 Earth filling,levelling, compacting, grading etc with river sand as per site condition and technical Specification.

CM 500

43 Switch yard gravelling of 0.150 Mtr thickness by 30mm size crushed stone

Sq Mtr 200

44

Materials as required for Switch yard chain link fencing with one steel gate complete with RCC footings, beams, brick walls etc. as per drawings and Specification. The rate shall be inclusive of all materials and labour.

RM 150

45 Heightening of transformer pad including supply of all foundation materials & Labour

No 2

46 Construction of foundation for LA, isolator VCB, CT PT bus etc including supply of all foundation materials & Labour

LS 1

47 Construction of Cable Trenches including supply of all materials and labour as per specification and drawing

Mtr 200

48 Materials as required for Switch yard lighting. Job 1

49 Control Room furniture( 1 table, 4 chairs, 1 almirah, 1 rack etc.) LS 1

50 Installation of deep tube well with all piping, 1 HP submersible pump, 500 litre overhead storage tank etc as per Specification with all materials and labour.

No 1

51 Fire extinguisher No 2

52 Construction of approach road (3.5mtr width) as per specification. The rate shall be inclusive of all materials and labour.

Mtr 60

53 Materials as required for painting of switchyard existing structure job 1

54 Earthing of switchyard Sq mtr 450

55 Materials as required for Lightning spike No 4

19

(BOQ) For construction new (2.6 Km) of 11kV line.

Sl No.

Item Description Unit Quantity

1 PSC pole, 9.75 mtrs. No 57

2 GI Channel cross arm 100x50x6x2200 mm No 26

3 GI Angle cross arm 50X50X6X2500 mm for guarding No 10

GI Angle cross arm 50X50X6 mm for cross bracing Mtr 195

4 11 KV GI T-cross arm No 31

5 Polymeric Disc insulator 45kN T&C No 78

6 H/W fittings for disc insulator tension type Set 78

7 11 KV polymeric pin insulator No 94

8 AAA “ Racoon” conductor Conductor

Km. 8.6

9 Tension clamp for Racoon No 78

10 C. I. Earth pipe No 6

11 G. I. wire , 8 SWG guarding Kg. 78

12 G. I. wire , 6 SWG for earthing Kg. 80

13 HT stay set with 11 KV guy insulator Set 10

14 PG clamp, for Racoon (Alcon 81) No 40

15 Danger plate HT No 15

16 GI nuts and bolts (Assorted) with GI washer Kg. 50

17 Barbed wire Kg. 114

18 Stay wire , 7/10 SWG Kg. 160

19 GI pole clamp No 50

BOQ for R&M of 33/11kV Nalbari (Poila) substation under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ)

Sl. No

Item description Unit Qty

1 33/11 KV 5MVA Transformer(department supply) No 1

2 33 kV, CT ( 200-100/5-5-5) with GI Mounting Structure & Marshalling Box(1 set comprising of three units)

Set 1

3 33 KV VCB with GI Mounting Structure and marshalling box and all accessories Set 2

4 33 KV LA with mounting structure (1 set comprising of three units) Set 2

5 33 KV Isolator without earth switch Set 2

6 33kV Disc insulator (1 set comprising of four units) Set 9

7 33kV pin insulator with GI pin No 24

8 11 KV,1-Core, 300 Sq.mm XLPE Power cable Mtr 240

9 Cable Kit (indoor) for 11 KV,1-Core, 300 Sq.mm XLPE Power cable No 4

10 Cable Kit (outdoor) for 11 KV,1-Core, 300 Sq.mm XLPE Power cable No 4

11 Switch yard gravelling of 0.150 Mtr thickness by 40mm size crushed stone SqMtr 500

12 Earth filling, levelling, compacting, grading etc with river sand as per site condition and technical Specification.

CM 1400

13

Construction of brick boundary wall (approximately 30 mtr length with 1.82 mtr height + 120 mtr length of 1.21 mtr height) as per drawing inclusive of RCC column of size 0.127 mtrX0.127 mtr at a distance of 2.74 mtr apart with 10 mm rod inclusive all materials and labour( with a gap of 25.4 mm gap after a distance of 25 mtr )

job 1

14 Installation of deep tube well with all piping, 1 HP submersible pump, 500 litre overhead storage tank etc as per Specification with all materials and labour.

Job 1

15 Earthing of Switch yard Sq mtr 100

16 Painting of existing switchyard structure Job 1

17 Minor repairing of Control room Job 1

18 Materials as required for Switchyard lighting job 1

20

Annexure-II The schedule of itemwise rates of various works for R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa & Nalbari (Poila) substation( excluding power transformer at Nalbari (Poila) and

construction of 2.6 Km new 11kV outgoing feeder from 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation under Rangia Electrical Circle, APDCL(LAZ) against Annual Plan 2011-12

NB. Bidder should fill up all columns properly. Iif any tax or duties included in the price should be mentioned specifically as “inclusive”. If any column of taxes/ octroi and duties is left blank or written as NA, the applicable taxes against that item shall be added in bid evaluation

S.No.

Brief Item Description Unit

Supply of materials Erection of materials

Grand Total

₹ Qty

Unit price of item,

inclusive of E.D., F&I up to work

site (₹)

Total amount

(₹)

Total Sales Tax (₹)

Other levies

eg. Octroi/Entry Tax

(₹)

Total cost of

the Item (₹)

Unit erection

/ installati

on charges

(₹)

Total Erection cost

(₹)

Work contract Tax (₹)

Service Tax (₹)

Total cost of erection (₹)

1 2 3 4 5 6=(4x5) 7= (6 X Rate)

8 = (6 X Rate)

9=(6+7+8) 10 11=

(4x10) 12= (11 X

Rate) 13= (11 X

Rate)

14 = 11+12+1

3 15=14+9

R&M of 33/11kV Mukalmuwa substation

1 Supply & erection of 9.75 m PSC pole with PCC grouting in the ratio 1:3:6 for 33kV bus and 11kV gantry as per drawing & direction.

No 10

2 Supply & erection of GI Channel (100x50x6)mm for 33kV bus as per drawing & direction.

Mtr 36

3

Supply, fitting of 70 kN, B&S Disc insulator for 33 kV bus with H/W fitting & tension clamp for wolf, ( 1 set comprises of 4 Disc insulator fitted in series with necessary H/W fitting & tension clamp)

Set 12

4 Supply & erection of 33kV pin insulator with GI pin Set 30

5 Supply and stringing of AAA Wolf conductor for 33kV & 11kV bus and jumpering with PG clamp as per direction

Mtr 200

6

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 KV VCB Outdoor type along with terminal box, marshalling box, GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 3

7 Foundation as required for installation of new 33 kV VCB (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 3

8 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV C&R Panel for transformer and all accessories (differential numeric relay) and Static TVM as per TS.

Set 2

9 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV C&R Panel for feeder and all accessories (differential numeric relay) and Static TVM as per TS

Set 1

21

10

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV, 10kA, LA with surge counter and with GI mounting structure (station type) and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 3

11 Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV, LA (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 3

12

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV Isolator, 630 A Double Break with earth blade with GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

set 1

13 Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV Isolator with earth blade (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 1

14

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV Isolator, 630 A Double Break without earth blade with GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.,

Set 3

15 Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV Isolator without earth blade (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 3

16

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5A with Marshalling box, GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 1

17 Foundation as required for installation of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5A (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 1

18

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5-5A with marshalling box, GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 2

19 Foundation as required for installation of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5-5A (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing

No 2

20

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV(33/√3)/(110/√3) V Potential Transformer Outdoor type along with terminal box, marshalling box, GI mounting structure

Set 1

21

Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV(33/√3)/(110/√3) V Potential Transformer (including

cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing

No 1

22 Supply, installation testing and commissioning of Battery Bank of 110V, 100AH, 55 cells Maintenance free

Set 1

22

23 Supply, installation testing and commissioning of 110V DC 100AH, Battery Charger suitable for charging of 110 V DC 100AH Battery bank

No 1

24 Supply, installation testing and commissioning of AC Distribution Board

No 1

25 Supply, installation testing and commissioning of 110V, DC Distribution Board including connected cables with terminations.

No 1

26 Supply and erection 11 kV Pin Insulator with GI Pin for 11kV Gantry

No 12

27 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 9 unit VCB panel for 11kV feeder

set 1

28 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning 11 kV Isolator, 400 A without earth blade complete with GI mounting structure ( incoming and bus coupler)

Set 2

29 Foundation as required for installation of 11 kV Isolator without earth blade (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing

No 2

30 Supply and installation of 11kV GOAB, 150A on 11kV feeders and as per direction

Set 5

31 Supply and erection of 11 kV, LA (line type) with necessary earthing arrangement (set comprising of three nos. )

set 8

32 Supply and laying of Cu. Control Cable, 7-core, 2.5 sq. mm. and terminating arrangements completely wired with equipments as per direction.

Mtr 200

33 Supply and laying of Cu. Control Cable, 4-core, 2.5 sq. mm. and terminating arrangements completely wired with equipments as per direction.

Mtr 200

34 Supply and laying of XLPE cable 3 core 300sqmm as per direction

Mtr 100

35 Supply and laying of XLPE cable 3 core 185 sqmm as per direction

Mtr 200

36 Supply and laying of XLPE cable 3 core 95 sqmm as per direction

Mtr 20

37 Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 300 sqmm ( outdoor type)

No 2

38 Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 300 sqmm ( indoor type)

No 2

39 Supp Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 185 sqmm ( outdoor type)

No 4

40 Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 185 sqmm ( indoor type)

No 4

41 Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 95 sqmm ( outdoor type)

No 1

42 Supply, fitting and fixing of XLPE cable kit cable 3 core 95 sqmm ( indoor type)

No 1

43 Supply and installation of 11kV DO fuse Set 1

23

44

Supply and Installation of earthing system with MS flats 50x10mm(for earthing mat) with GI flat 25x6mm(for earthing conductor)and GI pipe 40 mm dia. of length 3000mm ( 24 nos. earth electrodes) as per direction covering an area of 25 mtr x 18 mtr

Sq mtr

450

45

Construction of RCC control room building (120 SQM as per drawing and specifications including internal electrification, water supply & sanitary works, rubber mat etc complete as per direction including supply of control room furniture as mentioned in BOQ.

No 1

46 Earth filling work inside the switch yard area with river sand, levelling, compacting, grading etc as per site condition and technical specification.

CM 500

47 Switchyard gravelling of 0.150 mtr(thickness) by broken stone of 30 mm size inclusive of labour and material

Sq mtr

200

48

Construction of Switch yard chain link fencing with one steel gate complete with RCC footings, beams, brick walls etc. as per drawings and Specification. The rate shall be inclusive of all materials and labour. as directed.

RM 150

49

Heightening of existing Transformer pad including supply of all foundation materials & labour and necessary lifting of transformer on temporary base and placing it back after completion of heightening work and commissioning of the same as per direction.

No 2

50 Construction of Cable Trenches Size:(950x400) mm including supply of all materials and labour as per specification and drawing

Mtr 110

51 Construction of Cable Trenches Size:1260x650 mm including supply of all materials and labour as per specification and drawing,

Mtr 110

52

Supply & installation of Switch yard lighting with sodium vapour with 250 Watt lamp total 6 numbers to be fixed in switchyard structure including fitting & fixing with required size of cable to be connected with ACDB as per direction

Job 1

53

Installation of deep tube well with all piping, 1/2 HP submersible pump, 500 litre overhead Sintex make storage tank to be fitted on the roof slab of control room building and ladder with MS angle 50x50x6 mm and 16 mm dia MS plain bar as steps from ground to Control room roof slab etc as per Specification with all materials and labour.

Job 2

54 Fire extinguisher: Carbon Dioxide type fire extinguishers (capacity 3 kg) as per specification

No 2

55 Construction of WBM approach road (3.5 mtr width) upto switchyard area as per specification. The rate shall be inclusive of all materials and labour.

Mtr 60

24

56 Painting of existing switchyard structure including supply of all materials and labour as per direction.

Job 1

57

Temporary arrangement for evacuation of power at 11 KV side( for a total of three feeders) by 1 set of GOAB and 1 set of DO fuse unit for each feeder. These GOAB and DO fuse are to be reused later as per Sl. No. 30 and 43

Job 1

58

Dismantling of old existing structure including chain link fencing, gate and reusing the good materials as per direction and stacking the obsolete materials at APDCL designated store as per direction

Job 1

Construction of 11 KV line with PSC pole

1 Supply & Erection of 9.75 mtr PSC Pole including boulder packing for 11kV line

No 57

2 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of GI Channel (100x50x6x2200mm) on pole structure with necessary GI pole clamp , GI Nuts & Bolts , drilling of holes, etc

No 26

3

Supply, Fitting & Fixing of GI Angle (50x50x6x2500mm)for guard bracket on pole structure for 11kV line with necessary GI pole clamps including Nuts & Bolts etc with fitting of GI wire 8SWG for guarding as per direction

No 10

4 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of GI Angle (50x50x6 mm)for cross bracing on DP structure with necessary GI pole clamps including Nuts & Bolts etc as per direction

Mtr 195

5 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of 11 kV GI T-Cross Arm, Nuts & Bolts , drilling of holes, etc

No 31

6 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of 11 kV composite Polymeric Disc Insulator 45KN (T&C) with Hardware fittings, tension clamps etc as per direction

No 78

7 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of 11KV composite Polymeric Pin Insulator

No 94

8 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of HT Stay Set complete with digging of earth along with fitting with Stay Wire 7/10 SWG & HT guy insulator for line

Set 10

9

Supply & Stringing of AAA “ Racoon” Conductor, tensioning with clamp, bindings, jumpering with PG clamps, jointing sleeves etc in 11kV line including jungle cutting wherever necessary and as per direction .

Conductor

KM

8.6

10 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of Barbed Wire on HT poles @ 2Kg per pole as anti climbing device

pole 57

11

Supply, Fitting & Fixing of CI Earth Pipe by digging of pit as per direction with necessary connection with strips ,GI Wire 6 SWG for Earthing as per direction( for guard earthing)

No 6

25

12 Supply, Fitting & Fixing of HT Danger Plate on 9.75 m PSC pole

No. 15

R&M of 33/11kV Nalbari (Poila) substation

1

Erection, testing & commissioning of 1 no. of 33/11 kV, 5 MVA Power Transformers ( transformer will supplied by APDCL) and laying & terminating all signaling and control cables

No 1 nil nil

2

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5-5A with Marshalling box, GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing

Set 1

3 Foundation as required for installation of 33kV CT 200-100/5-5-5A (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing

No 1

4

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 KV VCB Outdoor type along with terminal box, marshalling box, GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 2

5 Foundation as required for installation of new 33 kV VCB (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 2

6 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV, 10kA, LA with GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.

Set 2

7 Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV, LA (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 2

8

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 33 kV Isolator, 630 A Double Break without earth blade with GI mounting structure and all accessories as per TS and approved drawing.,

Set 2

9 Foundation as required for installation of 33 kV Isolator without earth blade (including cost of all materials) as per TS and approved drawing.

No 2

10

Supply, fitting of 70 kN, B&S Disc insulator for 33 kV bus with H/W fitting & tension clamp for wolf, ( 1 set comprises of 4 Disc insulator fitted in series with necessary H/W fitting & tension clamp)

Set 9

11 Supply & erection of 33kV pin insulator with GI pin No 24

12 Supply and laying of 11kV XLPE cable 1 core 300sqmm as per direction

Mtr 240

13 Supply, fitting and fixing of 11kV XLPE cable kit cable 1 core 300 sqmm ( outdoor type)

No 4

14 Supply, fitting and fixing of 11kV XLPE cable kit cable 1 core 300 sqmm ( indoor type)

No 4

26

15 Switchyard gravelling of 0.150 mtr(thickness) by broken stone of 40mm size inclusive of labour and material

Sq mtr

500

16 Earth filling work inside the switch yard area with river sand, levelling, compacting, grading etc as per site condition and technical specification

CM 1400

17

Construction of brick boundary wall (approximately 30 mtr length with 1.82 mtr height + 120 mtr length of 1.21 mtr height) as per drawing inclusive of RCC column of size 0.127 mtrX0.127 mtr at a distance of 2.74 mtr apart with 10 mm rod inclusive all materials and labour( with a gap of 25.4 mm gap after a distance of 25 mtr )

Job 1

18

Supply and Installation of deep tube well with all piping, 1/2 HP submersible pump, 500 litre overhead Sintex make storage tank to be fitted on the roof slab of control room building and ladder with MS angle 50x50x6 mm and 16 mm dia MS plain bar as steps from ground to Control room roof slab etc as per Specification with all materials and labour

Job 1

19

Supply and Installation of earthing system with MS flats 50x10mm(for earthing mat) with GI flat 25x6mm(for earthing conductor)and GI pipe 40 mm dia. of length 3000mm ( 6 nos. earth electrodes) as per direction covering an area of 10 mtr x 10 mtr

Sq mtr

100

20 Painting of existing switchyard structure including supply of all materials and labour as per direction.

Job 1

21 Minor repairing of control room building job 1

22

Supply & installation of Switch yard lighting with sodium vapour with 250 Watt lamp total 6 numbers to be fixed in switchyard structure including fitting & fixing with required size of cable to be connected with ACDB as per direction

Job 1

Signature of the bidder

Date Name

Address

27

SECTION -4

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

28

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The bidder shall comply with the following general requirements along with other

specifications.

1.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

1.1 The bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his offer failing which

the offer shall be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for individual type

of equipment offered.

i) The structure of organization

ii) The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work

iii) The system of purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials

iv) The system for ensuring quality of workmanship

v) The quality assurance arrangements shall confirm to the relevant requirement of ISO

9001 on ISO 9002 as applicable.

vi) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-supplies for the raw

materials, list of standards according to which the raw material are tested, list of tests

normally carried out on raw material in the presence of suppliers representative, copies

of test certificates.

vii) Information and copies of test certificates as on (i) above in respect of bought out items

viii) List of manufacturing facilities available

ix) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.

x) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried

out for quality control and details of such test and inspection.

xi) List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment specified

and test plant limitation, if any vis-à-vis the type. Special acceptance and routine tests

specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be very clearly brought out in

"Schedule of Deviations" from the specified test requirement.

1.2 The contractor shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit the following information to

the purchaser.

i) List of the raw material as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-

suppliers selected from those furnished along with the offer.

ii) Type test certificated of the raw material and bought out accessories if required by the

purchaser.

iii) Quality Assurance Plant (QAP) with hold points for purchasers inspection. QAP and

purchasers hold points shall be discussed between the purchaser and contractor before

the QAP is finalized.

The contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out accessories and central

excise asses for raw material at the time of routine testing if required by the purchaser and

ensure that the quality assurance requirements of specification are followed by the sub-

contractor.

1.3 The Quality Assurance Programme shall give a description of the Quality System and

Quality Plans with the following details.

i) Quality System

The structure of the organization.

The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work.

The system of purchasing, taking delivery of verification of materials

The system of ensuring of quality workmanship.

The system of control of documentation.

The system of retention of records.

The arrangement of contractor internal auditing.

A list of administrator and work procedures required to achieve contractor’s quality

requirements. These procedures shall be made readily available to the purchaser for

inspection on request.

29

ii) Quality Plans

An outline of the proposed work and program sequence.

The structure of contractor’s organizations for the contract.

The duties and responsibilities ensuring quality of work.

Hold and notification points.

Submission of engineering documents required by this specification.

The inspection of the materials and components on request.

Reference to contractor’s work procedures appropriate to each activity.

Inspection during fabrication /construction.

Final inspection and test.

2.0 Inspection

2.1 The Owner's representative or third party nominee shall at all times be entitled to have

access to the works and all places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component parts

shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted

inspection of the Contractor's and sub-Contractor's works, raw materials, manufacture of the

material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.

2.2 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor only under packed

condition as detailed in the specification. The Owner shall select samples at random from

the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. Insulators shall normally be offered for

inspection in lots not exceeding 5000 nos. the lot should be homogeneous and should

contain insulators manufactured in the span of not more than 3-4 consecutive weeks.

2.3 The Contractor shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of starting and the

progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could be

made for inspection.

2.4 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been

satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the Owner in

writing. In the latter case also the material shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing

for all tests specified herein have been completed.

2.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be no way relieve the Contractor of his

responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent

subsequent rejection, if such material are later found to be defective.

3.0 Additional Tests

3.1 The Owner reserves the right of having at his own expense any other test(s) of reasonable

nature carried out at Contractor's premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the

type, acceptance and routine tests specified in these bidding documents against any

equipments to satisfy himself that the material comply with the Specifications.

3.2 The Owner also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this specification at

his own expense on the samples drawn from the site at Contractor's premises or at any

other test center. In case of evidence of noncompliance, it shall be binding on the part of

the Contractor to prove the compliance of the items to the technical specifications by repeat

tests or correction of deficiencies, or replacement of defective items, all without any extra

cost to the Owner.

4.0 Test Reports

4.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies along with one

original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner only after which the

commercial production of the concerned materials shall start.

4.2 Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy

30

shall be returned duly certified by the Owner, only after which the material shall be

despatched.

4.3 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for periodic

inspection by the Owner's representative.

4.4 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Contractor. These

shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Owner.

5.0 List of Drawings and Documents:

5.1 The bidder shall furnish the following along with bid.

i) Two sets of drawings showing clearly the general arrangements, fitting details, electrical

connections etc.

ii) Technical leaflets (users manual) giving operating instructions.

iii) Three copies of dimensional drawings of the box for each quoted item.

The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved

drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.

All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier's risk.

Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility

and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting

the specification.

5.2 The requirements of the latest revision of application standards, rules and codes of

practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering,

design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and

purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or materials which, in his judgment is not

in full accordance therewith.

5.3 The successful Bidder shall within 2 weeks of notification of award of contract submit three

sets of final versions of all the drawings as stipulated in the purchase order for purchaser's

approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the

supplier within two weeks. The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and

resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval. The supplier shall within

two weeks. Submit 30 prints and two good quality report copies of the approved drawings

for purchaser's use.

5.4 Eight sets of operating manuals/technical leaflets shall be supplied to each consignee for

the first instance of supply.

5.4.1 One set of routine test certificates shall accompany each dispatch consignment.

5.4.2 The acceptance test certificates in case pre-dispatch inspection or routine test certificates in

cases where inspection is' waived shall be got approved by the purchasers.

6.0 Any Item specification if not available in this document Contractor shall supply and execute

the items meeting the relevant IS specification with the approval of the purchaser.

31

SECTION – 5

FORMS OF BID

32

PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR BID GUARANTEE/SECURITY

(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act) The non-Judicial stamp paper should be in the name of issuing bank

Ref………………………….. Bank Guarantee No…………..

Date……………………. To

The Chief General Manager (F&A) Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar Guwahati-1

Dear Sirs/ Madam, In accordance with invitation to bid under your Bid No………………. M/s………………. having its Registered/ Head Office at ……………..( hereinafter called the ‘Bidder’) wish to participate in the said Bid or ………………… and you, as a special favour have agreed to accept an irrevocable and unconditional Bank Guarantee for an amount of ……………….. valid upto……………………. On behalf of Bidder in lieu of the Bid deposit required to be made by the bidder, as a condition precedent for participation in the Said Bid. We, the …………………. Bank at …………………… have our Head Office at…………..( local address) guarantee and undertake to pay immediately on demand by Assam Power Distribution Company Limited, the Amount of …………………………………………… …………………………………………………..( in words & figures) without any reservation, protest, demur and recourse. Any such demand made by said ‘Owner’ shall be conclusive and binding on us irrespective of any dispute or difference raised by the Bidder. The Guarantee shall be irrevocable and shall remain valid up to and including …………. @....................... if any further extension of this guarantee is required, the same shall be extended to such required period ( not exceeding one year) on receiving instruction from M/s ………… … ………. on whose behalf this guarantee is issued. In witness whereof the Bank, through its authorized office, has set its hand and stamp on this …………… day of ………………….. 20………… at ………………………… WITNESS ……………………… ……………………. (Signature) ( Signature) …………………….. …………………… (Name) (Name) ……………………. …………………… ( Official Address) (Official Address)

@ This date shall be thirty (30) days after the last date for which the bid is valid.

33

PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR CONTRACT PERFORMANCE (To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

Ref………………………….. Bank Guarantee No…………..

Date……………………. To

The Chief General Manager (F&A) Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar Guwahati-1

Dear Sirs/ Madam, In consideration of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd., (herein after referred to as the ‘Owner’ which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to M/s…………… ….……………………….with registered/ Head office at ……………….( hereinafter referred to as “ Contractor” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns), a Contract by issued of Owner’s Letter of Award No…………… dated……………….. and the same having been acknowledged by the contractor, resulting in a contract bearing No…………….. dated contractor having agreed to provide a Contract Performance Guarantee for the faithful performance of the entire Contract equivalent to……………… being(%) (Percent *) of the said value Contract to the Owner. We………………………………………………………………………………………….. (Name & Address) having its Head Office at …………………( hereinafter referred to as the “ Bank” , which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns) do hereby guarantee and undertake to pay the owner, on demand any all monies payable by the contractor to be extent of …………………. As aforesaid at any time up to ………………………..**( day/month/year) without any demur, reservation , contest , recourse or protest and / or without any reference to this contractor. Any such demand made by the owner on the bank shall be conclusive and binding notwithstanding any difference between the Owner the Contractor or any dispute pending before any Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any other authority . The bank undertakes not to revoke this guarantee during its currency without previous consent of the owner and further agrees that the guarantee herein contained shall continue to be enforceable till the owner discharges this guarantee. The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of the Bank under the guarantee, from time to time to extend the time for performance or the contract by the contractor. The owner shall have the fullest liberty, without affecting this guarantee, to postpone from time to time the exercise of any power vested in them or of any right which they might have against the contractor, and to exercise the same at any time in any matter, and either to enforce or to for bear to enforce any covenants, contained or implied, in the contract between the owner and the contractor or any other course or remedy or security available to the owner. The Bank shall not be released to its obligations under these presents by any exercise by the owner of its liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or any of them or by reason of any other act of omission or commission on the part of the owner or any other indulgences shown by the owner or by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law would , but for this provision have the effect of relieving the Bank. The bank also agrees that the owner at its option shall be entitled to enforce this guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the contractor and not withstanding any security or other guarantee the owner may have in relation to the Contractor’s liabilities. Notwithstanding anything contained herein above our liability under this guarantee is restricted to ……………………. And it shall remain in force up to an including …………………….. and shall be extended from time to time for such period( not exceeding 1 year) as may be desired M/s………………………………………………………….on whose behalf this guarantee has been given.

34

Dated this……………………. Day of ……………………….. 20……………… at………… WITNESS ……………………………. ……………………… (Signature) (Signature) …………………………… …………………….. (Name) (Name) ………………………….. …………………….. (Official address) (Official address) Attorney as per power Of Attorney No………….. Date…………………….. Notes * This sum shall be 10%(Ten) of the Contract price. ** The date will be 90(Ninety) days after the end of the Warranty Period as specified in the contract. 1. The stamp paper of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of issuing bank.

35

PROFORMA OF EXTENSION OF BANK GUARANTEE Ref………………………….. Date……………………. To

The Chief General Manager (PP&D) Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar Guwahati-1

Dear Sirs/ Madam, Sub: Extension of Bank Guarantee No……………….. for Rs…………………. Favouring

yourselves , expiring on …………………. On account of M/S………………………….. in respect of contract no……………………. dated …………….. ( hereinafter called original Bank Guarantee).

At the request of M/s ……………………… we …………………… bank, branch office at ………………….. and having its Head Office at ………………………. Do hereby extend our liability under the above mentioned Bank Guarantee No………………… dated………………………for a further period of ……………………… ( Years/ Months) from………………….. to expire on………………….. expect as provided above, all other terms and conditions of the original Bank Guarantee No………………………. dated ………………. Shall remain unaltered and binding. Please treat this as an integral part of the original Bank Guarantee to which it would be attached.

Yours faithfully For……………………………… Manager/ Agent/Accountant ………………….. Power of attorney No…………………… Dated…………………………………… SEAL OF BANK

Note: The non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of the Bank who has issued the Bank Guarantee.

36

PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT ( To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act )

Ref………………………….. Bank guarantee No…………………… Date……………………. To

The Chief General Manager (PP&D) Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar Guwahati-1

Dear Sirs/ Madam, In consideration of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd.(hereinafter referred to as the ‘Owner’, which expressions shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to M/s…………………………… hereinafter referred to as the ‘Contractor’ which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof , include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns), a Contract by issue of Owner’s letter of Award No…………………… Dated……………………and the same having been acknowledged by the contractors, resulting in a Contract bearing no…………………. Dated…………………. Valued (at………………………………( in words and figures). For ………………………….Contract (space of work)………………………………….. (hereinafter called the ‘Contract’) and the Owner having agreed to make an advance payment to the Contractor for performance of the above contract amounting ……………………………… (in words and figures) as an advance against Bank Guarantee to be furnished by the Contractor. We…………………………..( Name of the Bank) having its Head Office at……………………………… ( hereinafter referred to as the ‘Bank’, which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof , include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns) do hereby guarantee and undertake to pay the owner , immediately on demand any or, all monies payable by the contractor to the extent of ………………..as aforesaid at any time upto…………………….. (a….) without any demur, reservation, contest, recourse or protest and/or without any reference to the contractor. Any such demand made by the Owner on the Bank shall be conclusive and binding notwithstanding any difference between the Owner and the Contractor or any dispute pending before any Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any other authority. We agree that the guarantee herein contained shall be irrevocable and shall continue to be enforceable till the owner discharge this guarantee. The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of the Bank under this guarantee, from time to time to vary the advance or to extent the time for performance of the contract by the Contractor. The Owners shall have the fullest liberty without affecting this guarantee, to postpone from time to time the exercise of any power vested in them or of any right which they might have against the Contractor and to exercise the same at any time in any manner, and either to enforce any covenants, contained or implied, in the contact between the Owner and the Contractor or any other course or remedy or security available to the Owner. The Bank shall not be released of its obligations under this presents by any exercise by the owner of its liberty with reference to the matter aforesaid of any of them or by reason of any other act or forbearance or other acts of omission or commission on the part of the owner or any other indulgence shown by the owner or by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law would be for this provision have the effect of relieving the Bank. The Bank also agrees that the Owner at its option shall be entitled to enforce this guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the contractor and not withstanding any security or other guarantee that the owner may have in relation to the contractors liabilities. Notwithstanding anything hereinabove our liability under this guarantee is limited to………… and it shall remain in force upto an including ……………………….( @ and shall be extended from time to time for such period ( not exceeding 1 year as may be desired by M/s…………………………………………………………………...dated this ………. Day of ……………….. 20……. At…………………………….. WITNESS…………………………………….. ……………………………… …….……………………….. (Signature) (Signature) ……………………………. ……………………………… (Name) (Name) …………………………..…. (Designation) (Official Address) (With Bank Stamp) Attorney as per Power of attorney No……………………… …. Dated…………………. Strike whichever is not applicable

@ The date will be 90(ninety) days after the date of completion of the Contract.

37

PROFORMA OF “AGREEMENT” (To be executed on non-Judicial stamp paper)

This Agreement made this …………….. day of ………… two thousand……………. Between Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. having its head office at Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-1 ( hereinafter referred to as ‘Owner’ or ‘APDCL’, which expression shall include its administrators, successors and assign on one part and (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Contractors ‘X’ ( Name of the contracting Co.) which expression shall include its administrators, successors, executors and permitted assigns) on the other part. WHEREAS APDCL desirous of …………………….. in ……………. Circle associated with APDCL at ……………….(District) invited Bids for…………………………………………….. ………………………………. (Briefly describe scope of works) for the first state of the project as per its Bid Specification No……………………………… AND WHEREAS……………………….”X” ………………………. Had participated in the above referred Bidding vide their proposal No……………………. dated………………. And awarded the Contract to……………..” X”…………….. on terms and conditions documents referred to therein which have been acknowledged by……………….”X”…………………..resulting into a “Contract”

NOW THEREFORE THIS DEED WITNESS AS UNDER:- 1.0 Article 1.1 Award of Contract APDCL awarded the contract to……………..”X”……………… for the work of …………… on the terms and conditions contained in its letter of Award No…….. ………. Dated…………… and the documents referred to therein. The award has taken effect from aforesaid letter of award. The terms and expression used in this agreement shall have the same meaning as are assigned to them in the ‘Contract Documents’ referred to in this succeeding Article. 2.0 Documentation 2.1 The contract shall be performed strictly as per the terms and condition stipulated herein and in the following documents attached herewith( hereinafter referred to as “Contract Documents”.) i) Section 1-11 of the Bidding Document. ii) Proposal Sheets, Data Sheets, Drawing work schedule submitted by “X”. APDCL’s Letter of Award No………….. dated……………….duly acknowledged by “X”. Quality Plans for manufacturing and field activities entitled as Quality Plan. All the aforesaid Contract Documents shall form an integral part of this agreement , in so far as the same or any part conform to the bidding documents and what has been specifically agreed to by the Owner in its letter of Award. Any matter inconsistent therewith, contrary or repugnant thereto or any deviations taken by the Contractor in its ‘Proposal’ but not agreed to specially by the Owner in its Letter of Award shall be deemed to have been withdrawn b y the Contractor. For the sake of brevity, this agreement along with its aforesaid Contract Documents shall be referred to as the ‘Agreement’. 3.0 Conditions & Covenants 3.1 The scope of Contract, Consideration, Terms of Payment, Price Adjustments, Taxes wherever applicable, Insurance, Liquidated Damage, Performance Guarantees and all other terms and conditions are contained in APDCL’s Letter of Award No………........... dated……………… read in conjunction with other aforesaid contract documents. The contract shall be duly performed by the Contract Documents, but which are needed for successful, efficient, safe and reliable operation of the equipment unless otherwise specifically excluded in the specification under ‘exclusion’ or Letter of Award. 3.2 The scope of work shall also include supply and installation of all such items which are not specifically mentioned in the contract Documents, but which are needed for successful, efficient, safe and reliable operation of the equipment unless otherwise specifically excluded in the specifications under ‘exclusions’ or ‘Letter of Award’. 3.3 Time Schedule 3.3.1 Time is the essence of the Contract and schedules shall be strictly adhered to “X” shall perform the work in accordance with the agreed schedules. 3.4 Quality Plans 3.4.1 The Contractor is responsible for the proper execution of the Quality Plans mentioned in Section 4.8 of GTC. The work beyond the customer’s hold points will progress only with the owners consent. The Owner will also undertake quality surveillance and quality audit of the Contractor’s /Sub-contractor’s works, systems and procedures and quality control activities. The Contractor further agrees that any change in the Quality Plan will be made only with the Owner’s approval. The contractor shall also perform all quality control activities, inspection and tests agreed with the Owner to demonstrate full compliance with the contract requirements. 3.4.2 The contractor also agrees to provide the Owner with the necessary facilities for carrying out inspection, quality audit and quality surveillance of contractors and its Subcontractor’s Quality Assurance Systems and Manufacturing Activities. These shall include but not limited to the following:

Relevant plant standards, drawing and procedures;

Detailed Quality Assurance System manuals for manufacturing activities.

Storage procedures and instructions weld, NDT, heat treatment prior to commencement of manufacture;

Complete set of log sheets (blank) mentioned in the Quality Plans. It is expressly agreed to by the contractor that the quality test and inspection by the owner shall not in any way relief the contractor of its responsibilities for quality standards and performance guarantee and their other obligations under the Agreement. 3.4.4 “X’ agrees to submit quality Assurance Documents to APDCL for review and record after completion and within 3 weeks of dispatch of material. The package will include the following :

Factory test result, inspection report for testing required by this contract or applicable codes and standards.

38

Two copies of inspection reports duly signed by Quality Assurance personnel of both APDCL and “X” for the agreed customer hold points.

Report of the rectification works where and if applicable. 3.5 It is expressly agreed to by the Contractor that notwithstanding the fact that the Contract is termed as Supply-cum-Erection Contract or indicates the break-up of the Contract consideration, for convenience of operation and for payment of sale tax on supply portion, it is in fact one composite Contract on single source responsibility basis and the Contractor is bound to perform the total Contract in its entirely and non-performance of any part or portion of the Contract shall be deemed to be breach of the entire Contract. 3.6 The Contractor guarantees that the equipment package under the Contract shall meet the ratings and performance parameters as stipulated in the technical specifications (Section 10) and in the event of any deficiencies found in the requisite performance figures, the Owner may at its option reject the equipment package or alternatively accept it on the terms and conditions and subject to levy of the liquidated damages in terms of Contract documents. The amount of liquidated damages so leviable shall be in accordance with the contract document and without any limitation. 3.7 It is further agreed by the contractor that the contract performance guarantee shall in no way be constructed to limit or restrict the owner’s equipment right to recover the damages/compensation due to shortfall in the equipment performance figures as stated in Para 3.6 above or under any other clause of the agreement. The amount of damages/compensation shall be recoverable either by way of deduction from the contract price, contract performance guarantee and or otherwise. The contract performance guarantee furnished by the contractor is irrevocable and unconditional and the owner shall have the power to invoke it notwithstanding any dispute or difference between the owner and the contractor pending before any court tribunal, arbitrator or any other authority. 3.8 This Agreement constitutes full and complete understanding between the parties and terms of the payment. It shall supersede all prior correspondence terms and conditions contained in the Agreement. Any modification of the agreement shall be effected only by a written instrument signed by the authorized representative of both the parties. 4.0 SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES 4.1 It is specifically agreed between parties that all the differences or disputes arising out of the agreement or touching the subject matter of the agreement shall be decided by process of settlement and Arbitration as specified in clause 41 of the General Condition of the Contract and provision of the Indian Arbitration Act, 1996 shall apply. Guwahati Courts alone shall have exclusive jurisdiction over the same. 4.2 NOTICE OF DEFAULT Notice of default given by either party to the other under agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly and properly served upon the parties hereto if delivered against acknowledgement or by telex or by registered mail with acknowledgements due addressed to the signatories at the addresses mentioned at Guwahati. IN WITNESS WHEROF, the parties through their duly authorized representatives have executed these presents (execution where of has been approved by the competent authorities of both the parties) on the day, month and year first above mentioned at Guwahati . WITNESS: 1. ……………………….. (Owner’s signature) ( Printed Name) 2. ……………………… (Designation)( Company’s Stamp) 3. …………………….. (Contractor’s Signature)(Company’s Name) 4. …………………….. (Designation)(Company’s Stamp)

Applicable in case of single award is placed on one party on Supply-cum- Erection basis. In two separate awards are placed on single party/two different parties this clause is to be modified suitably while signing the contract agreement to be signed separately for two awards to incorporate cross fall breach clause.

39

FORM OF POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR JOINT VENTURE

(On Non-judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate value to be Purchased in the Name of Joint Venture) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE, the Partners whose details are given hereunder……................................................................. have formed a Joint Venture under the laws of……………………..and having our Registered Office(s)/Head Office(s) at ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….....(herein after called the 'Joint Venture' which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors, administrators and assigns) acting thorough M/S……………… ………………………………………………………………………….. being the Partner in-charge do hereby' constitute, nominate and appoint M/S…………………………………… ………………………………..a Company incorporated under the laws of arid having its Registered/Head Office at..as our duly 'constituted lawful Attorney (hereinafter called "Attorney" or" Authorized Representative" or "Partner In-charge") to exercise all or any of the powers for and on be.ha1f of, the Joint Venture in regard* to ---------------------(Name of the Package) (Specification No.-------------------------) of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. Bijulee Bhawan, Paltan Bazar, GUWAHATI (hereinafter called the "Owner"). and the bids for which' have been invited by the Owner, to undertake the following acts:

i) To submit proposal and participate in the aforesaid Bid Specification of the Owner on behalf of the “Joint Venture”.

ii) To negotiate with the Owner 'the terms and' conditions for award of the Contract pursuant to the aforesaid Bid and to sign the Contract with the Owner for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture'.

iii) To do any other act or submit any document rated to the above. iv) To receive, accept and execute .the Contract for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture".

It is clearly understood that the Partner In-charge (Lead Partner) shall ensure performance of the Contract(s) and if one or more Partner fail to perform their respective portion of the Contract(s), the same shall be deemed to be a default by all the Partners. It is expressly understood that this Power of Attorney shall remain valid binding and irrevocable till completion of the Defect Liability Period in terms of the Contract. The Joint Venture hereby agrees and undertakes to ratify and confirm all the above whatsoever the said Attorney/ Authorized Representative/Partner In-charge quotes in the bid, negotiates and signs the Contract with the Owner and/or proposes to act on behalf of the joint Venture by virtue of this Power of Attorney and the same shall bind the Joint Venture as if done by itself.

* Strike which is not applicable.

IN WITNESS THEREOF the Partners Constituting the Joint Venture as aforesaid have executed these presents on this …………….. day of ……………....... under the Common Seal(s) of their Companies.

for and on behalf of the Partners of Joint Ventures

The Common Seal of the above Partners of the Joint Venture: The Common Seal has been affixed there unto in the presence of : WITNESS

1. Signature _________________________

Name___________________________ Designation_______________________ Occupation ________________________

2. Signature _________________________

Name___________________________ Designation_______________________ Occupation ________________________

40

FORM OF JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE TO BE PURCHASED IN THE NAME OF JOINT VENTURE)

PROFORMA OF JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT BETWEEN ______________________ ______________________________ AND ____________________________________________ FOR BID SPECIFICATION No_______________________________OF ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LTD.

THIS Joint Venture agreement executed on this _____day of ______________Two thousand eight and between M/S _________________________________________________ a Company incorporated under the laws of _______________________________ and having its registered office at __________________________________ _____________________________ (herein after called the “Lead Partner” which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) and M/S _______________________________________________ a Company incorporated under the laws of _______________________________ and having its registered office at ________________________________________________________________ (herein after called the “Partner” which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) for purpose of making a bid and entering into a contract* (in case of award) for Construction of _______________________________(name of the package) against the specifications No._____________________ of APDCL BIJULEE BHAWAN, PALTAN BAZAR, GUWAHATI – 781001, an

Electricity Distribution Company registered under Indian Electricity Act, 2003 having its registered office at Bijulee Bhawan, Paltan Bazar, Guwahati – 781001 (herein after called the “Owner”)

WHEREAS the Owner invited bids as per the above mentioned Specification for the design manufacture, supply and erection, testing and commissioning of Equipment/Materials stipulated in the bidding documents under subject Package* For_________________ (Package Name) (Specification No.:_____________________) AND WHEREAS Annexure – A (Qualification Requirement of the Bidder). Section-4, forming part of the bidding documents, stipulates that a Joint Venture of two or more qualified firms as partners, meeting the requirement of Annexure-A, Section 4 as applicable may bid, provided the .Joint Venture fulfills all other requirements of Annexure-A, Section 4 and in such a case, the BID shall be signed by all the partners so as to legally bind all the Partners of the .Joint Venture, who will be jointly and severally liable to perform the Contract and all obligations hereunder . * Strike which is not applicable. The above clause further states that the Joint Venture agreement shall be attached to the bid and the contract performance guarantee will be as per the format enclosed with the bidding document without any restriction or liability for either party.

AND 'WHEREAS the bid has been submitted to the Owner vide proposal No ................................. dated ........................................................... by Lead Partner based on the Joint Venture agreement between all the Partners under these presents and the bid in accordance with the requirements of Annexure-A (Qualification Requirements of the Bidders), Section -4 has been signed by all the partners. NOW THIS INDENTURE WITNESSETH AS UNDER: In consideration of the above premises and agreements all the Partners to this ,Joint Venture do hereby now agree as follows:

1. In consideration of the award of the Contract by the Owner to the Joint Venture partners, we, the Partners to the Joint Venture agreement do hereby agree that M/S__________________ shall act as Lead Partner and further declare and confirm that we shall jointly and severally be bound unto the Owner for the successful performance of the Contract and shall be fully responsible for the design, manufacture, supply, and successful performance of the equipment in accordance with the Contract.

2. In case of any breach of the said Contract by the Lead Partner or other Partner(s) of the Joint Venture agreement, the Partner(s) do hereby agree to be fully responsible for the successful performance of the Contract and to carry out all the obligations and responsibilities under the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.

3. Further, if the Owner suffers any loss or damage on account of any breach in the Contract or any shortfall in the performance of the equipment in meeting the performance guaranteed as per the specification in terms of the Contract, tile Partner(s) of these presents undertake to promptly make good such loss or damages caused to the Owner, on its demand without any demur. It shall not be necessary or obligatory for the Owner to proceed against Lead Partner to these presents before proceeding

41

against or dealing with the other Partner(s) 4. The financial liability of the Partners of this Joint Venture agreement to the Owner, with respect to any of

the claims arising out of the performance of non-performance of the obligations set forth in the said Joint Venture agreement, read in conjunction with the relevant conditions of the Contract shall, however, not be limited in any way so as to restrict or limit the liabilities of any of the Partners of the Joint Venture agreement.

5. It is expressly understood and agreed between the Partners to this Joint Venture agreement that the responsibilities and obligations of each of the Partners shall be as delineated in Appendix-I (*To be incorporated suitably by the Partners) to this agreement. It is further agreed by the Partners that the above sharing of responsibilities and obligations shall not in any way be a limitation of joint and several responsibilities of the Partners under this Contract.

6. This Joint Venture agreement shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of India and the courts of Delhi shall have the exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising there under.

7. In case of an award of a Contract, We the Partners to the Joint Venture agreement do hereby agree that we shall be jointly and severally responsible for furnishing a contract performance security from a bank in favour of the Owner in the forms acceptable to purchaser for value of 10% of the Contract Price in the currency/currencies of the Contract.

8. It is further agreed that the Joint Venture agreement shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the Contract, and shall continue to be enforceable till the Owner discharges the same. It shall be effective from the date first mentioned above for all purposes and intents.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Partners to the Joint Venture agreement have through their authorised representatives executed these presents and affixed Common Seals of their companies, on the day, month and year first mentioned above. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Partners to the Joint Venture agreement have through their authorized representatives executed these presents and affixed Common Seals of their companies, on the day, month and year first mentioned above. 1. Common Seal of_________________

For Lead Partner has been affixed in my/our presence pursuant to the Board of Director's (Signature of authorized resolution dated________________ representative) Name Signature Designation Name Common Seal of the Company Designation

2. Common Seal of_________________

For Other Partner has been affixed in my/our presence pursuant to the Board of Director's (Signature of authorized resolution dated_______________ representative) Name Signature Designation Name Common Seal of the Company Designation

WITNESSES

1. Name . (Signature)

(Official address)

2. Name . (Signature) (Official address)

42

SECTION 6

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

43

CLIMATIC AND ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS The climatic and isoceraunic conditions at site under which the materials /equipment shall operate satisfactorily are as follows:- a) Maximum temperature of air in shade: 40º C b) Minimum temperature of air in shade: 2º C c) Maximum Humidity: 93 % d) Isoceraunic level: 60 e) Average of rainy days per annum: 150 f) Average number of days of thunderstorm per annum: 25 g) Average number of days of dust storm per annum: 10 h) Average annual rainfall: 2280 mm i) Number of months of tropical monsoon per annum: 5 (May to Sept.) j) Maximum wind pressure: 150Kg/sq. m. k) Altitude (above mean sea level): 50 to 250m

a. The reference ambient temperatures assumed for the purpose of this specification are: a) Maximum ambient temperature: 45ºC b) Maximum average daily ambient temperature: 35ºC c) Maximum average yearly ambient temperature: 30º C

6.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW/R&M of 33/11 KV SUBSTATION

(See separate technical specifications for Lines) 1.0 GENERAL APDCL is proposing R&M works of 33/11 KV substation at Dhupdhara under APDCL(Lower

Assam Zone) towards strengthening the sub-transmission and distribution network. 2.0 SCOPE OF 33/11 KV SUBSTATION 2.1 Construction of R&M of Sub-stations. 2.1.1 Design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, inspection, testing at manufacturer's works

before dispatch; packing, supply, delivery at site, subsequent storage, erection and commissioning at site; including insurance during transit· and storage of all equipments, structures, associated equipments, construction of control room, approach roads, compound wall, security fencing, providing yard lighting, water supply.

2.1.2 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with internal/external

agencies, project management, training of Owner's manpower, loading, unloading, handling, moving to final destination the required equipment and materials for successful erection, testing and commissioning of the substation / switchyard.

2.1.3 Design of substation and its associated electrical and mechanical auxiliaries systems includes preparation of single line diagrams and electrical layouts, erection key diagrams, electrical and physical clearance diagrams, design calculations for earth mat, direct stroke lighting protection (DSLP). Bus Bar & Spacers, control and protection schematics, wiring and termination schedules, civil designs and drawings, design of fire fighting, indoor and outdoor lighting / illumination and other relevant drawings and documents required for engineering of all facilities within the fencing to be provided under this contract, are covered under the scope of the contractor.

2.2 System Metering A. Design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, inspection, testing at manufacturer's works

before dispatch, packing, supply, delivery at site, subsequent storage, erection and commissioning at site including insurance during transit and storage of static 3 phase 4 wire electronic meters for 33 KV, 11 KV feeders along with CT and PT sets of matching ratings at identified locations.

2.3 Extending MIS support and Training to APDCL (LAZ) engineers/ staff on all the above scope areas.

2.4 The detailed scope of work is brought out in subsequent clauses of this section. 2.4.1 Design, engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on FOR destination site basis,

44

transportation, storage, erection, insurance, testing and commissioning of following items at above mentioned 33/11 kV substations.

a) 33 kV and 11 kV circuit breakers, isolators, current transformers, voltage transformers, surge arrestors.

b) 1 No. of 100 kVA, 11 I 0.433 kV auxiliary transformers per 33/11 kV substation. c) Complete indication, control, relay and protection system of the substation. d) For indoor 11 kV system, draw out type 11 kV panels with Vacuum circuit breakers, current

transformers, 11 KV/110 V bus PT and protective relaying for 11 kV lines, incomer ( 33/11 kV transformer) and 110 V, -/5 A Static Electronic Trivector meter.

e) L T switchgear (AC/ DC distribution boards). f) Portable Fire extinguishers consisting of CO2 5 Kg type g) 110 V, 100 AH lead acid battery bank along with battery chargers. h) 1.1 kV grade, armoured, 7 core 4 Sq.mm copper cable for power and 4 core, 2.5 Sq. mm

copper cable for control along with complete accessories. i) Indoor Vacuum circuit breakers are proposed in the control room, 11 KV XLPE cable of

suitable size shall be laid from LV side of power transformer to indoor VCB through cable ducts. Similarly 11 KV XLPE cable of suitable size shall be laid through cable ducts from indoor VCB to 11 KV feeders in the outdoor yard.

j) 9.75 mtr. PSC Poles with GI Channel 100X50X6 mm and the MS flat 50X10 mm proposed for substation structures. (Contractor has to design all the structures and supply the same).

k) Bus post insulators, insulator strings and hardware, clamps and connectors, AAAC Wolf strung bus, 50X10mm and 50X6 mm earth mat and risers, cast iron earth pipes 8mm inner dia. 2.4 mtrs long. cable supporting angles/ channels, cable trays and covers, sag compensating springs, junction box, buried cable trenches etc.

I) Complete lighting and illumination of the switchyard (including and roads in switch yard and approach road), is as follows

At substations: 10 numbers of 250-Watts HP sodium vapour lamps mounted on PSCC pole supports

m) Terminal connectors of all types (including terminal connectors for various bus voltages). 2.4.2 Receipt, unloading, storage, handling, insurance, erection, testing and commissioning of 33/11

kV transformers to be supplied by the contractor. 2.4.3 Supplying and laying of 11 kV cables from 11 kV VCB to over head lines. The payment for the

same shall be based on actual quantity and unit rates quoted in the BPS. The scope includes supply and erection of necessary cable joints and termination, for which the unit rates quoted, shall be applicable.

2.4.4 Civil works - The work shall include but not limited to the following: a) Soil investigation b) Strengthening of existing Foundation for 33/11 kV transformers along with jacking pads. c) Foundation for PSCC Pole structures, equipments d) Foundation for lighting poles, marshalling box, panels, control cubicles of equipments

wherever required e) Cable trenches along with covers and sump pits f) Cable trench crossings with roads, culverts etc, g) Stone filling and anti weed treatment of substation area h) Drainage system in the substation i) Permanent water supply for control room j) Substation fencing, gates, security room k) Buildings for substation control room l) Foundation of 100 KVA auxiliary transformer m) Before proceeding with the construction work of the new substation, the contractor shall fully

familiarize himself with the site conditions and general arrangements and scheme etc. Though the owner shall endeavour to provide the information, it shall not be binding for the owner to provide the same. The contractors are advised to visit the substation site and acquaint themselves with the topography, infrastructure and also the design philosophy. The contractor shall be fully responsible for providing all equipment, materials, system and services specified or otherwise which are required to complete the construction and successful commissioning, operation and maintenance of the substation in all respects.

45

n) All materials required for the civil works and the contractor shall supply all materials for construction / installation work. The contractor shall also supply the cement and steel.

o) The contractor based on conceptual tender drawings shall do the complete design and detailed engineering.

2.4.5 Miscellaneous items The following items of work are also to be covered under this specification: a) Boundary wall along substation property line. b) Contouring and substation leveling c) Security fencing with weld mesh around switchyard d) 11/0.433 (100KVA) transformers e) Fire wall between transformers, as required f) One number table T 102, and four number CHR 703 chair or equivalent g) Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required for

erection, testing and commissioning and satisfactory operation of the substation are deemed to be included in the scope of the specification unless specifically excluded.

h) Wherever word "purchaser" or "employer" appears in this section and other sections enclosed with this section, the same shall be read as "Owner".

i) Owner / purchaser / employer is having Technical Specification for various equipments and works for different voltage levels. This Technical Specification shall accordingly be applicable to the extent of the item, which are specified in BPS along with all accessories, assemblies components, parts, etc. associated with them.

3.0 PHYSICAL AND OTHER PARAMETERS 3.1 Meteorological - Data The meteorological data of the substations shall be provided to the successful bidder. However for

design purposes, ambient temperature should be considered as 50°C and relative humidity as 100 %, 5 months of monsoon, annual rainfall up to 2280 mm, lightening prone area with average 40 thunder storms per annum, height above mean sea Ievel shall be taken as up to 1000 meter.

3.2 Soil Data The contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the required tests and should fully satisfy

himself about· the nature of soil expected to be encountered prior to the submission of bid. Any variation of soil data during detailed engineering or construction stage shall not constitute a valid reason in affecting the terms and conditions of the bid.

4.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES. The requirement of various items / equipments and civil works are indicated in Bid Proposal Sheets. The bill of quantity of major equipments items / works which are payable on unit rate is indicated in

the Bid Proposal Sheets. Contractor should include all such items in the bid proposal sheets, which are not specifically

mentioned but are essential for the execution of the contract. Item which explicitly may not appear in various schedules and required for successful commissioning of substation shall be included in the bid price and shall be provided at no extra cost to Owner.

5.0 BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGS

5.1 The contractor shall maintain the overall dimensions of the substation, buildings, bay length,

bay width, phase to earth clearance, phase to phase clearance and sectional clearances, clearances between buses, bus heights but may alter the locations of equipment to obtain the statutory electrical clearances required for the substation.

The enclosed typical drawings give the basic scheme, layout of substation, associated services etc. in case of any discrepancy between the drawings and text of specification, the requirements of text shall prevail in general. However, the contractor is advised to get these clarified from Owner.

5.2 The auxiliary transformers of rating 100 KVA (11/0.433 KV) shall be used to feed the substation auxiliaries.

46

6.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

6.1 33 kV and 11 kV System

Sl.No. Description of the Parameter 33 kV System 11 kV System

1 System operating voltage 33 kV 11 kV

2. Maximum operating voltage of the system (rms) 36 kV 12 kV

3 Rated frequency 50 HZ 50 Hz

4 No. of phases 3 3

5 Rated insulation levels

i. Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 microsec.)

170 KVp 75 KVp

ii. One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage (rms)

80 KV 28 KV

6 Min. creepage distance 25 mm/KV ( 1800mm) 25 mm/KV ( 300 mm)

7 Min. clearances

i) Phase to earth 320 mm 140 ( 77**)mm

ii) Phase to phase 320 mm 280 (127**) mm

iii) Sectional ** for indoor switch gear 3000 Clearances mm

8 Rated short circuit current 25 KA for 1 Sec. 25 KA for 1 Sec.

9 System neutral earthing Effectively earthed Effectively earthed

Note: The insulation and RIV levels of the equipments shall be as per values given in the technical

specifications.

The major technical parameters of the equipments are given below. For other parameters and

features respective technical sections should be referred.

6.2 For 33 kV Circuit Breaker and Isolator

Rated voltage (KV, rms) 36

Rated frequency (Hz) 50

No. of poles 3

Design ambient temperature (°C) 50

Rated insulation levels: 1) Full wave impulses withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro-sec.)

Between line terminals and ground For arrestor terminals 2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand

voltage Between line terminals and ground Between terminals with circuit breaker / isolator open

+ 170 KV peak + 170 KV peak

70 KV rms 70 KV rms

Noise level at base and upto 50 m(distance from base of

breaker) 140 dB(Max)

Operating mechanism Pneumatic I spring I hydraulic or

a combination of these for (CB)

Min. creepage distance phase to ground (mm) 900

Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal

Thermal rating of auxiliary contacts 2 No. + 2 NC, 20 A at 24 V

DC (or as indicated in BPS)

Breaking capacity of auxiliary contacts 2 A DC with circuit time

constant not less than 20 ms

System neutral earthing Effectively Earthed

Auxiliary switch shall also comply with other clauses of section GTR.

47

6.3 For 33 kV CT I PT I LA

Rated voltage (kV, rms) 36

Rated frequency (Hz) 50

No. of poles 3

Design ambient temperature (°C) 50

Rated insulation revels:

1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 microsec.)

Between line terminals and ground

For arrestor housing

2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage

Between line terminals and ground

For arrester housing

+ 170 KV

+ 170 KV peak

70 KV rms

70 KV rms

Minimum creepage distance :

Phase to ground (mm)

900

System neutral earthing Effectively earthed

Partial discharge for Surge arrester at 1.05 COV Not exceeding 50 pc.

For CT / CVT Not exceeding 10 pc

7.0 DETAILED SPECIFICATION 33 KV EQUIPMENTS

The equipments of 33 kV class in general shall meet the requirements as per relevant technical specifications except for the following details.

33 kV Circuit Breaker/ isolators / Surge Arrester (LA) I Current Transformer /Potential Transformers l Auxiliary Transformer / insulators and Hardware

For details please refer technical specifications The equipments of 36 kV class in general shall meet the requirements as per relevant

technical specifications. 7.1.1 Technical parameters of Bus Post Insulators

a) Type : Solid core b) Voltage class (kV) : 36 c) Dry and wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) : 70 d) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage (kVp) : + 170 e) Total minimum cantilever strength (kg) : 300 f) Minimum torsional moment : As per IEC-273 g) Total Height of Insulator (mm) : As per requirement h) Pollution level as per IEC-815 : Heavy ( III) i) Minimum total crrepage for heavy Pollution (mm) : 900

7.2 PROTECTIONS 7.3 Sub Transmission Lines & Transformer The following protections shall be provided for 33 kV sub transmission lines and 33/11 kV

transformers. All these protection function shall give command to a master trip relay, which is handset and reset.

a) 3 - Over current and 1 - Earth fault for transformer b) 3 - over current and 1 - earth fault for lines (33 kV) c) 2 - over current and 1-earth fault relay for 11 KV d) Over-oil temperature trip for power transformer e) Bucholtz relay trip for power transformer

48

f) Transformer differential protection for 33 kV power transformers. g) Local breaker back up protection is not mandatory for 33 kV system h) Pressure relay common protection for tap changer and main tank for power

transformer i) Three phase trip relay for power transformer.

8.0 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

Configuration of panels for 33 kV lines shall be as follows: The simplex type control and relay panel for 33 kV system shall have the following

equipments. The detailed description of the control and relay panel equipment (for 33 kV) shall be as per

the technical specification.

8.1 Control & Indication covered Under C&R Panel

a) Digital Ammeter with selector 1 set for each line, bus coupler

b) Digital KV meter 1 set for each line, transformer

c) HT Static Electronic Trivector meter 1 no for each power transformer

of class 0.5

d) CB control switch 1 no. for each circuit breaker

e) Isolator control switch 1 no. for each isolator

f) Semaphore 1 no. for earth switch

g) Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each circuit breaker, isolator

h) Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each circuit breaker

i) White indicating lamp 2 nos. for each feeder

(DC healthy lamp)

j) Push button for alarm accept/ 3 nos. for each control panel

reset/lamp test

k) Protection transfer 1 no. for each breaker in case required

I) Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panels

m) Cut out, mounting and wiring for RWTI and selector switch

Lot for transformers

n) Digital frequency meter 1 for each bus

8.2 Indication and Supervision

a) For all feeders (each lines, transformers, bus coupler and capacitor) 1. CVT selection relay as per scheme requirement (except for bus coupler) 2. CT selection relay as per scheme requirement (except for bus coupler) 3. DC supply supervision relay 4. Trip circuit supervision relays 5. Flag relays, relays, aux. Relays timers etc., as per scheme requirements 6. Bus healthy indication lamps phase wise for each bus. 7. For details please refer technical specifications.

49

6.2 SPECIAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR NEW SUBSTATION CIVIL WORKS &

SWITCHGEAR

1.0 GENERAL

The intent of specification covers the following: Design, engineering, and construction of all civil works at sub-station. All civil works shall also

satisfy the general technical requirements specified in other Section of this Specification and as detailed below. They shall be designed to the required service conditions/loads as specified elsewhere in this Specification or implied as per National/International Standards.

All civil works shall be carried out as per applicable Indian Laws, Standards and Codes. All materials shall be of best quality conforming to relevant Indian Standards and Codes.

The Contractor shall furnish all design, drawings, labour, tools, equipment, materials, temporary works, constructional plant and machinery, fuel supply, transportation and all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the Works in accordance with approved drawings, specifications and direction of Employer.

The work shall be carried out according to the design/drawings to be developed by the Contractor and approved by the owner based on Tender Drawings Supplied to the Contractor. by the Owner. For all buildings, structures, foundations, etc., necessary layout and details shall be developed by the Contractor keeping in view the functional requirement of the substation facilities and providing enough space and access for operation, use and maintenance based on the input provided by the Owner. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in this specification for guidance purposes only. However, the Contractor shall quote according to the complete requirements.

2.0 SITE PREPARATION The Contractor shall be responsible for proper leveling of switchyard site as per layout and

levels of switchyard finalized during detailed engineering stage. The Contractor at his own cost shall make the layout and levels of all structure, etc., from the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall give all help in instruments, materials and personal to the Owner for checking the detailed layout and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the layout and levels. Site leveling shall be in the scope of the contractor. Bidder may decide the level of the sites. However, the level shall be such that it is 300 mm higher than the highest flood level (HFL) of the site.

3.0 SCOPE OF WORKS This clause covers the design and execution of the work for site preparation, such as clearing

of the site, the supply and compaction of fill material, slope protection by stone pitching/retaining walls depending on the site location/ condition, excavation and compaction of backfill for foundation, road construction, drainage, trenches and final topping by stone (broken hard stone).

3.1 General 1) The Contractor shall develop the site area to meet the requirement of the intended purpose.

The site preparation shall conform to the requirements of relevant sections of this specification or as per stipulations of standard specifications. Necessary protection of slope of switchyard area and approach road shall also be carried out by contractor.

2) If fill material is required, the fill material shall be suitable for the above requirement. The fill shall be such a material and the site so designed as to prevent the erosion by wind and water of material from its final compacted position or the in-site position of undisturbed soil.

3) When embankments are to be constructed on slopes of 15% or greater, benches or steps with horizontal and vertical faces shall be cut in the original slope prior to placement of embankment material. Vertical faces shall measure not more than 1 m in height.

4) Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts, retaining walls and similar structures shall be constructed by compacting the material in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 15 cm in thickness. (Of loose material before compaction). Each layer shall be compacted as required by means of mechanical tampers approved by the Owner. Rocks larger than 10 cm in any direction shall not be placed in embankment adjacent to structures.

5) Earth embankments of roadways and site areas adjacent to buildings shall be placed in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness in loose stage measurement and compacted to the full width specified. The upper surface of the .embankment shall be shaped so as to provide complete drainage of surface water at all times.

6) The pitching shall be designed and provided for slope protection as per approved drawings. The stone used shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. Stones subjected to

50

marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be used. Suitable measures shall be provided to prevent erosion by seepage of water. Largest stone procurable shall be used as approved by owner for the work. Random rubble masonry (1:6) retaining walls shall be provided wherever required as per site condition.

3.2 Compaction 1. The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per relevant IS and as per

direction of Owner. All compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as practicable. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor's density at OMC. The sub-grade for the roads and embankment filling shall be compacted to 70% relative density (minimum).

2. At all times unfinished construction shall have adequate drainage. Upon completion of the road's surface course, adjacent shoulders shall be given a final shaping, true alignment and grade.

3. Each layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum moisture content as practicable. Embankment material, which does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain proper compaction, shall be wetted. If the material contains any excess moisture then it shall be allowed to dry before rolling. The rolling shall begin at the edges overlapping half the width of the roller each time and progress to the center of the road or towards the building as applicable. Rolling will also be required on rock fills. No compaction shall be carried out in rainy weather.

3.3 Requirement for fill material under foundation The thickness of fill material under the foundations shall be such that the maximum pressure

from the footing, transferred through the fill material and distributed onto the original undisturbed soil will not exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of the original undisturbed soil. For expansive soils the fill materials and other protections, etc., to be used under the foundation is to be got approved by the Owner.

4.0 ANTI-WEED TREATMENT AND STONE SPREADING 4.1 Scope of Works The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete

performance of the work in accordance with the drawings specification and direction of the Owner.

Stone spreading shall be done in the areas of the switchyard wherever equipments and or structures are to be provided under present scope of work. The stone spreading in future areas shall also be provided in case potential without stone layer is not well within safer limits.

5.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT 5.1 The material required for site surfacing/stone filling shall be free from all types of organic

materials and shall be of standard quality, and as approved by the Owner. The material to be used for stone filling/site surfacing shall be uncrushed/ crushed/broken

stone of 20 mm nominal size (upgraded single size) conforming to Table 2 of IS:383-1970. Hardness, Flakiness shall be as required for wearing courses are given below:

a) Sieve Analysis Limits (Gradation) (IS: 383 - Table 2) Sieve Size % passing by weight 40mm 100 20 mm 85 - 100 10 mm 0-20 4.75 mm 0-5 b) Hardness

Abrasion value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 40% Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 30% and frequency shall be one test per 500 cum with a minimum of one test per source,

c) Flakiness Index One test shall be conducted per 500 cum of aggregate as per IS: 2386 Part-I and maximum

value is 25%,

51

5.2 After all the structures/equipments are erected and anti-weed treatment is complete, the

surface of the switchyard area shall be maintained, rolled/ compacted to the lines and grades as decided by Engineer-in-Charge. Deweeding including removal of roots shall be done before rolling is commenced, Engineer-in-Charge shall decide final formation level so as to ensure that the site appears uniform devoid of undulations, The final formation level shall however be very close to the formation level indicated in the drawing using half ton roller with suitable water sprinkling arrangement to form a smooth and compact surface.

5.3 A base layer of uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 20 mm nominal size (ungraded single size) shall be spread and rolled/compacted by using half ton roller with 4 to 5 passes and water sprinkling to form a minimum 50 mm layer on the finished ground level of the specified switchyard area excluding roads, drains, cable trench and tower and equipment foundations as indicated in the drawing.

5.4 Over the base layer of site surfacing material, a final surface course of minimum 50 mm thickness of 20 mm nominal size (single size ungraded) broken stone as specified above shall be spread and compacted by light roller using half tones steel roller (width 30" and 24" diameter) with water sprinkling as directed by he Engineer-in-Charge. The water shall be sprinkled in such a way that bulking does not take place.

5.5 In areas that are considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be too congested with foundations

and structures for proper rolling of the site surfacing material by normal rolling equipments, the material shall be compacted by hand, if necessary. Due care shall be exercised so as not to damage any foundation structures or equipment during rolling compaction.

5.6 Before taking up stone filling, anti-weed treatment shall be applied in the switchyard area

wherever gravel filling is to be done, and the area shall be thoroughly de-weeded including removal of roots. The recommendation of local agriculture or horticulture department shall be sought wherever feasible while choosing the type of chemical to be used. Nevertheless the effectiveness of the chemical shall be demonstrated by the Contractor in a test area of 10M x 10M (approx.) and monitored over a period of two to three weeks by the Engineer-in-Charge. The final approval shall be given by Engineer-in-Charge and final approval given based on the results.

5.7 The anti-weed chemical shall be procured from reputed manufacturers.

The dosage and application of chemical shall be strictly followed as per manufacturer's recommendation. The contractor shall be required to maintain the area free of weeds for a period of 1 year from the date of application of 1

st dose of anti-weed chemicals.

6.0 SITE DRAINAGE 1. Adequate site drainage system shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall

obtain rainfall data and design the storm water drainage system, (culverts, ditches, drains, etc.) to accommodate run off due to the most intense rainfall that is likely to occur over the catchment area in one hour period on an average of once in tem years. The surface of the site shall be sloped to prevent the ponding of water.

2. The maximum velocity for pipe drains and open drains shall be limited to 2.4m/sec and 1.8m/sec respectively. However, minimum non-slitting velocity of 0.6 m/sec shall be ensured. Longitudinal bed slope not milder than 1 in 1000 shall be provided.

3. For design of RCC pipes for drains and culverts, 18:456 and 18:783 shall be followed. 4. The Contractor shall ensure that water drains are away from the site area and shall prevent

damage to adjacent property by this water. Adequate protection shall be given to site surfaces, roads, ditches, culverts, etc., to prevent erosion of material by water.

5. The drainage system shall be adequate without the use of cable/pipe trenches. (Pipe drains shall be provided in areas of switchyard where movement of crane will be necessary in operating phase of the substation).

6. Open surface drains shall be provided with the Cement Concrete 1:2:4 of minimum thickness of 100 mm or more as per design condition.

7. Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes at an interval of max. 30m. Effluents shall be suitably treated by the Contractor to meet all the prevalent statutory requirements and local

52

pollution control norms and treated effluents shall be conveyed to the storm water drainage system at a suitable location for its final disposal.

8. Invert of the drainage system shall be decided in such a way that the water can easily be discharged above the High Flood Level (HFL) outside substation boundary at suitable location upto a maximum 50M beyond boundary wall ot substation or actual whichever occurs earlier and approved by Owner. Pumps for drainage of water (it required) shall be provided by Contractor.

9. All internal site drainage system, including the final connection/disposal to owner acceptance points shall be pat of Supplier's scope including all required civil work, mechanical and electrical systems. The Contractor shall connect his drain(s) at one or more points to outfall points as feasible at site.

10. The drainage scheme and associated drawings shall be got approved. 7.0 ROADS AND CULVERTS 1. The main approach road including modification of existing road to meet the site conditions,

roads for access to equipment and building within substation are in the scope of bidder. Layout of the roads shall be based on General detail and Arrangement drawing for the substation.

2. All substation roads be constructed so as to permit transportation of all heavy equipment. The roads shall have min.3.75 black topping. Moorum shoulder shall be provided on either side of the road. The width of the shoulder shall be as per approved drawing depending upon the site conditions.

3. Road construction shall be as per IRC standards. 4. Adequate provision shall be made for road drainage. Protection of cut and embankment slopes

of roads as per slope stability requirement shall be made. 5. All the culverts and its allied structure (required for road/rail, drain trench crossings, etc.) shall

be designed for Class-AA loading as per IRC standards code and should be checked for loading. 6. All roads shall be designed for Class-'E' of traffic as per IRC-37 Guidelines for the design of

flexible pavements.

8.0 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION The Contractor shall provide a road system integrated with the transformer foundation to

enable installation and the replacement of any failed unit by the spare unit located at the site. This system shall enable the removal of any failed unit from its foundation to the nearest road. If trench/drain crossings are required the suitable R.C.C. culverts shall be provided in accordance with I.R.C. Code & relevant IS.

9.0 CABLE AND PIPE TRENCHES

1. The cable trenches and precast removable RCC cover (with lifting arrangement) 2. The cable trench wall shall be designed for the following loads.

i) Dead load of 155 Kg/m length of cable support + 75 Kg on one tier at the end. ii) Triangular earth pressure + uniform surcharge pressure of 2 T/m

2.

3. Cable trench covers shall be designed for self-weight of top slab + UDL of 2000 Kg/ m2 +

concentrated load of 200 Kg at centre of span on each panel. 4. Cable trench crossing the road/rails shall be designed for class AA. Loading of IRC/relevant

IS Code and should be checked for transformer loading. 5. Trenches shall be drained. Necessary sumps be constructed and sump pumps if necessary

shall be supplied. Cable trenches shall not be used as storm water drains. 6. The top of trenches shall be kept at least 100 mm above the finished ground level. The top of

cable trench shall be such that the surface rainwater does not enter the trench. 7. All metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing system. 8. Cables from trench to equipments shall run in hard conduit pipes. 9. Trench wall shall not foul with the foundation. Suitable clear gap shall be provided. 10. The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/500 along the run and 1/250 perpendicular to the run. 11. All the construction joints of cable trenches i.e., between base slab to base slab and the

junction of vertical wall to base slab as well as from vertical wall to wall and all the expansion joints shall be provided with approved quality PVC water stops of approx. 230 x 5 mm size for those sections where the ground water table is expected to rise above the junction of base slab and vertical wall of cable trenches.

12. Cable trenches shall be blocked at the ends if required with brick masonry in cement sand mortar 1:6 and plaster with 12 mm thick 1:6 cement sand mortar.

13. Cable trenches shall be provided with suitable hangers to support the running cables.

53

13.0 FOUNDATION I RCC CONSTRUCTION

13.1 General

1. Work covered under this Clause of the Specification comprises the design and construction of foundations and other RCC constructions for switchyard structures, equipment supports, trenches, drains, jacking pad, control cubicles, bus supports, transformer, marshalling kiosks, auxiliary equipments and systems, buildings, tanks, boundary wall or for any other equipment or service and any other foundation required to complete the work. This clause is as well applicable to the other ECC constructions.

2. Concrete shall conform to the requirements mentioned in IS: 456 and all the tests shall be conducted as per relevant Indian Standard Codes as mentioned in Standard field quality plan appended with the specification.

A minimum grade of M20 concrete (1:5:3 mix) shall be used for all structural/load bearing members as per latest IS 456.

3. If the site is sloppy, the foundation height will be adjusted to maintain the exact level of the top of structures to compensate such slopes.

4. The switchyard foundation's plinths and building plinths shall be minimum 300 mm and 500 mm above finished ground level respectively.

5. Minimum 75 mm thick lean concrete (1:4:8) shall be provided below all underground structures, foundations, trenches, etc., to provide a base for construction.

6. Concrete made with Portland slag cement shall be carefully cured and special importance shall be given during the placing of concrete and removal of shuttering.

7. The design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the approved soil data and sub-soil conditions as well as for all possible critical loads and the combinations thereof. The Spread footings foundation or pile foundation as may be required based on soil/sub-soil conditions and superimposed loads shall be provided.

8. If pile foundations are adopted, the same shall be case-in-situ driven/bored or precast or under-reamed type as per relevant parts of IS Code 2911. Only RCC piles shall be provided. Suitability of the adopted pile foundations shall be justified by way of full design calculations. Detailed design calculations shall be submitted by the bidder showing complete details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used. Necessary initial load test shall also be carried out by the 'bidder at their cost to establish the piles design capacity. Only after the design capacity of piles has been established, the Contractor shall take up the job of piling. Routine tests fro the piles shall also be conducted. All the work (design & testing) shall be planned in such a way that these shall not cause any delay in project completion.

14.0 GATES AND BOUNDARY WALL(chain link fencing) The Gate frame shall be made of medium duty MS pipe conforming to relevant IS with welded

joints. The gates shall be fabricated with welded joints to achieve rigid connections. The gate frames

shall be painted with one coat of approved steel primmer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint.

Gates shall be fitted with approved quality iron hinges, latch and latch catch. Latch and latch catch shall be suitable for attachment and operation of pad lock from either side of gates. Hinges shall permit gates to swing through 180 degree back against fence.

Gates shall be fitted with galvanized chain hook or gate hold back to hold gates open. Double gates shall be fitted with centre rest and drop bolt to secure gates in closed position.

Gates shall be installed in locations shown on drawings. Next to the main gate, a men gate (1.25 m wide, single leaf) shall also be provided.

Bottom of gates shall be set approximately 40 mm above ground surface and necessary guiding mechanism shall be fitted.

The Contractor shall design and& construct boundary stone retaining wall cum chain link fencing around substation area as per enclosed drawing.

A Security room shall be provided at the entrance of switchyard. The minimum dimension of the room shall be 3.0 m length and 3.0 m width. The roof shall be at RCC and aesthetically pleasing.

54

15.0 BUILDINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15.1 General The scope include the design, engineering and construction including anti-termite treatment,

plinth protection, DPC of Building including sanitary, water supply, electrification, false ceiling etc., of control room building, and DG set building. The buildings shall be of RCC framed structure of concrete of M20 grade (Min.)

15.2 Control Room Building Minimum floor area requirements shall be 120 Sq. Meter which may be increased at the time of

detailed engineering to suit project requirements. The layout of the control room shall be finalized as per detailed engineering to suit project requirements.

An open space of 1 m minimum shall be provided on the periphery of the rows of panel and equipment generally in order to allow easy operator movement and access as well as maintenance.

Any future possibility of annexed building shall be taken care of while finalizing the layout of the control room building.

Minimum head room of 3 M below soffit of beams/false ceiling shall be considered for rooms. The roof shall have four side sloping roof or flat roof as finalized during detailed engineering.

15.2.1 Design The buildings shall be designed: i. To the requirements of the National Building Code of India, and the standards quoted

therein. ii. For the specified climatic and loading conditions iii. To adequately suit the requirements of the equipment and apparatus contained in the

buildings and in all respects to be compatible with the intended use and occupancy iv. With a functional and economical space arrangement. v. For a life expectancy of structure, systems and components not less than that of the

equipment, which is contained in the building, provided regular maintenance is carried out vi. Be aesthetically pleasing. Different buildings shall show a uniformity and consistency in

architectural design. vii. To allow for easy access to equipment and maintenance of the equipment. viii. With, wherever required, fire retarding materials for walls, ceilings and doors, which would

prevent supporting or spreading of fire. ix. With materials preventing dust accumulation.

b) Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in the longitudinal direction wherever necessary with provision of twin columns.

c) Individual members of the buildings frame shall be designed for the worst combination of forces such as bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion, etc.

d) Permissible stresses for different load combinations shall be taken as per relevant IS Codes.

e) All cable vaults shall be located above ground levels i.e., cable vaults shall not be provided as basements in the buildings.

f) The building lighting shall be designed in accordance with the requirements.

g) One emergency exit shall be provided in control room building. 15.2.2 Design loads Building structures shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead loads, super-

imposed loads, equipment loads, crane load, wind loads, seismic loads, and temperature loads.

Dead loads shall include the weight of structures complete with finishes, fixtures and partitions and should be taken as per IS: 1911.

Super-imposed loads in different areas shall include live loads, minor equipment loads, cable trays, small pipe racks/hangers and erection, operation and maintenance loads. Equipment loads shall constitute, if applicable, all load of equipments to be supported on the building frame.

15.2.3 Submission

The following information shall be submitted for review and approval to the Owner: Design criteria shall comprise the codes and standards used, applicable climatic data including

wind loads, earthquake factors maximum and minimum temperatures applicable to the building locations, assumptions of dead and live loads, including equipment loads, impact factors, safety factors and other relevant information.

Structural design calculations and drawing (including constructions / fabrication) for all

55

reinforced concrete and structural steel structures. Fully, dimensioned concept plan including floor plans, cross-sections, longitudinal sections,

elevations and perspective view of each building. These drawings shall be drawn at a scale not smaller than 1 :50 and shall identify the major building components.

Fully dimensioned drawings showing details and sections drawn to scales of sufficient size to clearly show sizes and configuration of the building components and the relationship between them.

Product information of building components and materials, including walls partitions flooring ceiling, roofing, door and windows and building finishes.

A detailed schedule of building finishes including colour schemes. A door and window schedule showing door types and locations, door lock sets and latch and other door hardware.

Approval of the above information shall be obtained before ordering materials or starting fabrication or construction as applicable.

15.2.4 Finish Schedule The finishing schedule is given in subsequent clauses.

15.2.5 Flooring Flooring in various rooms of control room building shall be as for detailed schedules given in

Table-1. 15.2.6 Walls Control room buildings shall be of framed superstructure. All walls shall be non-load bearing

walls. Min. thickness of external walls shall be 230 mm (One brick) with 1:6 cement sand mortar.

15.2.7 Plastering All internal walls shall have minimum 15 mm thick 1:6 cement sand plaster. The ceiling shall

have 6mm thick 1:4 cement sand plaster. 15.2.8 Finishing All external surfaces shall have 18 mm cement plaster in two coats, under layer 12 mm thick

cement plaster 1:5 and finished with a top layer 6 mm thick cement plaster 1:6 (DSR (13.19) with water proofing compound. The paint shall be anti-fungal quality of reputed brand suitable for masonry surfaces for high rainfall zone. White cement primer shall be used as per manufacturer's recommendation.

INTERNAL FINISH SCHEDULE IS GIVEN TABLE - 1

SI No.

Location Flooring & Skirting

150 mm High Wall Internal Ceiling Doors, Windows Ventilators

1. Control Room &

Relay room

Homogeneous PVC /Vetrified

tiles 2 mm thick over 25 mm thick 1 :2:4 under bed

neat cement finished flooring

Plastic 7.3 mm thick ceramic tiles (DSR

11.41 A.2.1)

Under deck insulation

Anodised aluminium indal or equivalent extruded sections as per IS 733 & 1285 Glazing Flat (DSR 97-11.64.2 drawn sheet & 11.4.1) glass (Min 5.5 mm thick) double glazing with 12 mm gap hermetically sealed. (DSR097,

24.1, 24.3, 24.4

2.

Sub-Station in- charge, officers, corridor, staff,

rooms

Vetrified Terrazzo tiles with

white cement (DSR-

97) (11.29 A.1)

Oil bound plastic paint

washable distemper on

smooth surface applied with POP

putty

False ceiling & under deck insulation

Teak wood frame flush doors shutter (DSR 97 9.1.3 & 9.4 A.2.2) Windows, Ventilators Aluminium

as at 1.

(DSR-97) (11.48.1)

Smooth surface applied with POP

putty. For entrance with glazing

56

3. Battery room Acid Resistant Tiles 25 mm thick (DSR

9711.36 C 12)

DADO acid resistant title 2.1 M high Acid resistant paint above 2.1 M high acid resistant paint above 2.1 m upto ceiling (DSR 97.11.36 C 2.2) &

13.96.1)

Acid resistant paint (DSR 97

1372.1)

Steel door 45 mm thick double sheet 18 G steel suitably

reinforced and filled with mineral wool. Hot rolled steel framed

glazed window and ventilators.

4. Cable vault

double sheet (if required)

IPS flooring (DSR 97 11.4.3)

Oil bound distemper White wash

(DSR 97 13.72.1) White wash

Steel door double sheet as above. Ventilators as at 5.

5. Toilet

Non-solid/ vetrified Terrazzo tiles with

White cement (DSR97,11.29a.1)

DADO glazed tile 2.1 M high for toilet for pantry above working

platform upto 750 mm

(DSR 97 11.36B)

White wash Weather coat

Teak wood frame flush door shutter with anodized Aluminium

fixtures best quality (DSR 97 9.1.3 & 9.4 a 2)

Windows, ventilators aluminium as at 1.

6. Other areas not

specified

Vetrified Terrazzo tiles with

white cement (DSR 97 29 A.1)

Plastic/O.B. distemper Dry

distemper (DSR 97.13.75)

White wash

Note : DSR item references to be read with CPWD specifications are only for material and

workmanship guidance of the Contractor. 15.2.9 Roof Roof of the CR. Building shall consist of Cast-in-situ RCC slab treated with a water proofing

system which shall be an integral cement based treatment conforming to CPWD specification (item NO.25.8 of DSR 1997) the water proofing treatment shall be of following operations.

a) Applying and grouting a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/m2 of cement admixed with proprietary water proofing compounds conforming to IS:2645 over the RCC slab including cleaning the surface before treatment.

b) Laying cement concrete using broken bricks/bricks brick bats 25 mm to 100 mm size with 505 of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 over 20 mm thick layer of cement mortar of min 1:5 (Cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS:2645 to required slope and treating similarly the adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs.

c) After two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurry admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS:2645.

d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick joint less cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4 course sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS:2645 and finally finishing the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making of 300 x 300 mm square.

e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of two weeks for curing and for final test. All above operations to be done in order and as directed and specified by the Engineering-in-charge.

With average thickness of 120 mm and minimum thickness at khurra at 65 mm. 15.2.10 Glazing Minimum thickness of glazing shall be 5.5 mm as per IS:2835 sun film shall be provided for all

window/doors of AC rooms. 15.2.11 Doors and Windows The details of doors and windows of the control room building shall be as per finish schedule

Table-1 and tender drawing with the relevant IS, code. Rolling steel shutters and rolling steel grills shall be provided as per layout and requirement of buildings. Paints used in the work shall be of best quality specified in CPWD specification.

57

15.2.12 Plumbing & Sanitation

i) All plumbing and sanitation shall be executed to comply with the requirements of the appropriate bye-laws, rules an regulations of the Local Authority having jurisdiction over such matters. The Contractor shall arrange for all necessary formalities to be met in regard to inspection, testing, obtaining approval and giving notices etc.

ii) PVC syntax or equivalent make Roof water tank of adequate capacity depending on the number of users for 24 hours storage shall be provided. Minimum 2 Nos 500 litres capacity shall be provided.

iii) Galvanized MS pipe of medium class conforming to IS: 1239 shall be used for internal & external piping work for potable water supply.

iv) Sand CI pipes with lead joints conforming to IS:1729 shall be used for sanitary works above ground level. v) Each toilet shall have the following minimum fittings. a) WC (Western type) 390 mm high with toilet paper roll holder and all fittings

or WC (Indian Type) Orissa Pattern (580 x 440 mill) with all fittings. (Both types of WCs shall be provided at alternate locations) b) Urinal (430 x 260 x 350 mm size) with all fittings. c) Wash basin (550 x 400 mm size) with all fittings. d) Bathroom mirror (600 x 450 x 6 mm thick) hard board backing. e) CP brass towel rail (600 x 20 mm) with CP brass brackets. f) Soap holder and liquid soap dispenser.

vi) Water cooler for drinking water with adequate water storage facility shall be provided and located near control room instead of near toilet block.

vii) An Eye & [ace fountain conforming to IS:1052 shall be provided for battery room . viii) 1 No. stainless steel kitchen sink with Drain board (510 x 1040 x 178 mm bowl depth) for

pantry shall be provided. ix) All fittings, fastener, grating shall be chromium plated. x) All sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be of approved quality and type manufactured by well

known manufacturers. All items brought to site must bear identification marks of the type of the manufacturer.

xi) Soil, waste and drain pipes, for underground works shall be stone ware for areas not subject to traffic load. Heavy-duty cast iron pipes shall be used otherwise.

16.0 SECURITY FENCING Security fencing shall be provided for 1.5 meter above the ground at the switchyard. Security fencing shall be provided with barbed wire mesh of 5 rows connected with the PSCC

poles at 2 meters interval. 17.0 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17.1 Dense concrete with controlled water cement ratio as per IS-code shall be used for all

underground concrete structures such as pump-house, tanks, water retaining structures, cable and pipe trenches etc. for achieving water tightness.

17.2 All joints including construction and expansion joints for the water retaining structures shall be made water tight by using PVC ribbed water stops with central bulb. However, kicker type (externally placed) PVC water stops shall be used for the base slab and in other areas where it is required to facilitate concreting. The minimum thickness of PVC water stops shall be 5 mm and minimum width shall be 230 mm.

17.3 All steel sections and fabricated structures which are required to be transported on sea shall be provided with anti corrosive paint to take care of sea worthiness.

17.4 All mild steel parts used in the water retaining structures shall be hot-double dip galvanized. The minimum coating of the zinc shall be 750 gm/sq. m for galvanized structures and shall comply with IS:2629 and IS:2633. Galvanizing shall be checked and tested in accordance with 18:2633.The galvanizing shall be followed by the application of an etching primer and dipping in black bitumen in accordance with B8:3416.

17.5 A screed concrete layer not less than 100 mm thick and of grade not weaker than M10 conforming to IS:456-1978 shall be provided below all water retaining structures. A sliding

58

layer of bitumen paper or craft paper shall be provided over the screed layer to destroy the bond between the screed and the base slab concrete of the water retaining structures.

17.6 Bricks having minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressive strength can only be used for masonry work.

Contractor shall ascertain himself at site regarding the availability of bricks of minimum 75 kg/cm

2 compressive strength before submitting his offer.

17.7 Doors and windows on external walls of the building (other than areas provided, with insulated metal claddings) shall be provided with RCC sun-shade over the openings with 3000 mm projection on either side of the openings. Projection of sunshade from the wall shall be minimum 450 mm over window openings and 750 mm over door openings.

17.8 All stairs shall have maximum riser height of 150 mm and a minimum tread width of 300 mm. Minimum width of stairs shall be 1500 mm. Service ladder shall be provided for access to all roofs. RCC fire escape staircase shall be provided in control buildings.

17.9 Angles 50 x 50 x 6 mm (minimum) with lugs shall be provided for edge protection all round cut outs/openings in floor slab, edges of drains supporting grating covers, edges of RCC cable/pipe trenches supporting covers, edges of manholes supporting covers, supporting edges of manhole precast cover and any other place where breakage of corners of concrete is expected.

17.10 Anti termite chemical treatment shall be given to column pits, wall trenches, foundations of buildings, filling below the floors etc. as per IS:6313 and other relevant Indian Standards.

17.11 Hand-railing minimum 900 mm high shall be provided around all floor/roof openings, projections/balconies, walk ways, platforms, steel stairs etc. All handrails and ladder pipes shall be 32 mm nominal bore MS pipes (medium class) and shall be galvanized (medium-class as per IS:277). All rungs for ladder shall also be galvanized as per IS:277 medium classes.

For RCC stairs, hand railing with 20 mm square MS bars, balustrades with suitable MS flats shall be provided with black PVC sheathing.

17.12 For all civil works covered under this specification, nominal mix by volume batching as per CPWD specification is intended. The relationship of grade of concrete and ratio of ingredients shall be as below:

S.No. Mix Cement Sand Coarse Aggregate of 20 mm Down Grade as

per IS 383 1. M 10 1 3 6

2. M 15 1 2 4

3. M 20 1 1.5 3

The material specification, workmanship and acceptance criteria shall be as per relevant clauses of CPWD specification and approved standard Field Quality Plan.

17.13 The details given in tender drawings shall be considered along with details available in this section of the specification while deciding various components of the building.

17.14 Items/components of buildings not explicitly covered in the specification but required for completion of the project shall be deemed to be included in the scope.

18.0 INTERFACING The proper coordination & execution of all interfacing civil works activities like fixing of conduits

in roofs/walls/floors, fixing of foundation bolts, fixing of lighting fixtures, fixing of supports/embedment, provision of cutouts etc. shall be the sale responsibility of the Contractor. He shall plan all such activities in advance and execute in such a manner that interfacing activities do not become bottlenecks and dismantling, breakage etc. is reduced to minimum.

19.0 WATER SUPPLY

i) Contractor shall make its own arrangement for construction water. ii) The contractor shall carry out all the plumbing/erection works required for supply of water in

control room building. iii) The details of tanks, pipes, fittings, fixtures etc for water supply are given elsewhere in the

specification under respective sections. iv) A scheme shall be prepared by the contractor indicating the layout and details of water

supply which shall be got approved by the Owner before actual start of work including all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the works.

v) Bore wells with Min 100mm dia casing pipe & 1HP submissible pump to get a discharge of at

59

least 1000 Litre/Hr. with zealete make iron removed filter to get iron free water. Water purifier with UV mechanism is to be provided and pumps for water supply are in the scope of contractor meeting the day-to-day requirement of the water supply.

20.0 SEWERAGE SYSTEM i) Sewerage system shall be provided for control room building. ii) The contractor shall construct septic tank and soak pit suitable for 20 users. iii) The system shall be designed as per relevant IS Codes.

21.0 STATUTORY RULES 21.1 Contactor shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factories act (as

applicable for the State). Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee. Water Act for pollution control etc.

21.2 Provisions for fire proof doors, no. of staircases, fire separation wall, plastering on structural members (in fire prone areas) etc. shall be made according to the recommendations of Tariff Advisory Committee.

21.3 Statutory clearance and norms of State Pollution Control Board shall be followed as per Water Act for effluent quality from plant.

21.4 Requirement of sulphate resistant cement (SRC) for sub-structural works shall be decided in accordance with the Indian Standards based on the findings of the detailed soil investigation to be carried by the bidder.

21.5 Foundation system adopted by the Bidder shall ensure that relative settlement and other criteria shall be as per provision in IS:1904 and other Indian Standard.

21.6 All water retaining structures designed as an un-cracked section shall also be tested for water tightness at full water level in accordance with clause No. 10 of IS:3370 (part-I)

21.7 Construction joints shall be as per IS:456 21.8 All underground concrete structures like basements, pumps houses, water retaining structures

etc. shall have plasticizer cum water proofing cement additive conforming to IS:9103. in addition, limit on permeability as given in IS:2645 shall also be met with. The concrete surface of these structures in contact with earth shall also be provided with two coats of bituminous painting for water/damp proofing. In case of water leakage in the above structures, Injection Method shall be applied for requiring the leakage.

60

6.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PSC POLES [9.75 M]

1.0 SCOPE This covers design manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of PSC poles shall be of solid rectangular with an overall length of 9.75M suitable for use in overhead 33KV / 11 KV lines .

2.0 Applicable Standards

The pre-stressed concrete pole (psc ) shall comply with the relevant provisions mentioned' in the' following Indian Standards or the latest versions thereof. a) IS: 1678, Specification for pre-stressed concrete poles for overhead power, traction and

telecommunication lines. b) IS: 2905, Method of test for concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication

lines. c) IS: 7321, Code of Practice for selection, handling and erection of concrete poles for

overhead power and telecommunication lines.

REQUIRED TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR 9.75 M PSC POLES

SL NO

ITEM PARAMETERS

1 Type of Pole 9.75 M P.S.C pole

2 Applicable Standard a) IS : 1678/1998 –pre-stressed concrete poles , b) IS-2905/1989- Method of test for concrete poles , c) IS: 7321– Code of Practice for Selection , Handling & Erection of concrete poles [for overhead power and telecommunication lines ]

3 Length of pole 9.75 Mts.

4 Depth of Plantation 1.8 Mts.

5 Bottom Depth 350 mm

6 Top Depth 175 mm

7 Breath 120 mm

8 Diameter of pre-stressing wire 4 mm

9 No. of tensioned wire per pole 22 Nos of 4mm dia.

10 Minimum Ultimate Tensile strength of 4 MM HT wire

175 KG / SQMM

11 Minimum initial pull of 4 mm wire 1865 kg / wire

12 Spacing HT wires As per IS : 1343 /1960

13 Quantity of HT wire/ pole 21.45 KG

14 Link & spiral 4 nos ,5 mm in bottom & 4 nos ,5 mm in top

15 M.S spiral 3 mm dia of 150 c/c

16 Maximum Aggregate size 12 mm

17 Total weight per pole 750 KG

18 Minimum clear cover 20 mm

19 Factor of safety 2.5

20 Concrete grade M-420

21 Ultimate Load 675 KG

22 Earthing shall be provided by 4 MM dia. Galvanized iron wire embedded in concrete

Projecting from the pole at length of 50 MM at 215 from top & 150 MM below ground level

23 Provision for earthing Earthing shall be provided by having length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a length of 100 mm at 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level.

24 28 days cube strength of concrete ( Min) as per IS : 456/2000.

1. / SQ.CM

61

3.0 Terminology

For the purpose of this specification, following definitions shall apply:

3.1 Average Permanent Load That fraction of the working load which may be considered of long duration over a period of

one year.

3.2 Load Factor The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack.

3.3 Transverse The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at the pole. In the

case of a straight run, this will be normal to the run of the line. 3.4 Transverse Load at First Crack

For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than the value of the working load.

3.5 Working Load The maximum load in the transverse direction, that is ever likely to occur, including the

wind pressure on the pole. This load is assumed to act at a point· 600 mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as intended in the design.

3.6 Ultimate Failure

The condition existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment owing to either crushing of concrete, or snapping of the pre-stressing tendon or permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole.

3.7 Ultimate Transverse Load The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole along the transverse direction with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as intended in the design.

4.0 Application 4.1 9.75 M PSC Pole 4.2 These poles shall be used for 33 kV lines, and for special locations in 11 kV lines, such as

road crossings, etc.

5.0 Material 6.0 Cement

The cement used in the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 (Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement) or IS: 8041 E (Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement), or high strength ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS: 8112 (Specification of high strength ordinary Portland cement).

7.0 Aggregates Aggregates used for the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall confirm to IS: 383 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete). The nominal maximum size of aggregates shall in no case exceed 10 mm (for poles above 9.0 M) and 12 mm (for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).

8.0 Water Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic matter, Potable water will be generally suitable.

8.1 Admixture Admixture should not contain Calcium Chloride or other chlorides and salts which are likely to promote corrosion of pre-stressing steel.

8.2 Pre-stressing Steel The pre-stressing steel wires including those used as un-tensioned wires (See Annexure. I, II & III), should conform to IS: 1785 (part-I) (Specification for plain hard-drawn

62

steel wire for pre-stressed concrete. Part-I cold drawn stress relieved wire), IS: 1785 (part-II) (Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire) or IS: 6003 (Specification for indented wire for pre-stressed concrete). The type designs given in Annexure-I, II and III are for plain wires of 4 mm diameter with a guaranteed ultimate strength of 175 kg/mm

2.

The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for controlled concrete (also called design mix concrete) in IS: 1343 (Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete) and IS: 456 (Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete), subject to the following special conditions: a) Maximum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 400 kg/cm

2 (for poles

above 9.0 M) and 420 kg/cm2 (for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).

b) The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 200 kg/cm2 (for poles above 9.0 M)

·and 210 kg/cm2 (for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).

c) The mix should' contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete.

d) The mix should contain as Iowa water content as is consistent with adequate workability. If it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability, the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original value of water cement ratio is maintained.

9.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The poles shall be designed for the following requirements: a) The poles shall be planted directly in the ground with a planting depth as per IS: 1678. b) The working load on the poles should correspond to those that are likely to come on the

pole during their service life. Designs given in Annexure I,ll and III are for 140 kg, 200 kg, 300 kg, and 400 kg., applied at 0.6 M from top.

c) The factor of safety for all poles above 9.5 M shall not be less than 2.0. For 7.5 M and 8.5 M poles, the factor of safety shall not be less than 2.5.

d) The average permanent load shall be 40% of the working load. e) The F.O.S. against first load shall be 1.0. f) At average permanent load, permissible tensile stress in concrete shall be 30 kg/cm

2.

g) At the design value of first crack load, the modulus of rupture shall not exceed 53.0 kg/cm

2 for M-400 concrete and 55.2 kg/cm

2 for M-420 concrete.

h) At the design value of first crack load, the modulus of rupture shall not exceed 53.0 kg/cm

2 for M-400 concrete.

i) The ultimate moment capacity in the longitudinal direction should be at least one fourth of that il1 the transverse direction.

j) The maximum compressive stress in concrete at the time of transfer of pre-stress should not exceed 0.8 times the cube strength.

k) The concrete strength at transfer shall not be less than half the 28 days strength ensured in the design, i.e., 400 x 0.5 = 200 kg/cm

2 or 420 x 0.5 = 210 kg/cm

2.

10.0 Service Conditions PSCC poles have to be designed to suit the following climatic conditions:

a) Maximum temperature of air in shade 40°C

b) Minimum temperature of air in shade 2°C

c) Maximum temperature of air in sun 45°C

d) Maximum humidity 93%

e) Average number of thunder storm days per 45 Days

annum

f) Maximum rainfall per annum 3500 mm

g) Average rainfall per annum 2200 mm

h) Wind pressure 97.8 Kg/m2

i) Altitude above MSL 100 to 1000 M

63

11.0 Dimensions and Reinforcements The cross-sectional dimensions and the details of pre-stressing wires should conform to the particulars given in Annexure-I, II and III. The provisions of holes for fixing cross-arms and other fixtures should conform to the REC standards .

12.0 Manufacture

12.1 Attire--stressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as shown in drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The un-tensioned reinforcement, as indicated in the drawings, should be held in position by the use of stirrups which should go round all the wires.

AII wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform pre-stress in each wire. Each wire or a group of wires shall be anchored positively during casing. Care should be taken to see that the anchorages do not yield before the concrete attains the necessary strength.

13.0 Cover The cover of concrete measured from the outside of pre-stressing tendon shall be normally 20 Nm.

14.0 Welding and Lapping of Steel The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the tendon. Welding shall not be allowed in any case. However, jointing or coupling may be permitted provided the strength of the joint or coupling is not less than the strength of each individual wire.

15.0 Compacting Concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating, shocking or other suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted.

16.0 Curing The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvass, Hessian or similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when the strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at transfer of pre-stress. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should depend on the atmospheric humidity and temperature.

The pre-stressing wires shall be detensioned only after the concrete has attained the specified strength at transfer (i.e., 200 or 210 kg/cm

2 as applicable). The cubes cast for the

purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured, as far as possible, under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the specified strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter the test on concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS: 1343 (Code of p

r3ctice for pre-stressed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply,

when required by the owner or his representative, result of compressive test conducted in accordance with IS: 456 (Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete) on concrete cubes made from the concrete used for the poles. If the owner so desired, the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes shall be tested in accordance with IS: 456 (Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete).

The detensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires, without imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic.

The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the pre-stressing wires using flames or bar croppers while the wires are still under tension.

Separate eye-hooks or holes shall be provided for handling the transport, one each at a distance of 0.15 times the overall length, from either end of the pole. Eye-hooks, if provided, should be properly anchored and should be on the face that has the shorter dimension of the cross-section. Holes, if provided for lifting purposes, should be perpendicular to the

64

broad face of the pole.

Stacking should be done in such a manner that the broad side of the pole is vertical. Each tier in the stack should be supported on timber sleeper located as 0.15 times the overall length, measured from the end. The timber supported in the stack should be aligned in a vertical line.

Poles should be transported with their broad faces placed vertically and, in such a manner that the shocks are avoided. Supports should be so arranged that they are located approximately at a distance equal to 0.15 times the overall length from the ends. The erection of the pole should be carried out in such a way that the erection loads are applied so as to cause moment with respect to the major axis, i.e., the rope used for hoisting the pole should be parallel to the broader face of the pole.

17.0 Earthing

17.1 Earthing shall be provided by having length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a length of 100 mm at 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level.

17.2 Earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contract with the pre-stressing wires.

17.3 Tests 18.0 Transverse Strength Test

Poles made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the completion of 28 days and poles made from rapid hardening cement only on the completion of 14 days, after the day of manufacture. The poles may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in horizontal position, provisions shall be made to compensate for the overhanging weight of the pole, for this purposed, the overhanging portion of the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device. The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the agreed depth of planting. Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm from the top of the pole and shall be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transverse load at first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured. A pre-stressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the design transverse load for the first crack. The load then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the value of 80 per cent of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter increased by 5 per cent of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time the load is applied, it shall be held for 2 minutes. The load applied to pre-stressed concrete pole at the point of failure shall be measured to the nearest five Kilograms.

The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load.

19.0 Measurement of Cover After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be taken and checked for cover. The cover of the pole shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole. the ·second within 0.6 meters from the top and the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared with the specified value. The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than (±) 1 mrn from the specified cover. The individual values should not differ by more than (±) 3 mm from the specified value. If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to aligning of the end

65

plates and pre-stressing wires and assembly of moulds should be improved and inspection at pre-production stage tightened suitably.

20.0 MARKING The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following particulars either during or after manufacture but before testing at a position so as to be easily read after erection in position.

a) Month and year of manufacture b) Transverse strength of pole in Kg c) Maker's serial No and mark and Project .

21.0 INSPECTION Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

66

6.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANIZED CHANNEL CROSS ARMS

1.0 SCOPE : This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of Galvanized Cross Arm and channel used for 33KV, 11 KV & line complete with all accessories as specified.

2.0 Standards

The M.S Cross Arm and channel supplied under this specification shall conform the latest issue of the relevant Indian Standards IS – 226:1975, Regulations etc. except where specified otherwise.

The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall be those specified in the IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision. Galvanization conforming to latest version of 1S:2629

In the event of conforming to any standards other than the Indian Standards, the salient features of comparison shall be clearly set out separately

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT :

i. The cross arm shall be fabricated grade of mild steel of channel section as per requirement.

ii. All steel members and other parts of fabricated material as delivered shall be free of warps, local deformation, unauthorized splices, or unauthorized bends.

iii. Bending of flat strap shall be carried out cold. Straightening shall be carried out by pressure and not by hammering. Straightness is of particular importance if the alignment of bolt holes along a member is referred to its edges.

iv. Holes and other provisions for field assembly shall be properly marked and cross referenced. Where required, either by notations on the drawing or by the necessity of proper identification and fittings for field assembly, the connection shall be match marked.

v. A tolerance of not more than 1mm shall be permitted in the distance between the center lines of bolt holes. The holes may be either drilled or punched and, unless otherwise stated, shall be not more than 2mm greater in diameter than the bolts.

vi. When assembling the components force may be used to bring the bolt holes together (provided neither members nor holes are thereby distorted) but all force must be removed before the bolt is inserted. Otherwise strain shall be deemed to be present and the structure may be rejected even though it may be, in all other respects, in conformity with the specification.

vii. The back of the inner angle irons of lap joints shall be chamfered and the ends of the members cut where necessary and such other measures taken as will ensure that all members can be bolted together without strain or distortion. In particular, steps shall be taken to relieve stress in cold worked steel so as to prevent the onset of embitterment during galvanizing.

viii. Similar parts shall be interchangeable.

ix. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent practicable. Shearing flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully, neatly and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled or punched at right angles to the surface and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges, and burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations shall be removed with the proper tool.

x. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated to the tolerance that will permit fielderection within tolerance, except as otherwise specified. All fabrication shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner so as to facilitate cleaning, painting, galvanizing and inspection and to avoid areas in which water and other matter can lodge.

xi. Contact surfaces at all connections shall be free of loose scale, dirt, burrs, oil and other foreign materials that might prevent solid seating of the parts.

67

xii. Welded joints not permissible.

xiii. The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall be those specified in the IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision.

all dimensions are subject to the following tolerances: a) dimensions up to and including 50mm:+1mm: and b) dimensions greater than 50mm: +2%

xiv. The channel cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust.

xv. For galvanized channel : All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers, support

channels, structures, shall; be hot dip galvanized conforming to latest version of 1S:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and uniform. It shall be free from acid spot and shall not scale, blister or be removable by handling or packing. There shall be no impurities in the zinc or additives to the galvanic bath which could have a detrimental effect on the durability of the zinc coating. Before picking, all welding, drilling, cutting, grinding and other finishing operations must be completed and all grease, paints, varnish, oil, welding slag and other foreign matter completely removed. All protuberances, which would affect the life of galvanizing shall also be removed.

The weight of zinc deposited shall be in accordance with that stated in Standard IS 2629 and shall not less than 0.61kg/m² with a minimum thickness of 86 microns for items of thickness more than 5mm, 0.46kg/m² (64 microns) for items of thickness between 2mm and 5mm and 0.33kg/m² (47 microns) for items less than 2mm thick.

xvi. he raw materials and fabrication thereof in respect of cross arm shall be furnished along with dimension.

xvii. The hole for fixing of insulator and pole clamp shall be provided as per requirement.

xviii. One copy of the drawing of cross arm for each size shall be furnished along with the technical bid.

a. REQUIRED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI CHANNEL CROSS ARM

[100x50x6x3200 ]

Sl No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm G.I Channel cross arm

2 Size 100 x 50x 6 x 3200 mm

3 Material Mild Steel channel

4 Length 3200 mm

5 Breath 100 mm

6 Width 50 mm

7 Thickness 6 mm

8 Hole for fixing of insulator 26 mm

9 Center to center distance of hole

1525 mm

10 Hole for pole clamp 18 mm

11 Weight 29.5 kg (approx)

12 Galvanization The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.

13 Standard applicable IS: 266; IS: 1852-1973:

68

1600 mm 1600 mm

3200 mm

26 mm dia hole

G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARM

( 100 x50x6x3200 mm)

50 mm

6 mm 76 mm

76 mm

100

mm

DIAGRAM NOT IN SCALE

69

b. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARMS

[ SIZE : 75 x 40 x 40x6 x 2200 mm ]

REQUIRED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARM

Sl No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm GI Channel cross arm

2 Size 75 x 40x 40x6 x 2200 mm

3 Material Mild Steel channel( galvanized)

4 Length 2200 mm

5 Breath 75 mm

6 Width 40 mm

7 Thickness 6 mm

8 Hole for foxing of insulator

20 mm

9 Center to center distance for hole

1070mm

10 Weight 16 kg (approx)

11 Galvanization The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.

1100 mm 1100 mm

2200 mm

20 mm dia hole

G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARM ( 75 x40x6x2200 mm)

40 mm

6 mm 30 mm

30 mm

75

mm

DIAGRAM NOT IN SCALE

70

c. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV T-CROSS ARM

Sl No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm 11 KV T-cross arm

2 Applicable standard IS – 226:1975 & IS 1852/1973

3 Material Mild Steel channel

4 Breath 50 mm

5 Width 50 mm

6 Thickness 6 mm

7 Diameter of hole for Pole fixing 18 mm

8 Diameter of hole for G.I Pin 22mm

9 For Fixing of Pin insulator A piece of 76mm length 50x50x6 mm angle or flat of 50x6mm is to be welded at the ends of cross arm for fixing of pins firmly & vertically.

10 Welding Joints Welding should be as per IS: 832/64

11 Painting The channel cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and then coated with two coating of red oxide zinc chromate painted as per IS : 5660/70.

12 For galvanization The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.

13 Weight 11.25 kg (approx)

11 KV T- CROSS ARM

22 mm hole

22 mm hole

1350

450

229mm 305mm 305m

m

610 mm

All Dimensions are not in scale

22 mm hole

305 mm

915 mm

76 mm

18 mm hole

71

6.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV & 11KV DISC INSULATOR (B&S) 70 KN a. Scope: -

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturers’ works, supply and delivery of strain insulators use on 11 KV and 33 KV overhead power line.

b. Standard: -

Strain insulators Ball & Socket type suitable for 11 kV & 33 kV lines shall be conforming to Indian standard Specification IS: 731:1971 and IS: 3188 with its latest amendments and revisions and having mechanical failing load of 70 KN. Insulators conforming to any other internationally accepted standard which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned will be acceptable. Where the material is offered according to the internationally accepted standard a copy of the specification shall be attached with the tender.

c. General requirements: -

i) The porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.

ii) Unless and otherwise specified glaze shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing or are left unglazed for purpose of assembly.

iii) The design of the insulator shall be such that stress due to expansion and contraction in any parts in any parts of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard matel.

iv) Cement used in the construction of insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion or loosening by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individuals’ parts correctly during commencing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be uniform as possible.

v) The insulator shall be multi petticoat type. vi) The insulator shall be in one piece.

d. Basic Parameter: -

Sl no Particular

1 Type of insulator Disc insulator, 70 KV (B&S type)

2 Applicable Standard IS: 731:1971 and IS: 3188, IS:

2544/1973

3 Material Porcelain [sound, free from defects,

thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed]

4 Type Ball & Socket

5 Colour Brown

6 Size 255x145 mm

7 Minimum failing load 70 KN

8 Socket cap Malleable cast iron hot dip galvanized

of size 16 mm dia

9 Ball pin High tensile/ forged hot dip galvanized

10 Security clip Phosphor bronze ‘W’ type

11 Creepage distance 580mm ( for 33 KV)& 400 mm ( for 11

KV)

12 Nominal System voltage 33kV/11 KV

13 Highest system voltage (rms) 36 KV/12 KV

72

14 Wet one minute power frequency test(rms) 75 KV/35 KV

15 Dry one minute power frequency test (rms) 75 KV /35 KV

16 Power frequency puncture withstand (rms) 180 KV /105 KV

17 Impulse voltage withstand test(Peak) 170 KV / 75 KV

18 Power frequency flush and voltage (dry) 95 KV ( r.m.s)

19 Power frequency flush and voltage (wet) 80 KV ( r.m.s)

20 Visible discharge test 27 KV ( r.m.s)

e. Mechanical Load: -

The minimum failing load of the insulator shall 70 KN and the load shall be applied transverse.

f. Creepage Distance: - The minimum total creepage distance for insulator shall be suitable for heavily polluted and humid atmospheric conditions and shall be 400mm (for 11KV) & 580mm (for 33 K) in vertical position.

g. Marking: - Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:

i) Name and trade mark of the manufacturer ii) Month and year of manufacture iii) Minimum failing load in KN iv) Country of manufacturer. v) ISI certificate marking if any

The marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing. h. Packing: -

All insulators shall be suitably packed and crated to standard packing practice as required under Railway Regulation to withstand rough handling during transit.

i. Tests: -

The insulator shall stand the entire following test as per IS: 731/1971 (incorporating latest amendments and revisions).

A) Type tests – The following type tests shall be conducted on the insulators (which have already passed the routine test):

i) Visible discharge test (power frequency voltage) ii) Impulse voltage withstand test iii) Impulse voltage flashover test iv) Verification of dimension v) Wet one minute power frequency test and wet flashover tests vi) Visual examination vii) Mechanical failing load test viii) Porosity test

The tenderer shall furnish copies of test certificates of the type test carried on identical manufacturer with guaranteed performance data for the insulators which they offer for supply. The report of type tests (on the insulator which is passed the routine tests) tested in the National Test House, Alipore and or such similar Government recognized Test House/ Institutions shall be invariably submitted along with the tender.

B) Sample/ Acceptance tests: -

The samples (after withstanding the routine test) shall also be subjected to the following sample acceptance tests as per ISS.

73

i) Verification of dimensions ii) Temperature cycle test iii) Mechanical failing load test iv) Power frequency puncture withstands test v) Porosity test

C) The following routine and factory tests shall be conducted at the time of manufacture as

per ISS. i) Visual examination ii) Electrical test

j. Guaranteed technical particulars: -

(To be filled by the tenderer) 1) Name and address of manufacturer. 2) Trade mark of manufacturer to the legibly marked in the insulator. 3) Mechanical characteristic.

a. Total creepage distance in mm. b. Overall height of insulator in mm c. Overall diameter of insulator in mm. d. Overall weight of insulator in Kg. e. Minimum failing load in KN.

4) Electrical characteristic a. Visibly discharge voltage. (power frequency voltage) b. Dry one minute power frequency withstands voltage. c. Wet one minute power frequency withstands voltage. d. Power frequency puncture withstands voltage. e. Impulse (1/50 micro second wave) withstands voltage. f. Impulse flashover (1/50 micro second wave) voltage. g. Impulse flashover (1/50 micro second wave) voltage negative. h. Dry flash over voltage. i. Wet flash over voltage.

5) Standard specification to which insulator will conform. 6) Other particulars, if any.

k. Inspection: -

All tests and inspections shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise agreed by the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per specifications. The purchaser reserves the right to have tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of the material supplied.

l. Drawing and Sample: -

Drawing specifically showing all dimensions is to be submitted along with technical bids. Sample should be furnished alongwith the tender for verifications. Firms whose samples have been approved earlier need not submit the same.

74

6.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HARDWARE FITTING FOR DISC INSULATOR, 70 KN( B& S)

1.0 Scope: -

This specification covers design, drawings, manufacture, testing at manufacturers’ works, supply and delivery of hardware fittings for strain insulator of ball & socket type .

The fitting shall consist of the following component : a) Cross arm strap conforming to IS: 2486 ( Pt-II)-1989. b) Forged steel ball eye for attaching the socket end of the strain insulator to the cross

arm strap. Forging shall be made of steel as per IS : 2004-1978. c) Aluminium alloy thimble socket made out of permanent mould cast , high strength

aluminium alloy for attaching to the strain insulator on one end and for accommodating the loop of the helically formed dead-end fittings at the other end in its smooth internal contour. The thimble socket shall be attached to the strain insulator with the help of locking pin as per the dimension given in IS: 2486(PT-II)-1989

d) Helically formed dead-end grip having a pre-fabricated loop to fit ito the grooved contour to the thimble on one end and for application over the conductor at the other end. The formed fitting shall conform to the requirement of IS:12048-1987.

Tests: The helically formed fittings for strain insulators shall be subjected to tests as per IS:12048-1987. The other hardware fittings shall be tested as per IS:2486 (Part-I) Packing: For packing of strain clamps and related hardware, double gunny bags or wooden cases shall be used. The fittings shall be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Helically formed fittings shall be packed in card board / wooden boxes. Fittings for different sizes of conductors shall be packed in different boxes and shall be complete with their minor accessories fitted in place and colour codes on tags / fittings shall be marked to identify suitability for different sizes of conductors as per IS:12048-1987 Inspection: All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of manufactur unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of supply.

75

6.7 HARDWARE FITTINGS INCLUDING TENSION CLAMP ASSEMBLY (Aluminium Alloy) FOR “RACCOON” AND “WOLF” CONDUCTOR

1.0 Scope: - This specification covers design, drawings, manufacture, testing at manufacturers’ works, supply and delivery of suspension clamp for use with Raccoon (7/3.81mm-80 sqmm)/Wolf (19/3.4mm-175 sqmm )conductors within the state of Assam.

2.0 Standard: - The material and process adopted in the manufacture shall conform to the provision of the following standards amended up-to-date IS: 2486 specification for Insulator fitting for overhead power lines.

3.0 General: - The tension clamps offered shall be made of die cast high strength aluminium alloy and shall be suitable for use with “Raccoon and Wolf” conductors together with one set of preformed armour rods. Suitable sheet metal liner shall be provided.

The clamp shall move easy oscillation around horizontal axis. The bidder is to quote separately for suspension clamp: i) Envelope type ii) Bottom free centre type design. The single tension clamp shall consist of the following components: - Description Quantity Material 1. Ball hook without provision for 1 no. Forged Steel Arching horn 2. Socket type without provision for 1set. MCI Arching horn tension clamp for AAAC 1 no Alumium alloy Raccoon /Wolf conductors

The clamp shall be of high corrosion resistant, light in weight, have low effective power loss and small moment of inertia enabling it to follows freely the movements of the conductor. The tension clamp shall also be provided with suitable socket or clevis eye for connecting it to the insulator string. The seat and clamping surface should be smooth, without any projections or sharp bends and should be formed to support the conductor on long, easy curves at the comparatively sharp bends. Minimum failing load = 70 KN. The slip strength of tension clamp shall not exceed 15% of the breaking load of the conductor.

4.0 Tests: - The hardware fittings shall be subjected to all the tests in accordance with relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The purchaser shall have the right to carryout acceptance tests, in the presence of representatives of the purchaser. The bidder shall submit type test certificate along with the tenders. The following tests shall be carried out.

i) Type Test: - (a) Slip Strength test for clamp. (b) Mechanical test for clamp & fittings (c) Heating cycle test. (d) Verification of dimensions. (e) Galvanizing / Electroplating test. (f) Visual examination test

ii) Acceptance Test: a) Dimensional test. b) Galvanizing test. c) Mechanical test for clamp & fittings d) Electrical Resistance Test.

iii) Routine Test: a) Visual examination test. b) Routine mechanical test.

Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) and drawing specifically showing all dimensions are to be submitted along with technical bids.

76

6.8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR P.G CLAMP FOR AAA RACOON /WOLF CONDUCTOR

1.0 Scope:

The scope covers design, manufacturing, testing at work, transport at site, insurance,

storage, erection and commissioning of P.G. Clamp suitable for Conductor size

Wolf/Raccoon/Weasel/3 Bolt Type strictly conforming to IS : 2121 and Galvanising

conforming to IS : 2633 as per the following:

2.0 Standards:

P.G. Clamps suitable for conductor size, wolf/raccoon/weasel 3 bolt types strictly

conforming to IS : 2121 and galvanizing conforming to IS: 2633 as per the following:

P.G. clamp body to be made from aluminium alloy

Clamps nuts and bolt and washer should be made of hot deep galvanized steel

Spring washer be made of electro-galvanize special steel.

Style

No.

Conductor Maximum

conductor

diameter in

mm

Dimensions

No of

Bolts

Approx.

Weight

Kg.

A

mm

B

mm

C

mm

D

mm

E

mm

A-83 Wolf 20.78 140 76 42 5/8 1 3 0.51

A-81 Racoon 14.45 95 57 30 1/2 2 2 0.18

3.0 Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third

party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and

acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the

supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and

shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

77

6.9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR AAA “WOLF” & “RACCOON” CONDUCTOR

1.0 Scope

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at works, transport, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of All Aluminum Alloy Stranded Conductors at site in 33 KV.

2.0 Conductor Size

ii) 19/3.40 mm (173mm² Alloy Area) – wolf iii) 7/3.81 mm ( 80 mm² Alloy Area ) - Raccoon

3.0 Applicable Standards

Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification, the conductor shall comply with IS:398 (Part-IV)- 1994 or the latest version thereof.

4.0 Properties of Wires

The properties of Aluminium alloy wires to be used in the construction of the stranded conductors shall be as in the following Table-1

Table-1

Diameter

Cross area of nominal Dia wire

Mass

Maximum breaking load after stranding

Resistance at 20° C

Nominal Min Max Max Stamdard

Mm mm mm mm2 Kg/Km KN Ohm/Km Ohm/Km

3.40 3.37 3.43 9.079 24.51 2.80 3.67 3.96

3.81 3.77 3.85 11.401 30.78 3.34 2.938 2.851

5.0 Properties of Conductors

The properties of stranded all aluminium alloy conductors of various sizes shall be as in the following table-II All Aluminium Alloy Conductors( AAAC)

Nominal Alloy Area

Stranding & Wire dia

Sectional area

Approx. overall dia

Approx. Mass

Calculated resistance at 20° C (Max)

Approx calculated breaking

load

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

mm2 Mm mm

2 mm Kg/Km Ohm/Km KN

173 19/3.40 172.52 17.00 474.02 0.1969 50.54

80 7/3.81 79.81 11.43 218.26 0.425 23.41

6.0 Free From Defects

The wire shall be smooth and free from all imperfection such as spills, splits etc.

7.0 Joints in Wires

Conductors containing three/seven wires. There shall be no joint in any wire of a stranded

conductor containing three/seven wires except those made in the base rod or wire before

final drawing.

78

8.0 Stranding

8.1 The wires used in the construction of a stranded conductor shall before stranding satisfy all

the relevant requirements of this standard.

8.2 The lay shall be within the limits given in Table-III

Lay Ratios for Aluminium Alloy Stranded Conductors

No. of wires in conductors Lay ration

Min. Max

7 10 14

19 10 16

8.3 The outer layer shall be right handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely

stranded.

9.0 Climatic Conditions

The conductor shall be designed to suit for the climatic conditions specified in these bidding

documents.

10.0 Tests

The samples of individual wires for the test shall normally be taken before stranding. The

manufacturer shall carry out test on samples taken out at least from 10% of aluminium wire

spools. However, when desired by the purchaser, the test sample may be taken form the

stranded wires. However the minimum breaking load test shall be done on a sample taken

from stranded wires and the minimum breaking load shall not be less than the value

indicated in Table-I.

The wires for alloy conductors shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 398(Part-IV)-

1994

i) Breaking loads test.

ii) Elongation test

iii) Resistance test

11.0 Packing and Marking

The conductors shall be owned in reels or drums conforming to the latest version of IS:

1778-1980 “ Specification for reels and drums for bare wire and name of the project ABY

shall be indicated clearly on the drums.

10.1 Packing

10.1.1 The gross mass of packing of various conductors shall not exceed by more than 10% of the

values given in the following table:

Conductor size Gross Mass

175 mm2 alloy area ( 19/3.40mm) 2500

80 mm² Alloy Area (7/3.81 mm) 1600 KG

10.1.2 The normal length of various conductors shall be as given in the following table:

Conductor size Normal Length

175 mm2 alloy area ( 19/3.40mm) 1.1 Km

80 mm² Alloy Area (7/3.81 mm) 1.3 KM

10.1.3 Longer lengths shall be acceptable.

79

10.1.4 Short length , not less than 50% of the normal length shall be acceptable to the maximum

extent of 10% of the quantity ordered 10.2 marking.

The following information be marked on each package.

a) Manufacturer’s name.

b) Trade Mark, if any.

c) Drum or identification number.

d) Size of conductor

e) Number & lengths of conductor

f) Gross Mass of the package

g) Net mass of the conductor

h) ISI certification mark.

i) Name of the Project ABY

11 INSPECTION

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture. The manufacturer shall

afford the inspection representing the purchaser or third party nominee all reasonable

facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with

this specification.

80

6.10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV PIN INSULATOR

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's works,

transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of insulators

required for 33 kV lines.

2.0 STANDARD

The pin insulators shall comply with the Indian Standard specification IS : 731/1971 as

amended from time to time having mechanical failing load of 10 K.N for 33 kV insulator.

Insulators conforming to any other internationally accreted standards which ensure

equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned would also be acceptable.

Where the material is offered according to the inter-national standard a copy of the

specification shall be attached with the tender.

2.1 General requirement: The porcelain should be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified

and smoothly glazed.

2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown colour. The glaze shall cover all the

porcelain parts of the insulators except those areas which serve as support during firing or

are left unglazed for purpose of assembly.

2.3 The design of the insulator shall be such that stress due to expansion and contraction in any

part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly

with hard metal.

2.4 Cement used in the construction of insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion or

loosening by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts

correctly during cementing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal

fitting and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.

2.5 The insulator shall be multi-petty-coat type.

3.0 BASIC PARAMETER:

Sl No Particular

1 Type of insulator 33 KV Pin Insulator

2 Applicable Standard IS : 731/1971

3 Material Porcelain [ sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified

and smoothly glazed.]

4 Dimension 210x280x145 mm

a Height of the insulator 210mm

b Upper diameter of the insulator 145 mm dia

c Bottom diameter of the insulator 280mm dia

5 Minimum failing load 10 KN

6 Creepage distance 580 mm

7 Nominal System voltage 33kV

8 Highest system voltage (rms) 36 KV

9 Wet one minute power frequency test(rms) 75 KV

10 Dry one minute power frequency test (rms) 95 KV

11 Power frequency flush and voltage (Dry) 95 KV

12 Power frequency flush and voltage (Wet) 80 KV

13 Power frequency puncture withstand (rms) 180 KV

14 Impulse voltage withstand test(Peak) 170 KV

4.0 MECHANICAL LOADS The minimum failing load of the insulators shall be 10 KN for 33 kV and the load shall be applied in transverse direction.

5.0 CREEPAGE DISTANCE The minimum total creepage distance for insulators shall be 580 mm for 33 kV insulators.

81

6.0 MARKING Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:

1.0 Name or trade mark of the manufacturer 2.0 Month and year of manufacture 3.0 Minimum failing load in KN 4.0 Country of manufacture 5.0 ISI certificate mark, if any 6.0 Name of the Project

The marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.

7.0 Type Tests The following type tests shall be conducted on 'a suitable number of individual insulator unit, components, materials or complete strings:

a) Verification of dimensions b) Thermal mechanical performance test c) Power frequency voltage withstand and flashover test (i) dry (ii) wet d) Impulse voltage withstand and flashover test (dry) e) Visible discharge test (dry) f) RIV test (dry) g) Mechanical failing Load Test (for pin insulator only) h) 24 hrs. mechanical strength test (for strain / string insulator only)

8.0 Acceptance Test a) Visual examination b) Verification of dimension c) Temperature cycle test d) Galvanizing test e) Mechanical performance test f) Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling g) Eccentricity test h) Metallurgical test i) Grain test j) Inclusion rating For metal fittings only (in black condition) k) Chemical analysis l) Microstructure. m) Mechanical failing load test (for Pin Insulator only) n) Electro-mechanical strength test (for strain insulator only) o) Porosity test p) Puncture test(for Strain Insulator only)

9.0 ROUTINE TEST

a) Visual Inspection b) Mechanical routine test (for Strain Insulator only) c) Electrical routine test (for Strain Insulator only)

10.0 Tests During Manufacture On all components as applicable a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle inspection for

malleable castings. c) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings d) Hydraulic Internal Pressure tests On disc insulator shells

11.0 Test Reports 11.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least three (3) copies along with one

original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner only after which the commercial production of the concerned materials shall start.

82

Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner, only after which the material shall be despatch.

11.2 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for periodic inspection by the Owner's representative.

11.3 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Contractor. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Owner.

12.0 Inspection a) The Owner's representative or third party nominee shall at all times be entitled to have

access to the works and all places of manufacture, where. insulator, and its component parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Contractor's and ;1ub-Contractor's works, raw materials, manufacture of th::; material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.

b) The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor only under packed condition as detailed in the specification. The Owner shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. Insulators shall normally be offered for inspection in lots not exceeding 5000 nos. the lot should be homogeneous and should contain insulators manufactured in the span of not more than 3-4 consecutive weeks.

c) The bidder shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of starting and the progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could be made for inspection.

d) No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the Owner in writing. In the latter case also the material shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.

e) The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are later found to be defective.

13.0 BID DRAWING The Bidder shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered. The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing (6 copies) of each insulator unit including a cross sectional view of the insulator shell. The drawing shall include but not limited to the following information: a) Dimensions with manufacturing tolerances b) Minimum creepage distance with positive tolerance c) Protected creepage distance d) Eccentricity of the disc

i. Axial run out ii. Radial run out

e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics f) Size and weight of Pin Ball Shank / ball and socket parts g) Weight of unit insulator disc h) Materials i) Identification mark j) Manufacturer's catalogue number After placement of award, the Contractor shall submit fully dimensioned insulator drawings containing all the details, in four (4) 'copies to Owner for approval. After getting approval from Owner and successful completion of all the type tests, the Contractor shall submit 20 more copies of the same drawing to the Owner for further distribution and field use at Owner's end.

14.0 Guaranteed Technical Particulars The guaranteed technical particulars in respect of the Pin Insulators offered shall be submitted along with the tender.

83

6.11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. PIN OF 33 PIN INSULATOR 1. Scope

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works, transport to site, storage, insurance, erection and commissioning of galvanized forged steel pins for use in 11 KV and 33 kV lines.

2. Standard

The galvanized Iron forged steel pins shall be of type L-230 N conforming to IS 2486 (PT-I/1971) and IS: 2486 (PT-11/1963) having stalk length of 300 mm and shank length of 150 mm with minimum failing load of 10 kN. Details of the pin are shown in the drawing.

The pins conforming to any other internationally accepted standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned would also be acceptable.

3. General Requirements 3.1. The pins shall be single piece obtained by process of forging. They shall not be made by

joining, welding, shrink fitting or any other process for more than one piece of materials. They shall be of good finish, free from flaws and other defects. The finish of the collar and the shank is avoided.

3.2. All ferrous pins, nuts spring washers shall be galvanized and small fittings like spring washers, nuts etc. may be electroplated with zinc. The threads of nuts and tapped holes etc. shall be rounded. The galvanizing should be as per ISS: 2633/1964.

3.3. The dimensions of the 33kV Pins shall be as follows:

a) Stalk length 230 mm b) Shank length 150 mm c) Thickness of collar 6 mm

d) Diameter of collar 50 mm

e) Diameter of shank 24 mm f) Threaded length of shank 100 mm

g) Diameter of stalk head 27.78 mm h) Threaded length of stalk 47 mm

3.4. The pins shall have minimum failing load of 10 kN for 33 kV. 3.5. Tests

Pin shall comply with the following tests. 3.6. Type test:

a) Visual examination test b) Verification of dimensions c) Checking of threads d) Galvanizing test e) Mechanical strength tests

3.7. Routine test: a) Visual examination test

3.8. Acceptance test: Checking of threads on heads

a) Galvanizing test b) Mechanical test

4. Inspection

All tests and inspections or shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise agreed by the purchaser and the manufacturers at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the inspector or third party nominee representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserved the right to have the test carried out at his cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of the materials supplied.

5. Marking The pins shall be marked with name of manufacturer, year and name of project.

84

6.12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 36 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SCOPE

This section of specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly under

stringent quality control at every stage of manufacturing, testing at manufacturer's

works before dispatch, supply and delivery at destination store and supervision of

erection, testing and commissioning of 36 KV outdoor type vacuum circuit breakers at

various substations in SEB.

The scope of supply shall also include necessary special tools and plants required for

erection, maintenance and necessary spares, required for normal operation and

maintenance of the circuit breakers for a period of five years.

The circuit breakers should be complete in all respects with insulators, bimetallic

connectors, interrupting chamber, operating mechanism control cabinet, interlocks,

auxiliary switches indicating devices, supporting structures, accessories, etc.,

described herein and briefly listed in the schedule of requirements. The

spares/attachments which are meant necessary for the smooth functioning of the

equipment and specifically are not mentioned here shall be assumed to be included

the scope of supply.

1.2 STANDARDS

The circuit breaker shall conform in all respects to the requirements of latest issue of

IS/IEC specifications except for modifications specified herein. The equipment

manufactured according to any other authoritative standards which ensure an equal or

better quality than the provision of IS/IEC specifications shall also be acceptable. The

salient point of difference between the proposed standard and provision of these

specifications shall be clearly brought out in the tender. A copy of English version of

such specifications shall be enclosed with the tender.

The list of standards mentioned in this specification and to which the circuit conform is

given below:

1. IEC-56 High Voltage A.C. Circuit Breakers

2 IEC-137 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000 volts

3. IEC-71 Insulation Co-ordination

4. IEC-694 Common clauses for high voltages switchgear and control gear

standards

5. IEC-815 Specification for Creepage distance

6. IS-13118 Specifications for high voltage alternating current

circuit breakers 7. IS-2099 High voltages porcelain bushings

8. IS-4379 Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders

9. IS-3072 Installation and maintenance of switchgear

10. IEC-267 Guide for testing of circuit breakers with respect to out

of phase switching 11. IS-802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead

transmission lines 12. IEC-17A

5tudy Group

Dec.1981

Sealing of interrupters I breakers

13. IS-1554 PVC insulated cables upto and including 1000 volts

14. IS-5 Colors for ready mixed paints and channels

85

1.3 SERVICE CONDITONS

1.3.1 CLIMATIC CONDITONS

The breakers and accessories to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the tropical conditions specified in this bidding

document.

1.3.2 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply system.

a. Power Devices (like drive motors) 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 hz, neutral grounded AC

supply

b. DC Alarm, Control and Protective Devices 110/220 V DC, ungrounded 2 wire

(Substation wise exact details shall be furnished to the successful bidder)

c. Lighting 240 V, single phase 50 Hz AC supply

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the Purchaser at the terminal

point for each circuit breaker for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder's

scope includes supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc. The above supply

voltage may vary as indicated below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous

operation over the entire range of voltages

1) AC Supply Voltage + 10% /-- 15% Frequency ± 5% 2) DC Supply - 15% to + 10%

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF 36 KV/OUTDOOR VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The vacuum type circuit breaker shall have vacuum interrupters, designed to provide a long

contact life at all currents upto rated making and breaking current during switching

operation: The vacuum interrupters sealed for life shall be encapsulated by porcelain

insulators for out door installation requirement of the circuit breakers. The offered breakers

shall be suitable for out door operation under climatic conditions specified without any

protection from sun, rain and dust storm. Kiosk type breakers with dumpering arrangement

etc., for indoor type breakers housed in sheet steel enclosure are not acceptable.

The vacuum interrupters of each phase shall be housed in a separate porcelain insulator.

The three identical poles shall be mounted on a' common base frame and the contact

system of three poles should be mechanically linked to provide three pole gang

opening/closing for all type of faults.

i. The performance of breakers shall be adequately proven by type tests for the

designed rating at internationally reputed independent testing station.

ii. The offered equipment shall be practically maintenance free over a long period.

iii. All mechanical parts and linkages shall be robust in construction and maintenance

free, over at least 30,000 switching operations except for lubrication of

pins/articulated joints at interval of 5 years or 5000 operations.

iv) Similar parts shall be strictly interchangeable without special adjustment of

individual fittings. Parts requiring maintenance shall be easily accessible, without

requiring extensive dismantling of adjacent parts.

v) The operating mechanism will be self maintained and of proper operation

endurance not less than the mechanical life of circuit breaking unit. It shall be

spring operated type described hereinafter.

vi) The circuit breaker shall be supplied complete with all auxiliary equipment meant

necessary for the safe operation, routine and periodic maintenance. All internal

wiring including those of spare auxiliary contacts shall be complete and wired upto

terminal blocks situated near cable gland plate.

vii) The breaker shall be totally restrike free under all duty conditions and shall be

86

capable of performing the duties without opening resistor. The details of any device

incorporated to limit or control the rate of rise of restriking voltage across the circuit

breaker contacts shall be stated.

viii) The breaker shall be reasonably quiet in operation and the noise level shall not

exceed 140 decibels.

ix) The breaker shall be suitable for three phase reclosing operation.

x) An operation counter, visible from the ground level even with the mechanism

housing closed shall be provided.

1.4.1 FIXED AND MOVING CONTACT

The fixed and moving contacts of the breaker have to ensure permanent full contact during

closing without unusual maintenance. All making and breaking contacts shall be

hermetically sealed and free from atmospheric effects.

The contacts metallurgy and geometry shall be such that there is minimum contact burning

and wear. Main contact shall have ample area and contact pressure for carrying the rated

current and rated short time current without excessive temperature rise which may cause

pitting or welding of the contacts.

The main contacts should have low contact resistance. The contact should be self cleaning

type, i.e., the layer of copper oxide should be cleaned during rubbing of contacts. The

contact area should be well defined, spring used for contact shall be of gradually rising

characteristic i.e., they should be soft. The contacts should not provide contact grip, ie.,

electro-magnetic forces should not grip the contacts and oppose the opening process. It

would be desirable to have separate main contacts and arcing contacts in order to have

longer life of the contacts. The contours of the energized metal parts of the breaker shall be

such as to eliminate areas or points of high electrostatic flux concentration. Surfaces shall

be smooth with no projection or irregularities which may cause visible corona. No corona

shall be visible in complete darkness when the equipment is subjected to the specified test

voltage.

The circuit breaker units shall be suitable for installation on outdoor R.C.C. foundations.

Ground clearance of the live parts of the breakers should be 3700 mm from foundation. The

circuit breakers shall be spring operated. The details of the operating system shall be as

specified under clause Error! Reference source not found. of this section.

1.4.2 RECOVERY VOLTAGE AND POWER FACTOR

The circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting rated power with recovery voltage equal

to the rated maximum line to line service voltage at rated frequency and at a power factor

equal to or exceeding 0.15.

1.4.3 RESTRIKING RECOVERY

The complete data for the phase factor, amplitude factor, etc., for rate of rise of restriking

voltage shall be furnished in the tender.

1.4.4 LINE CHARGING INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

The circuit breaker shall be designed so as to be capable of interrupting line charging

currents without undue rise in the voltage on the supply side without restrike and without

showing sign of undue strains.

The maximum permissible switching over voltage shall not exceed 2.5 p.u. The guaranteed

over voltage, which will not be exceeded while interrupting the rated line charging current

for which the breaker is designed to interrupt shall also be stated. The results of the tests

conducted along with the copies of the oscillographs to prove ability of the breakers to

interrupt the rated as well as lower values of the line charging current shall be furnished with

the tender.

87

1.4.5 TRANSFORMER CHARGING CURRENT BREAKING CAPACITY

The breaker shall be capable of interrupting inductive currents, such as those occurring

while switching off unloaded transformers, without giving rise to undue over voltage and

without restrikes. The maximum over voltage value, which will not be exceeded under such

conditions, shall be stated in the tender.

1.4.6 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR SHORTLINE FAULTS

The interrupting capacity of the breaker for short line faults shall be stated in the tender. The

details of the test conducted for proving the capability of the breaker under a short line fault

occurring from one phase to earth conditions shall also be stated in the tender. The rated

characteristics for short line faults shall be in accordance with stipulation contained in clause

8.0 of IEC-56(2)-1971.

1.4.7 AUTOMATIC RAPID RECLOSING

36 KV circuit breaker shall be suitable for 3 pole rapid reclosing. The dead time of the

breaker shall be adjustable and the limits of the adjustment shall be stated in the tender.

1.4.8 OUT OF PHASE SWITCHING

The circuit breaker shall be capable of satisfactory operation even under conditions of

phase opposition that may arise due to faulty synchronization. The maximum power that the

breaker can satisfactorily interrupt under "Phase Opposition" shall be stated in the bid".

1.5 TEMPERATURE RISE

The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment when in service at side

and under continuous full load conditions and exposed to the direct rays of the sun shall not

exceed the permissible limits fixed by IEC. When the standards specify the limits of

temperature rise these shall not be exceeded when corrected for the difference between

ambient temperature specified in the approved specification.

The limits of temperature rise shall also be corrected for altitude as per IEC and stated in

the bid.

1.6 INSULATORS SUPPORTS AND HOUSING

The basic insulation level of the external insulator supporting shall be as per Clause Error!

Reference source not found. of the "Technical Parameters" and these shall be suitable

for use under climatic conditions as per Clause Error! Reference source not found. of

this specification. The porcelain used shall be homogenous, free from cavities and other

flaws. The insulators shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and

rigidity for satisfactory operation under conditions specified above. All bushings of identical

rating shall be interchangeable. The puncture strength of bushing shall be greater than the

flash over value. The design of bushing shall be such that the complete bushing in a self-

contained unit and no audible discharge shall be detected at a voltage upto a working

voltage (Phase Voltage) plus 10%. The support insulator shall conform to IEC-137.

Minimum clearance between phases, between live parts and grounded objects shall be as

per IS-3072-1975 and should conform to Indian Electricity Rules-1956. The minimum

creepage distance for severely polluted atmosphere shall be 27 mm/KV.

The details for atmospheric pollution of various sub-stations where these breakers are to be

installed shall be as per Clause Error! Reference source not found. of this specification.

The air clearance of bushing should be such that if the bushings were tested at an altitude

of less than 1000 meters, air clearance would withstand the application of higher voltages

(IS-2099-1973 para 6.1). In order to avoid breakdown at extremely low pressures the

support insulators should not be covered by moisture and conducting dust. Insulators

should therefore be extremely clean and should have anti-tracking properties. Sharp

contours in conducting parts should be avoided for breakdown of insulation. The insulators

shall be capable to withstand the seismic acceleration of 0.5 g in horizontal direction and

0.6g in vertical direction.

88

1.7 OPERATING MECHANISM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The operating mechanism shall be stored energy type and capable of giving specified duty

of the breaker (sequence of opening and closing) as specified under clause. Error!

Reference source not found. 0-0.3sec-CO-3 min-CO. The breaker shall also pass the

operational test which ascertain the capabilities of operating mechanism. The operating

mechanism shall be capable to perform the following functions efficiently.

i) To provide means where the circuit breaker can be closed rapidly, without hesitation at all

currents from zero to rated making current capacity.

ii) To hold the circuit breaker in closed positions by toggles or latches till the tripping signal is

received.

iii) To allow the circuit breaker to open without delay immediately on receiving tripping signal.

iv) To perform auto reclosure duty cycle.

v) To perform the related functions such as indication, contacts, etc.

Operating mechanism should also be suitable for three phase auto reclose duty. The closing

spring shall be automatically charged by motor immediately after closing operation. In case of

failure of supply to the spring charging motor, the spring shall be chargeable by hand crank.

The contact pressure spring and tripping spring shall be chargeable during closing operation to

ensure the breaker is ready to open. Mechanically ON/OFF indicator, spring charged indicator

and operation counter shall be provided on the front of the control cubicle. For tripping, the

spring provided shall ensure the trippings.

The supply of auto reclosing scheme control circuit equipment does not form the part of this

specification. The supplier shall however be required to co-ordinate for the same with the

supplier of control and relay panels.

a) Tripping/Closing Coils

The circuit breakers shall be provided with two trip coils and one closing coil per breaker.

First trip coil shall be utilized for tripping the breaker on main protection fault detection.

Whereas second trip coil shall be used to trip the breaker when first trip coil fails to trip the

breaker and backup protection comes into operation and shall also be used to trip the

breaker on command. The trip coils shall be suitable for pre-closing and after closing trip

circuit supervision. All the breakers shall have provision for independent electrical operation

of trip coils from local as well as remote through local/remote selector switch. The breaker

shall be provided with suitable protection device against discrepancies in the operation of

individual pole.

b) Trip Free Features

When the breaker has been instructed to close by manual instructions by pushing of push

button, the operating mechanism will start operating for closing operations. If in the mean

time a fault has taken place, the relay provision shall be such that it should close the trip

circuit simultaneously interrupting the live circuit of closing coil which has been instructed for

close command.

The trip free mechanism shall permit the circuit breaker to be tripped by the protective relay

even if it is under the process of closing. An antipumping device to prevent the circuit

breaker from reclosing after an automatic opening shall be provided to avoid the breaker

from pumping i.e., anti pumping relay should interrupt the closing coil circuit.

c) Controls

The circuit breaker shall be controlled by a control switch located in the control room. The

control arrangement shall be such as to disconnect the remote control circuits of the

breaker, when it is under test. Local control devices, selector switch and position indicator

shall be located in weather and vermin-proof cabinet. The circuit breaker control scheme

shall incorporate trip circuit supervision arrangement. Local/remote selector switch shall be

provided for all breakers for selection of "Local" control/remote control.

89

Provision shall be made for local manual, electrical and spring controls. Necessary

equipment's for local controls shall be housed in the circuit breaker cabinet of weather-proof

construction. In addition to this, a hand closing device for facilitating maintenance shall also

be provided.

Each circuit breaker shall have a mechanical open/closed and spring charge indicator in

addition to facilities for provisions for semaphore indicators for breakers which are required

for the mimic diagram in the control room. Lamps for indicating, 'close/open' position of the

breaker shall also be provided.

Mechanical indicator, to show the 'open' and 'close' position of the breaker shall be provided

in a position where it will be visible to a man standing on ground with mechanism housing

open. An operation counter, visible from the ground even with the mechanism housing

closed, shall be provided. Electrical tripping of the breaker shall be performed by shunt trip

coils.

Closing coil shall operate correctly at all value of voltage between 85% and 110% of the

rated voltage. Shunt trip coils shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of the

circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity and at all values of supply voltage between

70% and 110% of rated voltage. The variation in A.C. supply voltage shall be (-)15%to

+10% while variation in frequency shall be ±3. Working parts of the mechanism shall be

non-corrosive material. Bearings which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type

fillings.

Bearing pins, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or locked to prevent

loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the circuit breaker. It shall be

possible to trip the circuit breaker even in the event of failure of power supply.

Operating mechanism and all accessories shall be enclosed in control cabinet. A common

marshalling box for the three poles of the breaker shall be provided, along with supply of

tubing, cables from individual pole operating boxes to the common marshalling box, local.

1.7.1 SPRING OPERTED MECHANISM

The motor compressed spring mechanism shall consists of a closing spring which is wound

or compressed by an electric motor immediately after the breaker closes. The closing

action shall also wind or compress a tripping springs shall be wound.

After the breaker has tripped, the tripping spring shall remain in the released position as

long as the breaker is open, but the closing spring shall remain wound and ready for closing

operation. The operating mechanism shall have all the necessary auxiliaries, apparatus for

operation and supervision, like motor starter with thermal overload release, one closing coil,

two trip coils, push button for local electrical operation, local/remote control selector switch,

push button for direct mechanical tripping, auxiliary switches, antipuming contactors,

operation counter, socket for inspection, lamp and heater with switch. In addition

mechanical interlocking system for interlocking with associated isolators shall be provided.

Spring charging motor shall be standard single phase universal motor suitable for 220 volts

supply.

i) Operating voltages for closing/tripping coils shall be 220/110/30 Volts DC.

ii) Operating voltages for heater elements shall be 220V AC 50 HZ. Other features of

the spring operated mechanism shall be as follows.

a) The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the operating to

close and latch the circuit breaker against the rated making current and also to provide

the required energy for tripping mechanism in case the tripping energy is derived from

the operating mechanism.

b) The mechanism shall be capable of performing the rated operating duty cycle of 0-

0.3Sec-CO-3 Min-CO as per IEC-56.

c) The spring charging motor shall be AC/DC operated and shall not take more than 30

90

sec., to fully charge the closing spring made for automatic charging. Charging of spring

by the motor should not - interfere with the operation of the breakers.

d) The motor shall be adequately rated to carry out a minimum of one duty cycle. Also

provision shall be made to protect the motor against overloads.

e) In case of failure of power supply to spring charging motor, the mechanism shall be

capable of performing one open-close-open operation.

f) Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent

discharging of the closing springs when the breaker is already in closed position.

Provision shall be made to prevent a closing operation to be carried out with the spring

partially charged.

g) Facility shall be provided for manual charging of closing springs.

1.7.2 CONTROL CABINET

The switchgear operating mechanism, the control equipment such switch for closing and

tripping the breakers, various control relays, antipumping device, timer for adjusting breaker

reclosing, a set of terminal blocks for wiring connections, MCB's for disconnecting the

control auxiliary power supplies.

Including relays, etc., shall be enclosed in a cabinet to 'be mounted on a suitable structure

at a convenient working height at the end of the breaker in the outdoor switchyard. The

supporting structure and the enclosure shall be capable of withstanding the typical tropical

climatic conditions, change of ambient temperature, severe dust-storms, very high relative

humidity those are prevailing at the site of location of switchgear (Ref. Error! Reference

source not found. Climatic conditions).

a) Enclosure

The enclosure shall be made out of stretched level steel plates not less than 3.15 mm thick

and of light section structural steel. It should be weather proof as well as vermin proof and

conforming to IP: 55 degree of protection.

The enclosure shall provide protection against dust and foreign objects. Each cabinet

section shall have full width and full length hinged doors mounted on the front that swing

fully open. The doors shall be provided with latches to securely hold it with the cabinet.

Doors shall be of sturdy construction, with resilient material covering, fully perimeterically

contacting the cabinet frame to provide dust protection and prevent metal to metal contact

except at the latch points. Filtered ventilation shall be provided along with the rigid supports

for control and other equipment, measuring instruments, mounting cabinet members and

equipment shall not restrict easy access to terminal blocks for terminating and testing

external connection or to equipment for maintenance.

All screws and bolts used for assembling and mounting wire and cable termination,

supports, devices and other equipment shall be provided with lock washers or other locking

devices. All metal parts shall be clean and free of weld splatter, rust and mill scale prior to

application of double coat of zinc chromate primer which should be followed by an

Polyurethane paint to serve as base and binder for tile finishing coat. The exterior of the

cubicle shall be painted matty grey to shade NO.692 of IS-5 or shade No.631 and interior to

white shade. Sufficient quantity of paints shall also be supplied along with the cubicle to

restore at site any damage during transportation. The mounting structure shall be

galvanized and shall be as per IS-802-11-1978.

b) Heaters

Suitable heaters shall be mounted in the cabinet to prevent condensation. Heaters shall be

controlled by thermostat ON/OFF switches and fuses shall be provided. Heaters shall be

suitable for 240 V AC supply voltage.

91

c) Lighting At least one 20 watts fluorescent tube fixture and lamp holder working on 240V, 50 c/s AC supply shall be provided in each switchgear control cubicle section and shall be located to provide adequate interior lighting of the cubicle. Ballasts shall be rated at not less than 0.90 power factor. A single pole 20 Amp. ‘T’ rated lighting switch shall be provided for each cubicle, flush-mounted on the left end. One duplex 220 volt convenience outlet shall be provided inside each door or pair of doors inside each cubicle. The lighting and convenient outlet circuits shall be completely wired in conduit and terminated on cubicle terminal blocks.

d) Wiring and Cabling

Unless otherwise specified control wire shall be stranded tinned copper stranded wire with 1.1 KV PVC insulation conforming to the requirements of IS-1554. All the control circuit and secondary wiring shall be wired completely and brought out preferably to a vertical terminal block ready for external connections in the control cabinet. The control wire shall not be of cross-section less than 2.5 mm

2 copper.

All spare auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker shall be supplied wired upto terminal block. Each terminal in terminal block shall be suitable for at least 2 x 2.5 mm copper conductor. At least 20 number spare terminals shall be provided over and above the number required. All wiring termination on terminal blocks shall be made through lugs. For current and DC supply circuits disconnecting sturdy type terminal blocks will be provided. For other control circuits, non-disconnecting snap on type terminal blocks shall be provided. All wires shall be identified with non-metallic sleeve or tube type markers at each terminations. Terminal blocks shall be made up of molded non-inflammable plastic material with blocks and barriers molded integrally have white marking strips for circuit identification and moulded plastic covers.

e) Grounding A ground bus of copper bar not less than 6 mm by 25 mm shall be provided along the inside of the front or rear of the each cubicle and equipment rack. The ground bus shall be bolted to the frame of each panel in such a way as to make good electrical contact with each panel or section. Lugs shall be provided for connection of the ground bus to the station ground bus/earth mat.

1.8 ACCESSORIES Each circuit breaker assembly shall be supplied with the following accessories.

i) Line and earthing terminals and terminal connectors. ii) Control housing with:

a) One auxiliary switch with adequate number of auxiliary contacts, but not less than 12 nos. (6 No + 6 NC) for each breaker. These shall be over and above the No. of contacts used for closing, tripping and 'reclosing' and interlocking circuit of the circuit breaker. All auxiliary contacts shall be capable of use as "Normally closed" or "Normally open" contacts. Special auxiliary contacts required for the reclosing circuit if any, shall also be provided. There shall be provision, to add more auxiliary contacts at a later date, if required.

b) Operation counters c) Position indicator (Close/Open) d) Necessary cable glands e) Fuses f) Manual trip device and local test push buttons g) Terminal blocks and wiring for all control equipment and accessories h) Adequate number of heaters for continuous operation to prevent moisture

condensation in the housing of operating mechanism i) Selector switch for local/remote control.

1.9 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE

The circuit breakers shall be supplied complete with necessary galvanized steel supporting structures, foundation and fixing bolts, etc., the galvanizing shall be as per IS. The mounting of the breaker shall be such as to ensure the safety of the operating staff and should

92

conform to Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. Minimum ground clearance of live part from ground level shall be 4000 mm inclusive of foundation (300mm above GL). The bidder shall submit detailed design calculations and detailed drawings in respect of supporting structures suitable for the equipment offered. The tenders shall specify the loads which shall be transmitted to the equipment foundation under most adverse operating conditions of the breaker. All material for making connections between the circuit breaker and its control shall also be included in the scope of supply. Extension brackets shall be provided for directly mounting 36 KV out door current transformers on the circuit breaker on it. Facility to earth the circuit breaker structure at two points shall be provided.

1.10 SURFACE FINISH 1.10.1 All interiors and exteriors of tanks, control cubicles and other metal parts shall be thoroughly

cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, greases or other adhering foreign matter. All steel surfaces in contact with insulation oil, as far as accessible, shall be painted with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil insoluble, insulating paint.

1.10.2 All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc chromate and two coats of Polyurathane paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting material. All machine finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive compound and suitably wrapped otherwise protected. All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather within the limits specified. The paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal, handling. All external paintings shall be as per shade NO.631 of IS:5.

1.10.3 All ferrous hardware exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip galvanized.

1.11 GALVANISING All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers, support channels, structures, shall; be hot dip galvanized conforming to latest version of 18:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard.

1.12 CABLE TERMINATION Suitable cable glands for terminating the multi-core cable shall be provided wherever required.

1.13 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS AND EARTH TERMINALS 1.13.1 Each circuit breaker connected with incoming and outgoing feeders shall be provided with

solder less clamp type bimetallic connectors suitable for ACSR/AAAC conductor mentioned in 'Technical Parameter' Clause.

1.13.2 Each circuit breaker pole and control cabinet shall be provided with appropriate number of grounding terminals and clamps for receiving ground connections.

1.14 INTERLOCKS Necessary interlocks to prevent closing or opening of the breaker under low pressure of the contact spring and devices for initiating alarm shall be provided. Provision shall also be made to enable electrical interlocking with the isolators associated with the breaker to prevent opening or closing of the isolators. The detailed interlocking scheme based upon single line diagram of the substation shall be supplied with the write-up. Requirement of interlock shall be as given below:

i. Isolator should not be operated unless the associated breaker is in open position. ii. Earthing switch shall close only when the line isolator is fully open and locked. iii. Line isolator shaft close only when the corresponding circuit breaker and earthing

switch of the corresponding line are open. iv. The circuit breaker shall close only after all isolators associated with it have been

locked in closed position: In case of double bus bar arrangement following additional requirement for interlocking shall be provided. 1. One bus bar selector isolator of any bay excepting the bus coupler bay shall close only

when

93

a) The circuit breaker of corresponding bay is open and locked. b) The other bus isolator of that bay is open.

2. When one bus isolator of any bay excepting the bus coupler bay is closed. The other shall close only when the bus coupler circuit breaker and both the bus isolators are closed.

3. Bus isolator of bus coupler bay shall operate only when the bus coupler breaker is open. 4. The bypass isolator of feeder shall close when the feeder circuit breaker and its

adjoining isolators are closed. 1.15 EARTHING SYSTEM

Flexible copper conductor earthing connections shall be included in the scope of supply. The system shall comprise of the leads between the switchgear and station mat and the interconnection between phases were necessary. The station earth mat shall consists of bars along the length of switchgear with interconnections at intervals and connections to the station earth, at least from each end. All switchgear enclosures should be bolted metal to metal and should carry the full earth return current. Connection between phases at the earthing points shall be dimensioned for carrying full earth return current i.e., actual service current not rated current. A proposal for the earthing system in switchgear area shall be provided to the purchaser.

1.16 VACUUM INTERRUPTER ASSEMBLY

Each pole of the circuit breaker shall be provided with vacuum interrupter, one for each phase, hermetically sealed for life and encapsulated by ceramic insulators. The interrupter shall be provided with steel chromium are chamber to prevent vaporized contact material being deposited on the insulating body. A further shield giving protection to the metal bellows shall also follow the travel of the moving contacts to seal the interrupter against the surroundings atmosphere. It shall have high and consistent dielectric strength of vacuum unaffected by environment and switching operations. Bronzed joints should ensure retention of vacuum for life time. It shall have low and stable contact resistance due to absence of oxidation effects and shall ensure low power loss. The arcing voltage shall be low and minimum contact erosion.

1.16.1 The manufacturer of VCB should use their own Vacuum interrupter so that the drive mechanism is matched perfectly with that of the requirement of Vacuum Interrupter.

1.16.2 The vacuum bottles should be capable of withstanding minimum 100 full short circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. The vacuum bottles, capable of withstanding less than 100 full short circuit faults, would not be considered and therefore should not be offered.

A manufacture’s type test reports / literature for vacuum bottles, may, therefore be supplied along with tender in duplicate.

1.16.3 Vacuum Interrupters of China make should not be offered.

1.17 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS

1.17.1 Soon after the award of the contract. The manufacture shall supply six sets of drawings which will describe the equipment in details, for the approval of purchaser. All the drawings and manuals should be in English Language and dimensions and weights shall be in MKS units.

Following drawings for each item are to be supplied as part of the contract.

a. General outline drawings, showing dimensions, front and side elevations and plan of

the circuit breaker and its local control panel. b. Outline drawing of bushings showing dimensions and number of sheds and creepage

distance. c. Assembly and sub-assembly drawings with numbered parts. d. Sectional views showing the general constructional features, operating mechanism and

are extinguishing chamber, etc. e. Dimension and assembly of important auxiliaries. f. Detailed drawings of operating mechanism. And inter-phase mechanism.

94

g. Test certificates and oscillographs. h. Detailed drawings of mounting structure. i. Spare parts and catalogue j. Wiring diagram showing the local and remote control scheme of breaker including

alarms indication devices instruments relay and timer wiring k. Write up on working of control schematic of breaker l. Foundation plan including weights of various components and impact loadings for

working foundation design. Seven copies for each substation of the above drawings and instruction manuals covering instructions for installations, operation and maintenance shall be supplied by the contractor(s) without any extra cost

1.18 GUARANTEED TECHNCIAL PARTICULARS Guaranteed and technical particulars' as called for in Section-II shall be furnished along with the tender. Particulars which are subject to guarantee shall be clearly marked.

1.19 TESTS 1.19.1 TYPE TESTS

Each circuit breaker shall comply with requirements of type tests prescribed in the relevant IS Specification type test reports as per stipulations of IS performed by an independent testing agency shall be furnished along with the tender. Tender not accompanied with the following type test certificates and other type test certificates required as per IS shall be summarily rejected.

1. Short time and peak withstand current test. 2. Short circuit breaking capacity and making capacity. 3. Single Capacitor Bank current switching test. 4. Dielectric test i.e. power frequency withstands and impulse withstand test. 5. Temperature rise test. 6. Mechanical Endurance Test.

1.20 ROUTINE TESTS Routine Tests as per the relevant IS shall be carried out on each breaker in presence of purchaser's representative at the manufacturer's expenses at his works except, where agreed to otherwise. All test reports should be submitted and should be got approved from the purchaser before despatch of the equipment.

1.21 SITE TESTS ON CONTROL AND AUXILIARY CIRCUIT The following tests shall be conducted at site, a. Voltage tests on control and auxiliary circuit. b. Measurements of insulation resistance of the main circuit. c. Mechanical Operation Tests. d. Timings (C, O, CO) e. Contact resistance f. Resistance of shunt trip coil & closing coil.

1.22 INSPECTION 1.22.1 The inspection may be carried out by the Purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The Supplier shall grant free access to the Purchaser's representative at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

1.22.2 The supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance, about the manufacturing programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection.

1.22.3 The Purchaser reserves the right to insist on witnessing the acceptance/ routine testing of the bought out items.

1.22.4 No - material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

1.22.5 The supplier shall give 15 days (for local supplies)/30 days. (In case of foreign supplies) advance, intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests.

95

1.23 GURANTEE 1.23.1 The successful Bidder shall guarantee among other things the following:

a) Quantity and strength of material used b) Safe electrical and mechanical stresses on all parts of the equipment, under

specified conditions of operation c) The material shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance, operation for a

period of five year (60 months) from the date of commissioning. 1.23.2 If during the period of guarantee, any of the material, equipments or plant are found

defective and/or fail in test or operation, such materials, equipment or plant shall be repaired by the Bidder free of cost to the Purchaser irrespective of the reimbursements from the insurance company within reasonable time which shall in no circumstances be more than 15 days or such other reasonable time as the Purchaser may deem proper to afford failing which the cost of the failed units will be deducted from the subsequent bills,

1.24 NAME PLATE 1.24.1 Equipment should be provided with name plate giving full details of manufacture, capacities

and other details as specified in the relevant ISS or other specification stipulated. The Purchase Order No. and date and year of supply and the "PURCHASER" and clear mention of Name of the Project shall be made.

1.25 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS 1.25.1 36 KV CIRCUIT BREAKERS

S. . DESCRIPTION VALUES

1 Rate Voltage( KV rms) 36 KV

2 Rated frequency (Hz) 50

3 System neutral earthing Solidly grounded system

4 Type of arc quenching medium Vacuum

5 Rated normal current at site conditions (Amps) 800 Amps.

6 Number of poles 3

7 Installation Outdoor type

8 Temperature rise As per IEC 56( Table-4) page-19

9 Rated short circuit

a) Interrupting capacity at 36 KV 25 KA

b) The percentage DC Components As per IEC 56 & (Ref. Page 51 21 of IEC)

c) Duration of short circuit 1 Sec.

10. Rated short circuit making 62.5 KA

11 First pole to clear factor 1.5

12 Rated short time current 25 KA

13 Rated duration of short circuit 3 Sec.

14 Total break time for any current upto the rated breaking current with limited condition of operating and quenching media pressure (ms)

< 50 ms

15 Closing time(ms) < 100 ms

16 Mounting Hot dip galvanized lattices steel support structured bolted type

17 Phase to phase spacing in the switch yard i.e. interpole spacing for breaker ( min)

400

18 Required ground clearance from the lowest line terminal if both the terminals are not in same horizontal plane( cum)

3700

19 Height of concrete plinth( mm) 300

20 Minimum height of the lowest part of the support 2550

96

insulator from ground liner (mm)

21 Minimum creepage distance of support insulator( mm) 900

22 Minimum corona extinction voltage ( KV rms) 92

23 Standard value of rated transient recovery voltage for terminal fault

As per IEC-56

24 Standard value of rated line Rated RRRV

Characteristics Surge peak factor

For short line faults Impedance Factor K=1.6 A KV/ms= 0.214 Z( ohms) = 450

25 Rated operating

a) duty cycle 0-0.3sec-CO-3 Minutes-CO

b) Auto reclosing Suitable for three phase auto reclosing duty

26 Rated insulation level under heavy pollution condition 1.2/50 micro second lightening impulse withstand voltage ( KV peak) to earth

170 KV

27 Power frequency withstand voltage KV(rms) to earth (KV rms)

70 KV

28 Rated characteristic for out of Phase breaking

a) Out of phase breaking capacity 25% of rated breaking capacity

b) Standard values of transient recovery As per IEC-56

c) Operating mechanism Spring operated Antipumping and Trip free mechanism

d) Power available for operating mechanism 3 Phase 415 V 50 C/S or single phase 50 C/S 240 V.

29 a) Rated supply voltage of closing and operating devices and auxiliary circuits

1) 220/110 V DC/30 VDC 2) 240 V AC 50 C/S single phase 3) 415 V 50 Hz three phase

b) Permissible voltage variation 1) In case of DC Power supply voltage variation shall be between 70% to 110% of normal voltage 2) In case of AC Power supply voltage variation shall be of the normal voltage as per IS-15% to +10%

c) Permissible frequency ± 3% from normal 50 Hz as per IS 2026 part-I 1977 para 4.4

d) Combined variation of frequency and voltage ± 10%

Contact Resistance < 30µΩ

30 Number of auxiliary contacts 10 nos. and 10 NC on each pole continuous current rating 10 Amps, DC breaking rating capacity shall be 2 Amps with circuit shall be 2 Amps with circuit time constant less than 20 ms at 220/110/30 volts DC

31 Number of trip coils 2(two ) trip coils and 1 close coil with anti pumping arrangement

32 Rated terminal load 100 Kg static. The breaker shall be designed to withstand the rated terminal load, wind , load, earthquake load and short circuit forces.

33 Noise level of the equipment No exceeding 140 db

34 Degree of protection for the enclosure IP 55

35 Spares

Mandatory spares

a) Tripping coils 6

b) Closing Coils 2

c) Spring charge motor for spring mechanism operating breaker

1

d) Vacuum Interrupter 2

97

6.13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR TRANSFORMERS & FEEDERS

5.1 SCOPE

5.1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, shop testing,

inspection and testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and

commissioning of Control, Relay, Alarm and Annunciation Panels for two numbers 33/11

KV, 2.5 MVA Transformer and two numbers 33 KV Feeder for 33/11 KV, 2x2.5 MVA

Hatigarh Substations.

5.1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction of

equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of

engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous

commercial operation acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret in a manner the

meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any material

which in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The equipment offered shall be

complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such

components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder's supply, irrespective of

whether these are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order

or not.

5.2 STANDARDS All equipment provided under this specification shall in general conform to the latest

revision/amendment etc. of the following:

Sl No. Standard Title

1 IS: 3231, IEC 255 Part-I to III, BS: 89

Electrical relays for power system protection.

2 IS: 1248; IS: 2419; BS: 89 Indicating instruments

3 IS-13010; IS: 722(Part-I to IX) IEC 521; BS 3T

Energy meters

4 IS: 4237 General requirement of switchgear and control gear for voltages not exceeding 1 KV

5 IS: 375 Marking arrangement for switchgear, busbars, main connection & auxiliary wiring.

6 IS: 8686, IEC-255 Part V &VI IEC 801-4

Specification for static protective relays and tests

7 IEC 337; IEC: 337-1; IS: 6875 Control switches ( LV switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits)

8. IS: 2516 MCCB sand load break switches having a break capacity of 30 KVA rms at 415 V.

9 IS: 4047 Fuse switching units

10 IS: 2208 HRC fuse links

11 IS: 2705; IEC-185 Current transformers

12 IS: 3156; IEC: 186 Potential transformers

13 IS: 8623 Factory built assemblies of switchgear & control gear for voltages upto & including 1000V AC & 1200 V DC

14 IEC: 439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies

15 IS: 4237 General requirement of switchgear & control gear for voltages not exceeding 1000V

16 IS: 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control gear

17 IS: 5028 Aluminium alloy bars

18 IS: 1897 Copper strips for electrical purpose

19 IS: 3618; IS : 6005 Code of practice for phosphate

98

20 IS: 4064 Air break switches, air break disconnectors, air break disconnectors & fuse combination units for voltages not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1200 V DC.

21 IS: 9224 Part II HRC cartridge fuses

22 IS: 5578 Guide for making of insulated conductors

23 IS: 2032 Graphical symbols Ref-abbreviations Name and Address

24 IEC Institution Electro Technical Bureau. Central dale commission Electro Technique International. 1. Rue de vermbe Geneva Switzerland

25 ISO International Organization for standardization. Danish Board of Standardization..Danish Standardizating Sruat Aurehoeqvaj-12 DK- 2990, Heel prup Denmark

26 IS Bureau of Indian Standard Standards Manak Bhawan 9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi- 110 002, India.

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative Standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards, salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standard specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

5.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

5.3.1 The climatic and isoceraunic conditions at site under which the equipments shall operate satisfactorily under the tropical conditions specified in this bidding documents.

5.3.2 The reference ambient temperature assumed for the purpose of this specification are as follows:

i. Maximum ambient temperature : 40° C ii. Maximum average daily ambient temperature : 35° C iii. Maximum average yearly ambient temperature : 30° C

5.4 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 5.4.1 5 MVA Transformers 5.4.2 The details of terminal equipment for 5 MVA, 33 KV Transformer are given below:

a) 33 KV side CTs (HV CTs) ratio: 300-150-100/5-5-5 A

b) Breakers for HV & LV sides of 5 MVA, 33 KV transformer

HV side breaker : VCB, Outdoor Rating of closing coil & Trip coil : 110 V DC, Number of auxiliary contact : 6 N/O and 6 N/C

Core

No.

Accuracy class

Burden Minimum knee point voltage

as per Formula

Purpose

1 5 P 20 20 VA ---- O/L & E/L Protection

2 PS ---- Min. Vk = 250 V

Max. Im= 0.03 A

Transformer differential

protection

3 0.5, Fs < 5 15 VA ------ Metering

99

LV (11KV ) side breaker : Vacuum type, Indoor Both HV & LV breakers are provided with two sets of trip coils( Each set common to all three phases)

c) 33 KV side Feeder CTs Ratio: 400-200/5-5 A

Core

No

Accuracy

class

Burden Minimum Knee point

voltage as per Formula

Purpose

1 5 P 10 20 VA --- O/L & E/L Protection

2 0.5, Fs< 5 15 VA ------- Metering

d) 11 KV (LV side) CTR : 300–150-100/5-5-2.89A

5.5 Drawing, Manuals, Literatures etc.

5.5.1 The tenderer shall furnish along with his tender fully dimensioned drawings of the equipments offered, along with illustrated and descriptive literatures, for various component parts like relays, meters, control switches etc. to enable the purchaser for proper evaluation of the offer. The tenders shall also be accompanied with the schematic drawings showing protection, indicating metering schemes etc

5.5.2 Soon after the award of the contract and before proceeding with the manufacturing works,

the successful tenderer shall furnish drawings in quadruplicate which shall include but not limited to the followings for approval of the purchaser:

a)

Principal layout drawings for the Boards showing the equipments on the panels with

dimensions. A list of the equipments mounted on each panel shall be prepared and

tabulated in the same drawings. The drawings shall also show the constructional details,

foundation details indicating foundation bolts, cable entries etc.

i) Elementary control drawings and other schematics for the equipments furnished, including protection, metering, annunciating and indicating circuit, breaker control ,circuits etc. All wires terminals shall be clearly marked and numbered as per general practice.

ii) Single line and three line diagrams showing all AC and D.C power connections and all secondary connectors for relays, meters etc.

iii) Internal wiring diagrams of all the panels and boards giving internal wiring connections for all the equipments in the panels. The drawings shall also clearly indicate the connections to be made at site or to the external equipments or between boards etc. with wires terminals marked properly.

iv) After approval of the drawings the tenderer shall furnish six copies of the each of the final drawings along with the literatures, instruction manuals etc. for purchaser's reference.

5.5.3 In addition to the above the successful bidders shall supply three sets each of the following

relevant equipments supplied to each substation:

a. All final drawings mentioned above.

b. Literature describing construction, operation, adjustment, testing, calibration,

Core

No.

Accuracy class

Burden Minimum knee point voltage

as per Formula

Purpose

1 5 P 10 20 VA ---- O/L & E/L Protection

2 PS ---- Min. Vk = 200 V

Max. Im= 0.03 A

Transformer differential

protection

3 0.5 15 VA ------ Metering

100

maintenance of all protective and auxiliary relays, instruments, control switches etc.

c. List of spare parts giving identification numbers of the parts.

5.6 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

5.6.1 Control & Relay panels: Detailed Description

The control and relay panels shall be of Simplex type. Each Simplex panel shall consist of a

vertical front panel with equipment mounted thereon and having wiring access from the rear.

It shall have double leaf door with lift off hinges at the back for panels of width more than

800 mm. Doors shall have handles with built-in locking facility.

5.6.2 Constructional Features

a) Control and relay panels shall be of Simplex type. It is the responsibility of-the contractor to

ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified complementary equipment

required for completeness of the protective/control schemes be properly accommodated in

the panels without congestion and if necessary provide panels with larger dimensions. No

price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed.

b) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof.

The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-51 in accordance with

IS:2147.

c) Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural frames

enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet steel of

thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the panels such as bass

frame, front sheet and door frames, and 2.0 mm for sides, door top and bottom portions.

There shall be sufficient reinforcement' to provide level Surface resistance to vibration and

rigidity during transportation and installation.

d) All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gaskets all around with neoprene gaskets.

Ventilation louvers to be provided having screens and filters. The screens shall be made of

brass wire mesh.

e) Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat appearance

inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from outside, with all exterior

surfaces true and smooth.

f) All necessary anchor bolts and other materials required for foundation of panels shall be

supplied

g) Cable entries to the panel shall be from the bottom. The plates of the panel shall be fitted with removable gland plates for fixing the cable glands. Necessary number of cable glands of sizes to suit owner's external cables to the panels shall be supplied by the bidder. Cable glands shall be screwed type, and shall be suitable for PVC cables. Cable gland plate fitted in the bottom of the panel shall be connected to the earthing Panel / Station through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.

h) Relay panels of modern, modular construction would also be acceptable.

i) The total height of the panel shall be 2250 mm. The depth of the panel shall be 600 mm.

The panels shall have suitable width required for mounting of all the equipments on the

front panel.

j) The panels shall match with the existing panels in APDCL substations, the details of which

will be furnished to the successful bidder. Matching includes height , depth of the panels,

colour matching and mimic matching' and arrangement of equipment on the front.

5.6.3 Mounting a) All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the

terminal blocks ready for external connection. The equipment on front of panel shall be mounted flush.

101

b) Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly visible.

c) The contractor shall carry out cutouts, mounting and wiring of the free issue items supplied by others, if any which are to be mounted in this panel in accordance with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings. Cutouts if any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off.

d) The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than 750 mm from the bottom of the panel. The center lines of relays, meters and recorders shall be not less than 450 mm from the bottom of the panel.

e) The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders etc., shall be matched.

f) No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.

g) All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage which may be caused by fire.

5.6.4 Panel Internal Wiring and Other Accessory Equipment

a) Panels shall be supplied completely. with interconnecting wiring provided between all

electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and

terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels. When

panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring and

connections between the panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be carried out

internally. These adjacent inter panel wiring shall be clearly indicated in the drawing

furnished by the contractor.

b) All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, stranded copper

conductor wires with PVC insulation and shall be heat resistant grade and vermin and

rodent proof. The minimum size of the stranded copper conductor used for internal

wiring shall be as follows:

i) All circuits except current transformer and potential transformer circuits one multi

strand 2.5 Sq. mm per lead

ii) Current transformer circuit : one 4.0 Sq. mm per lead. The minimum number of

strands per conductor shall be three.

c) All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and

connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters and troughs shall be

used for this purpose.

d) Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits, annunciation

circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of the panels running

throughout the entire length of the panels.

e) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned copper ring type

lugs which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulted sleeves shall be provided at all

the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond

with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly

on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks

102

f) All wires directly connected to trip circuit of breaker or device shall be distinguished by the

addition or red coloured unlettered ferrule. Number 6 and 9 shall not be included for

ferrule purposes.

g) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be preferred for

inter panel wiring. Interconnections to adjacent panel shall be brought out to a separate

set of terminal blocks located near the slots or holes meant for taking the inter connecting

wires. Arrangements shall permit easy inter connections to adjacent panels at site and

wires for this purposes shall be provided by contractor looped and bunched properly

inside the panel.

h) Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the internal

wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipment.

5.6.5 Terminal Blocks

a) All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on terminal blocks preferably vertically mounted on the side of each panel. Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade and have 10 amps continuous rating moulded piece--complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Terminal block design shall include a white fibre markings strip with clear plastic slip-on? clip-on terminal covers. Markings on the terminal strips shall correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring diagrams.

b) Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short-circuiting and earthing facilities.

c) At- least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.

d) Unless otherwise specified. terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following conductors of purchasers cable on each side

i. All circuits except current and potential transformer circuits : minimum of one of 2.5 sq.mm copper.

ii. All CT and PT circuits: minimum of two of 4.0 mm square copper.

e) There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal blocks and associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be minimum, of 150 mm.

f) Arrangement of the terminal block assembles and the wiring channel within the enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run parallel and in close proximity along each side of wiring duct to provide for convenient attachment of internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for purchaser's external cable connection. An adjacent terminal block shall also share this fired wiring corridor. A steel strip shall be connected between adjacent terminal block rows at 450 mm intervals for support of incoming cables.

g) The number and sizes of the Purchaser's multi-core incoming cable will be furnished to the Contractor after placement of the order. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, packing glandser, crimp type tinned copper lugs supporting clamps .and brackets, wiring troughs and gutters etc., for purchaser's cable shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.

5.6.6 Painting

a) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated, in accordance with the 18:6005 "Code of

Practice for phosphating iron and steel".

b) Oil, grease, dirt and sweat shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

103

c) Rust and scale shall be removed by picking with dilute acid followed by washing

with running water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

d) After phosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clear water followed by

final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

e) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready

mixed, stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while

the second coat shall be stoved .

f) After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall

be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be

applied after completion of tests. The exterior Colour of the paint shall be selected

by the purchaser at a later date.

g) Each coat of primer and finished paint shall be of a slightly different shade to

enable inspection of the painting.

h) The powder coat paint shade should Air Craft Grey (IS : 5) and thickness of 50-60

microns.

i) A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required

at site after installation of the panels.

j) In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure like

electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted along with offer/bid for

purchaser's review and approval.

5.6.7 Mimic Diagram

a) Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the system shall be provided in the front of control panels.

b) Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodized aluminum or plastic of approved fast Colour material which shall be screwed on to the panel and can be easily cleaned. Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable. The mimic bus shall be 2 mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10 mm for bus bars and 7 mm for other connections.

c) Mimic bus Colour will be decided by the Purchaser and shall be obtained from the Purchaser by the successful Bidder.

d) When semaphore indicators are used for isolator position they shall be so mounted in the mimic that the isolator closed position shall complete the continuity of mimic.

e) Indicating lamp, one for each phase for each bus shall be provided on the mimic to indicate bus charged condition.

5.6.8 Name Plates and Markings

a) All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted inside

the panels shall be provided with individual nameplates with equipment designation

engraved. Also on the top of each panel, on front as well as rear side, large and bold

nameplates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.

b) AlI front mounted equipment shall be also provided at the rear with individual name

plates engraved with tap numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel

internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring. The nameplates shall be

mounted directly by the side of the respective equipment in a visible manner and shall

not be hidden by the equipment wiring.

c) Nameplates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lami-coid. Nameplates shall

be black with white engraving lettering. The nameplates inscription and size of

nameplates and letters shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval.

d) Each instrument and meter shall be prominently marked with the quantity measured

e.g. kV, A, MW, etc. All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with

manufacturer's name, manufacturer's type, serial number and electrical rating data.

104

e) Each switch shall bear clear inscription, identifying its function e.g. "BREAKER" "52

A’’ "AMMETER" etc. Similar inscriptions shall also be provided on each device whose

function is not otherwise identified. If any switch device does not bear this inscription

separate name plate giving its function shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have

clear inscription for each position indicating e.g. "TRIP-NEUTRAL-CLOSE", "ON-

OFF", "R-Y-B-N:-OFF", etc.

5.6.9 Miscellaneous Accessories and Supporting Steel

a) Plug point- An AC 240 Volts, single phase, 5A, 50 HZ AC plug point shall be provided

in the interior of each cubicle with "ON-OFF" Switch for connection of hand lamps.

b) Interior lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a CFL lighting fixture rated for 240

volts, single phase, 50 HZ supply for the interior illumination of the panel during

maintenance. The fittings shall be complete with switch fuse unit and switching of the

lighting shall be controlled by the respective panel door switch.

c) One DC emergency lamp is to be fitted and should be complete with switch fuse unit.

d) Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,

distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control signaling,

lighting and space heater circuits. MCBs for the incoming circuits and fuses for sub-

circuits shall be provided. Selection of the main and sub-circuit fuse rating shall be

such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuit for relaying

and metering shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type

conforming to IS : 2208 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. All accessible live

connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation

indicators for indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of

the fuse rating and voltage.

e) Supporting Steel: All necessary foundation anchor bolts and other parts of supporting and fastenings, of the panels shall be supplied by the contractor.

5.6.10 Earthing

a) All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely screwed. Location of earth

bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various switching

conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall

be at least 25 x 6 mm copper flat.

b) When several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be

made continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be

included in the scope of supply of contractor. Provision shall be made for extending

the earth bus bars to future adjoining panels on either side.

c) Provision shall be made on each earth bus bars of the end panels for connecting

purchaser's earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this

purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of contractor. The wire or screens

should be clearly bonded and earthed at the gland plate.

d) All metallic cases of relays, instruments and panel mounted equipment shall be

connected to the earth bus preferably by independent copper wires of size not less

than 2.5 Sq.mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be green. Earthing wire

shall be connected on terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering shall

not be permitted.

105

e) Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to other

devices where the loop is broken shall not be permitted. However, looping of earth

connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to earth bus shall be

provided.

f) VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at

the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made

through links so that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing

continuity of earthing system for other groups.

5.6.11 Metering Instruments:

1. Ammeters:

All ammeters shall be of digital type and provided with direct reading triple range scale.

Scale value of ammeters shall be equal to 1 to 1.3 times the rated primary current of the

associated current transformer feeding it. The rated current shall be 5.0 Amp. Accurate

reading of ammeter shall be possible at the lowest limit of 5 % of the rated current.

Accuracy class 1.0 as per IS: 1248

2, Voltmeter:

All voltmeters shall be of digital type direct reading scale. The maximum scale value of

voltmeters shall be 50% in excess of the primary voltage of the associated PTs. The rated

voltage of the voltmeter shall be 110 volts A.C., accuracy class 1.0 as per IS: 1248.

3. Watt meters

Digital watt meters wherever specified shall be 3 phase, 4 wire three element type

provided with direct reading scales. The scale values of wattmeter shall be as per ratio of

the measuring cores of respective CTs and PTs. The current coils shall be rated for 5/1

ampere and voltage coils for 110 volt continuous. The wattmeters shall be suitable for

circuits with unbalanced loads to be usually met with in commercial service. Accuracy

class will be 1.0 as per IS: 1248.

4. Energy Meters :

Energy meters shall be static type conforming to IEC 687 and suitable for bi-directional

power flow. The static meter shall measure active and reactive energy both import and

export, by 3 phases 4 wire principle suitable for ba1anced / unbalanced 3 phase load.

Accuracy of meter shall. be 0.2 for active energy and 0.5 for reactive energy. The active

and reactive energy shall be directly computed in CT & VT primary values and stored in

four different registers as MWH (E), MWH(I), MVARH (E) and MVARH (I) along with a plus

sign for export and minus sign for import. CT secondary is 5 A the appropriate ratios of

meters shall compute the energy sent out/received, from/to the station bus bar during each

successive 15 minute block and store in the respective registers. Meter shall display on

demand the energy sent out! received during the previous 15 minute block. Further the

meter shall continuously integrate the energy readings of each register upto that time. All

these readings shall be displayed on demand. Cumulative reading of each register ·shall

be stored in non-volatile memory at the end of each hour of day starting from 01 hours.

These readings shall be stored for a period of 40 days before being erased. The static

meter shall have built in clock and calendar having an accuracy of 1 minute per month or

better. Date / time shall be displayed on demand.

Each meter shall have a unique identification code provided by purchaser and shall be

106

marked permanently on the front and also on the non-volatile memory. The voltage

monitoring of all the three voltages shall be provided.

The meter shall normally operate with power drawn from VT supplies. Power supply to the

meter shall be healthy even with a single phase VT supply. An automatic back up shall be

provided by a built in life time battery and shall not need replacement for at least ten years

with a continuous VT interruption of even two years. Date and time of VT interruption and

restoration shall be automatically stored in non-volatile memory. The meter shall have an

optical port at the front of the meter for data collection by a hand held device. The meter

shall have means to test MWH accuracy and for connecting it to time of day tariff equipment.

The meter should have optical port for local communication. RS 232 and RS 485 port

should be incorporated along with Ethernet port.

The bidder is to provide the software for meter for downloading and up loading to base

computer along with one hand held common meter reading instrument along with software.

The meter should preferably be either Secure or L & T make as per APDCL’s specification.

5.6.12 Relays: 5.6.12.1 All relays shall conform to the requirements of 18:3231 or other applicable approved

standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. Relays shall be rectangular in shape and shall have dust tight, dull' black or egg shall black enamel painted cases with transparent cover removable from the front.

5.6.12.2 All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type / modular cases with proper

testing facilities. The testing facilities provided on the relays shall be specifically stated in

the bid. Necessary test plugs shall be supplied loose and shall be included in Contractor's

scope of supply. Test block and switches shall be located immediately below each relay

for testing. As an alternative to test block and test plug arrangements the Bidder shall also

quote alternative testing facility of protective relays by providing a push button which when

pressed connects the testing equipment to the relay coils and injects current in the coil

and automatically disconnects the trip circuits and on operation of relay gives a signal that

the equipment and the circuits are correct.

The purchaser reserves the right for accepting anyone of the above two testing facilities.

Unless otherwise specified all auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied in non-draw out

cases/plug in type modular cases.

5.6.12.3 All AC relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz AC Voltage operated relays shall be

suitable for 110 Volts VT secondaries and current operated relays for 5 Amp CT

secondaries as specified in this specification. DC auxiliary relays and timers shall be

designed for 110 V DC voltage and shall operate satisfactorily between 70 % and 110% of

rated voltage. Voltage operated relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for

continuous operation.

5.6.12.4 The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the protection

scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and timers required for

interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts/suiting contact duties of protective relays

and monitoring of control supplies and circuits, lockout relay monitoring of circuits etc.,

and also required for the complete protection schemes described in the specification shall

be provided.

5.6.12.5 All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential free isolated

output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as required to

complete the scheme. Contacts shall be silver faced with spring action. Relay cases shall

107

have adequate number of terminals for making potential free external connections to the

relay coils and contacts including spare contacts. Relay case size shall be so chosen as

not to introduce any limitations on the use of available contacts on the relay due to in-

adequacy of terminals. Paralleling of contacts, if any, shall be done at the terminals on the

casing of the relay.

5.6.12.6 All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays and interlocking

relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type contacts. All protective relays and

timers shall be provided with externally hand reset positive action operation indicators,

provided with inscription, subject to purchaser's approval. All protective relays which do

not have built in hand reset operation indicators shall have additional auxiliary relays with

operating indicators for this purpose. Similar separate operating indicator (auxiliary relays)

shall also be provided in the trip circuits of protections located outside the board such as

bucholz relays, temperature protection, fire protection. etc.,

5.6.12.7 Timers shall be done of the electromagnetic or solid state type. Pneumatic timers are not

acceptable. Short time delays in terms of milliseconds may be obtained by using copper

slugs on auxiliary relays. In such case it shall be ensured that the continuous rating of the

relay is not affected. Time delay in terms of milliseconds obtained by the external

capacitor resistor combination is not acceptable.

5.6.12.8 No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de-energized

shall be employed in the circuits.

5.6.12.9 Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the purpose of

testing and maintenance.

5.6.12.10 All relays shall withstand a test voltage 2.5 kV, 50 Hzm rms voltage for one second.

5.6.12.11 Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of shunt

reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following, shall be strictly ensured:

i. The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than that of the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure definite operation of the flag indicator of the relay.

ii. Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more relays operate simultaneously.

iii. Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the DC supply voltage is minimum.

5.6.12.12 All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated pair of

contacts wired to terminals exclusively for purchaser's use.

5.6.12.13 For numeric relays the following requirements shall be met with :

i. Numerical relay shall have both RS 485 and RS 232 communication ports. And ten numbers digital IO. Relay software is required.

ii. The numerical relays shall be completely numerical with protection elements realized using software algorithm.

iii. The relay should have high immunity to electrical and electromagnetic interference. Relay should confirm to following mandatory type test for safe operation of relay :

a. High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 610 – 4-1 b. Fast transient disturbance test as per IEC 61000 – 4-4 c. Electrostatic discharge as per IEC 61000 – 4-2 d. Radio frequency interference as per ANSI C 37.90.2 e. Impulse test as per IEC 6100 – 4-3

Supplier shall produce type test certificates for above tests along with the offer.

iv. It shall be possible to energise the relay from 110 V DC auxiliary supply.

108

v. The offered relay shall have a comprehensive local MMI for interface. It shall have the following minimum elements so that the features of the relay can be accessed and setting changes can be done locally.

a. At least 32 character alphanumeric backlit LCD display unit.

b. Relay shall have LEDs for the indication of alarms and trip for various protections. Number of LEDs and alarms will be approved during drawing approval stage.

vi. It shall be possible to daisy chain / multi dropped all the numerical relays on RS 485 rear port for remote communication facility. The remote communication protocol of the numerical relays shall be MODBUS and should be compatible to IEC 61850 protocol. Supplier shall supply the converter for converting MODBUS TO RS * 485 port and RS 232 ports. These ports will be used for downloading the relay data from the loop. The converter shall be placed bus trunking panel THIS FEATURE SHALL BE SIMULATED DURING PRE-DESPATCH INSPECTION. If supplier is not having the facility to provide MODBUS protocol then he shall provide converter for converting any other communication protocol to MODBUS protocol.

vii. The relays shall have the following tools for fault diagnostics. a. Fault Record : The relay shall have the facility to store at least 3 last fault records

with information on cause of trip, date, time, trip values of electrical parameters. b. Event Record : The relay shall have the facility to store at least 25 event Records

with 1 ms resolution. c. The relays settings shall be provided with adequate password protection. The

password of the relay should be of 4 character upper case text to provide security to setting parameter. Supplier shall provide the recovery method if the engineer forgets the password..

d. It shall be possible to change the relay setting from the front panel using the key pads.

e. The relay shall have comprehensive self – diagnostic feature. This feature shall continuously monitor the healthiness of all the hardware and software elements of the relay. Any failure detected shall be annunciated through a output watchdog contract. The fault diagnosis information shall be displayed on the LCD and also through the communication port. THIS FEATURE SHALL BE SIMULATED DURING PRE-DESPATCH INSPECTION.

f. The numerical relays shall be provided with 1 set of common support software compatible with Windows XP/Vista which will allow easy settings of relays in addition to uploading of event, fault, disturbance records, measurements.

g. The relays settings shall also be changed from local or remote using the same software.

viii. Static or micro-controller relays generally consisting of built in logic circuits using ICs and transistors with fixed functions are not acceptable.

ix. 3 numbers of software CDs for protective relay shall be supplied along with the panel. Capability this software is that engineer shall able to extract the relay settings, upload the relay settings, downloading of fault records and any other additional facilities.

x. IF FAULT ANALYSER SOFTWARE CD IS AVAIALBLE SEPARATELY THEN SUPPLIER SHALL SUPPLY FAULT ANALYSER CD ALSO. Cost of this CD shall be included in the panel cost.

5.6.13 Annunciation System:

a) Alarm annunciation system shall be provided for the control board by means of visual and audible alarm in order to draw the attention of the operator to the abnormal operating conditions or the operation of some protective devices. The annunciation equipment shall be suitable for operation with 110 V DC voltage.

b) The visual annunciation shall be provided by \ annunciation facia, mounted flush on the top of the panels. The audible alarm shall be provided by alarm buzzer and bell for trip and non-trip alarm respectively.

c) The annunciator fascia shall be provided with translucent plastic window for alarm point

109

with minimum size of 35 mm x 50 mm. The facia plates shall be engraved in black lettering with respective inscriptions which will be furnished to the Bidder by the purchaser. Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and size of the let6tering shall not be less than 5 mm.

d) Each annunciation window shall be provided with two white lamps in parallel to provide safety against lamp failure. Long life lamps shall be used. The lamp circuit shall include series resistor of adequate rating. The cover plate of the facia windows shall be flush with the panel and shall be capable of easy removal to facilitate replacement of lamps. The transparency of cover plates and wattage of the lamps provided in the facia windows shall be adequate to ensure clears visibility of the inscriptions in the control room having high illumination intensity (500 lux) from the location of the operator's desk.

e) TRIP AND NONTRIP fascia shall be differentiated. All TRIPs shall have red coloured and all NONTRIP fascia shall have white colour.

f) Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows:

5.6.14 Instruments and Meters a) All instruments, meters, recorders and transducers shall be enclosed in dust proof,

moisture resistant, black finished cases and shall be suitable for tropical use. They shall be calibrated to read directly the primary quantities. They shall be accurately adjusted and calibrated at works and shall have means of calibration, check and adjustment at site. All accessories including test switches and test plugs, where applicable shall be furnished. Their elements shall be shock resistant and shielded from external magnetic fields.

b) Indicating Instruments i) Unless otherwise specified all electrical indicating instruments shall be of 144

Sq.mm size. They shall be suitable for flush mounting. ii) Instruments dial shall be with white circular scale and black pointer and with black

numerals and lettering. The dial shall be free from warping, fading and discoloring. The dial shall also be free from parallax error. Spring controlled instruments shall be provided with front of board zero adjuster, capable of being safely handled while the instrument is in service.

iii) Instruments shall conform to IS:1248 and shall have accuracy class of 1.0 or better. The design of the scales shall be such that it can read to a resolution corresponding to 50% of the accuracy class index.

iv) Instrument covers shall be of shadow proof design, utilizing all available light. The indicating instruments shall have red marks on the dial corresponding to rated values of the associated primary equipment.

v) Ammeters and current coils of watt meters shall continuously withstand 120% of rated current and 10 times the rated current for 0.5 Sec. Without loss of accuracy. Voltmeters and potential coils of watt meters shall withstand 120(% of rated voltage for 0.5 seconds without loss of accuracy.

Sl. No.

Alarm condition Fault contact

Visual Annunciation

Audible Annunciation

1 Normal Open Off Off

2 Abnormal Close Flashing on

3 Acknowledge push button is pressed

Close open

Steady on Steady on

Off Off

4 Reset push button is pressed Close On Off

5 Lamp test push button pressed

Open Steady on Off

c) Visual and audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation system shall also be provided and this annunciation shall operate on 240 volts AC supply with separate fuses. On failure of the power supply to the annunciation system for more than 3 seconds (adjustable setting) an indicating lamp shall light up and a bell shall sound. A separate push button shall be provided for cancellation of this audible alarm

110

alone but the indicating lamp shall remain steadily lighted till the supply to the annunciation system is restored. The sound of the audible alarm (bell) provided for this annunciation shall be different from the audible alarm provided for this annunciation system.

d) A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure of supply (240 V AC) to the scheme mentioned above. If the failure of supply exists for more than 2 to 3 seconds, this relay shall initiate visual and audible annunciation. The annunciation system described above shall meet the following additional requirements. i) The annunciation system shall be capable of catering to all simultaneous signals at

a time. ii) One self resetting push button shall be provided on each panel for testing in fascia

window lamps. Push buttons for testing flasher and audible alarm circuit of annunciation supply failure· monitoring shall also be provided. These testing circuits shall be so connected that while test is being done it shall not prevent the registering of any new annunciation that may land during the test.

iii) One set each of the following push buttons shall be provided on each panel.

a) Reset push button for annunciation system;

b) Accept push button for annunciation system.

iv) The annunciation shall be repetitive type and shall be capable of registering the fleeting signal. For fault contacts which open on a fault, it shall be possible at site to change annunciators from "close to fault" and vice versa.

v) The annunciator shall be suitable for operation with normally open fault contacts which close on a fault. For fault contacts which open a fault, it shall be possible at site to change annunciators from "close to fault" and vice versa.

vi) Only electro-magnetic relay type alarm and annunciation relay schemes are acceptable and static type annunciation schemes are not acceptable. Contactors are not acceptable for annunciation system.

5.6.15 Switches

a) Control and Instrument switches shall be rotary operated type with escutcheon plates clearly marked to show operating position and circuit designation plates and suitable for flush mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle projecting out. Handles of different shapes and suitable inscriptions on switches aS per clause 6.8 shall be provided as on aid switch identification.

b) The selection of operation handles for the different types of switches shall be as follows:

1 Breaker & isolator switches Pistol grip, black

2 Selector switches Oval or knob, black

3 Instrument switches Round, knurled, black

4 Protecting transfer swich Pistol grip, locable & black

c) The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of spring return to neutral type. The spring return type shall be provided with target which shall indicate the last operation of the switch. The control springs shall be strong and robust enough to prevent inadvertent operation due to light touch. The spring return type switch shall have spring return from close and trip positions to "after close" and "after trip" positions respectively.

d) Instrument selection switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put) type. Ammeter selection switches shall make-before-break type contacts so as to prevent open circuiting of CT secondaries when changing the position of the switch. They shall be of 5 position type viz R-Y-B-N-Off. Voltmeter transfer switches for AC shall be suitable for reading all line-to-line and line-to neutral voltages for non-effectively earthed systems and for reading all line to line voltages for effectively earthed

111

systems . e) Lockable type of switches which can be locked in particular positions shall be

provided when specified. The key locks shall be fitted on the operating handles. f) The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap action to

minimize arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted and contact faces shall be with rivets of pure silver. Springs shall be used as current carrying parts.

g) The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to give completeness to the interlock and function of the scheme. The contact rating of the switches shall be as follows:

Contact Rating in Amps

110 V DC 240 V AC

a) Make and carry continuously 10 10

b) Make and carry for 0.5 Sec. 30 30

c) Break

i) Resistive load 3 7

ii) Inductive load with L/R= 40 0.2 7

5.6.16 Indicating Lamps a) Indicating lamps shall be panel mounting type with rear terminal connections. Lamps

shall be of LED type. Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers to diffuse light coloured red, green, amber, dear white or blue as specified. The lamp cover shall be of screwed type, un-breakable and moulded from heat resisting material. 20% of lamps actually used on the boards and 10% of the lamp bases of various colour actually used shall be supplied in excess to serve as spares.

b) The wattage and resistance of the lamps shall be as follows: 110 V -5 to 7 W - 1000 to 2000 Ohms

c) Bulbs and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the front of the panel. Tools, if required for replacing the bulbs and lenses shall also be included in the scope of supply.

d) The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.

5.6.17 Position Indicators a. Position indicators of 'SEMAPHORE' type shall be provided when specified as part of

the mimic diagrams on panels for indicating the position of circuit breakers, isolating/earthing switches etc. The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting with only the front disc projecting out and with terminal connection from the rear. Their strips shall be of the same colour as the associated mimic.

b. Position indicator shall be suitable for either AC or DC operation as specified. When the supervised object is in the closed position, the pointer of the indicator shall take up a position in line with the mimic bus bars, and at right angles to them when the object is in the open position. When the supply failure to the indicator occur the pointer shall take up an intermediate position to indicate the supply failure. The rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.

c. The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.

5.6.18 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays a) Trip circuit shall be supervised by means of relays. The scheme shall continuously

monitor each trip coil in both pre-close and after-close of the breaker. The scheme shall detect. i) Failure of DC supply to each trip coil. il) Open circuit of trip circuit wiring and iii) Failure of mechanism to complete the tripping operation.

b) Also 2 Nos. indicating lamps to act in conjunction with trip circuit supervision relays for healthy trip indication of 2 sets of trip coils shall be supplied.

c) Necessary external resistors for trip circuit supervision relays shall be supplied.

112

5.6.19 Flag Relays Shall Have i) Head reset flag indication ii) Two elements iii) Have necessary NO/NC contacts for each element/coil to meet scheme requirements.

5.6.20 Detailed Description of Protections

The protection, auxiliary relay and timers and other equipment that are required to be provided are included in the detailed equipment schedule of panels vide Annexure.-I of this specification The detailed description of Back up protection and the associated equipment is described below:

The setting ranges of relays given in specification are indicative. The setting ranges of the equipment offered, if different from the ones specified, shall also be acceptable if they met the functional requirements.

The bidder shall quote the protection equipment, meeting the following requirements.

The bidders may also quote for any alternative/additional protections or relays considered necessary by him for providing complete, effective and reliable protection. These equipment shall be quoted separately as an alternative/addition to the main offer stating the price separately. The acceptance or otherwise of this alternative/additional equipment shall be with the purchaser.

5.6.21 2.5/5 MVA, 33/11 KV,TRANSFORMER

a) Differential Protection It shall be / shall have

i) Triple pole high speed percentage biased differential type. ii) An operating time not more than 30 milli Secs. At 5 times operating current setting

of 20%. iii) Three instantaneous high set over current units iv) Second harmonic restraint feature and fifth harmonic by pass/restraint feature and

also be stable under normal over fluxing conditions. v) an operating current setting of 20% or less, vi) Suitable for rated current of 5A and 1 Ampere vii) Adjustable bias setting range of 20% to 50% viii) Two bias windings per phase ix) Stable on heavy through faults x) Include necessary separate interposing CTs for angle and ratio correction or have

internal features in the relay to take care of angle and ratio correction. xi) Shall be of numerical type.

b) Over current and earth fault protection 33 KV ,2.5/5 MV A transformer

The relay should be triple pole non-directional with IDMT characteristics. It should either be numeric or electromagnet type, however offer for Areva make Micom series of relay will be preferred.

c) Auxiliary relays for transformer protection devices

Auxiliary relay required for bucholtz trip and alarm, HV winding temperature trip & alarm, LV

winding temperature trip & alarm, oil temperature alarm & trip and low oil level alarm, PRV

trip, SF6 low alarm and lockout shall be provided. Each auxiliary relay shall have 2 pairs of

contacts and one hand reset flag indicators. The auxiliary relays may be of non-draw out

type

d) Inter Tripping Relays

1 No. inter trip relay to trip HV and LV breakers of the transformer and to isolate the

transformer from supply shall be supplied. The inter trip relay shall be of high speed and

shall be provided with hand reset operation indicator and 4 NO + 2 N/C hand reset contacts

for 33 KV breaker and 13 NO + 3 N/C hand reset contacts for 11 KV breaker.

113

The protection scheme shall function as follows:

a) Differential relays operated: both HV, and LV breakers trip.

b) OIC & E/F on HV operated: both H.V and LV breakers trip.

c) Buchholz Relay Operated: both H.\( & L.V. breakers trip.

d) Winding temperature trip contact closed: both HV & LV. breakers trip.

e) Oil temperature - alarm only.

f) PRV Operated: both H.\( & L.V. breakers trip.

5.6.22 Panels for 33 kV Feeders

Relay and Control panel for 33 KV Feeders

Following meters, relays etc shall be provided in the feeder panel, However. any other

items which are not specifically mentioned in this specification but are required to complete

the scheme and for satisfactory operation of scheme shall also be deemed to be included in

this specification.

1) PROTECTIVE RELAYS: Over current relay 2 Nos Earth fault relay 1 No

Relays for OIC and E/F protection shall I. be of numeric non-directional type II. be of triple pole type with two outer elements for O/C and the other for-E/F

protection be with IDMT characteristics with a definite minimum time of 3 sec at 10 times settings.

III. have a variable setting range of 50-200% for over current and 20-80% for earch fault. IV. be rated for 5/1 ampere V. include hand reset flag indicator

2) INSTRUMENTS AND METERS Following meters and instruments shall be provided in the panel:

a) One no. Ammeter Digital Type b) One no. Voltmeter Digital Type c) One no Watt meter of digital type d) Electronic Trivector meter ( as per specification)

3) CONTROLS Following control switches shall be provided in the panel:

a) One no., three position (i.e. trip-neutral-close) breaker control switch. b) One no. Ammeter- selector switch. c) Push button for trip circuit healthy indication. d) Selector switch for voltmeter

4) INDICATION AND ALARMS Following indicating arrangement shall be provided in the feeder panel:

a) Indicating lamps for CB ON/OFF positions 2 nos. b) Indicating lamp for TRIP CIRCUIT HEALTHY CONDITION 2 No c) Indicating lamp labeling Breaker Spring changed 1 No d) Indicating lamp for low SF6 1 No e) Indicating lamp for SF6 CB lockout 1 No f) Mimic diagram indicating the relevant position of the single Line diagram of the sub-station incorporating the semaphore Indicators for circuit breakers 1 No. Isolators 2 Nos.

and Earth switch 1 No.

g) Indicating lamp for Auto-trip indication with accept push button 1 No.

5) TEST TERMINAL BLOCKS

Sets of test terminal blocks for meters and relay as required shall be provided.

6) AUXILIARY SUPPLY

Auxiliary supplies which shall be made available in substation are as follows:

114

a) A.C. supply 415 V/240 volts, 50Hz three/single phase

b) D.C. supply: 110 Volts

5.6.23 A common Annunciation scheme shall all be provided for AC/DC failure as per the clause.

5.6.24 The related circuit breaker shall be of SF6 type.

The tenderer should note the above while tendering. Any other required information

shall be intimated to the successful tenderer in due course.

Panels shall be supplied complete with auxiliary relays; wirings etc to complete the HV

and LV inter-tripping scheme as mentioned in (a) to (d) above. Wirings shall be done

up to the terminal blocks inside the panel and all such inter tripping terminals shall be

clearly marked in the drawing.

5.6.25 INSPECTION

Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third

party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and

acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the

supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and

shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

115

66..1144 TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN FFOORR 3333kkVV && 1111kkVV SSUURRGGEE AARRRREESSTTOORRSS 8.1.0. SCOPE

8.1.1. This Section covers the specifications for design, manufacture, shop &

laboratory testing before despatch of 33 kV and 11 kV 10 kA, Station class heavy

duty, gapless metal (zinc) oxide Surge Arrestors complete with fittings &

accessories.

8.2.0. STANDARDS

8.2.1. The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply

with IS: 3070( Part-3 )/1993 unless otherwise specifically specified in this Specification

8.3.0. GENERAL REQUIREMENT

8.3.1. The surge arrestor shall draw negligible current at operating voltage and at the same

time offer least resistance during the flow of surge current.

8.3.2. The surge arrestor shall consist of non-linear resistor elements placed in series and

housed in electrical grade porcelain housing/silicon polymeric of specified creepage

distance.

8.3.3. The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with suitable rubber gaskets with effective

sealing system arrangement to prevent ingress of moisture.

8.3.4. The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of suitable size. The

ground side terminal of surge arrestor shall be connected with 25x6 mm galvanized

strip, one end connected to the surge arrestor and second end to a separate ground

electrode. The bidder shall also recommend the procedure which shall be followed in

providing the earthing/system to the Surge Arrestor.

8.3.5. The surge arrestor shall not operate under power frequency and temporary over

voltage conditions but under surge conditions, the surge arrestor shall change over to

the conducting mode.

8.3.6. The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuit breaker performing 0-0.3sec.-CO-3min-

CO- duty in the system.

8.3.7. Surge arrestors shall have a suitable pressure relief system to avoid damage to the

porcelain/ silicon polymeric housing and providing path for flow of rated fault currents in

the event of arrestor failure.

8.3.8. The reference current of the arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage.

8.3.9. The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and the bidder shall furnish a copy of thermal stability test with the bid.

8.3.10. The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminal energy for high surges, external pollution and transient over voltage and have low losses at operating voltages.

8.4.0. ARRESTOR HOUSING 8.4.1. The arrestor housing shall be made up of silicon polymeric housing and shall be

homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws of imperfections that might affect the mechanical and dielectric quality. The housing shall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects.

Arrestors shall be complete with insulating bases, surge counters with leakage current meters (33 KV LA) and terminal connectors.

8.4.2. The housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not occur due

to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage up to the maximum design

value for arrestor. The arrestors shall not fail due to contamination. The arrester housings

shall be designed for pressure relief class as given in Technical Parameters of the

specification.

8.4.3. Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.

116

8.5.0. FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

8.5.1. The surge arrestor shall be complete with insulating bases, surge counters with leakage

current meters (for 33 KV LA) and terminal connectors.

8.5.2. The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosion proof, robust and of adequate size and

shall be so located that incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum

possible bends. The top metal cap and base of surge arrestor shall be galvanized. The

line terminal shall have a built in clamping device which can be adjusted for both

horizontal and vertical takeoff.

8.6.0. SURGE MONITOR

8.6.1. A self-contained discharge counter suitably enclosed for outdoor use and requiring no

auxiliary or battery supply for operation shall be provided for each single pole unit.

Leakage current meter with suitable scale range to measure leakage current of surge

arrestor shall also be supplied within the same enclosure. The number of operations

performed by the arrestor shall be recorded by a suitable cyclometric counter and surge

monitor shall be provided with an inspection window. There shall be a provision for

putting ammeter to record the current/alarm contacts in the control room if the leakage

current exceeds the permitted value. Similar provision shall be considered for surge

counter also.

8.6.2. Surge monitor shall be mounted on the support structure at a suitable height so that the

reading can be taken from ground level through the inspection window and length of

connecting leads up to grounding point and bends are minimum.

8.6.3. Surge monitor shall have to be provided for 33 KV class only.

8.7.0. TESTS

8.7.1. Test on Surge Arrestors

The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 3070 (Part-3). In addition, the suitability of the Surge Arrestors shall also be established for the following:

- Residual voltage test - Reference voltage test - Leakage current at M.C.O.V - P.D. test - Sealing test - Thermal stability test - Aging and Energy capability test - Watt loss test

Each metal oxide block shall be tested for guaranteed specific energy capability in addition to routine/acceptance test as per IEC/IS.

8.7.2. The surge arrestor housing shall also be type tested and shall be subjected to routine

and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 2071.

8.7.3. Galvanization Test

All Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric condition shall have passed the type tests and be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 2633 & IS 6745.

8.8.0. NAME PLATE

8.8.1. The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry the following information:

Rated Voltage Continuous Operation Voltage Normal discharge current

Pressure relief rated current Manufacturers Trade Mark Name of Sub-station Year of Manufacturer

Name of the manufacture Purchase Order Number along with date

117

8.9.0. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS

8.9.1. Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor

shall also perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field

instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer.

The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with

calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval.

1. Operation check of LA counters.

2. Insulation resistance measurement.

3. Capacitance and Tan delta measurement of individual stacks.

4. Third harmonic resistive current measurement (to be conducted after energisation.)

8.10.0. TYPE AND RATINGS

SL No.

Particulars Voltage class

33 kV 11 kV

1 Rated voltage of arrester, kV 30 9

2 Rated frequency, Hz 50 50

3 Nominal discharge current of arrester, kA 10 10

4 Maximum residual voltage at nominal discharge current, kV (peak)

108 40

5 Maximum steep current impulse residual voltage at kV (kVP)

130 50

6 One minute power frequency withstand voltage of arrester insulation, kV (rms)

70 28

7 1.2 / 50 second impulse withstand voltage of arrester insulation, kV (peak)

170 95

9 Line discharge class 2 2

10 Insulator Housing

a) Power frequency withstand test voltage

(wet) (kV rms) 70 28

b) Lightning impulse withstand tests

voltage(KVp) 170 95

c) Pressure Relief Class 40 40

d) Creepage distance not less than (mm) 900 400

118

66..1155 TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN FFOORR 3333KKVV && 1111 KKVV IISSOOLLAATTOORRSS

7.1.0. SCOPE

7.1.1. This section of the specification is intended to cover design specifications for manufacture and testing of 33 KV (800A) and 11 KV (630A) gang operated switch (Isolators) with all fittings and accessories.

7.1.2. The Isolators are for outdoor installation suitable for horizontal/vertical mounting on mounting structures and for use at sub-stations.

7.1.3. Isolators shall be supplied with Earth Switch as and where specified.

7.2.0. GENERAL

7.2.1. The Isolators and accessories shall conform in general to IS 9921 (or IEC: 62271-102) except to the extent explicitly modified in specification.

7.2.2. All isolating switches and earthing switches shall have rotating blades and pressure

releasing contacts. All isolating and earth switches shall operate through 90 angle from closed position to fully open position.

7.2.3. Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied including but not limited to the following: (i). Isolator assembled with complete base frame, linkages, operating mechanism, control

cabinet, interlocks etc. (ii). All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable isolator installation, control

parts and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not. (iii). The isolator shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological conditions

as given in Section 1.

7.3.0. DUTY REQUIREMENTS

7.3.1. Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their closed position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under influence of short circuit current.

7.3.2. The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that the earth switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating mechanism.

7.3.3. In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of failsafe type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and within a variation range as stipulated elsewhere in this specification.

7.3.4. The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the associated lines.

7.3.5. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of make/break operation.

7.3.6. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking magnetising current of 0.7A at 0.15 power factor and capacitive current of 0.7A at 0.15 power factor at rated voltage.

7.4.0. CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS

7.4.1. All isolating switches and earthing switches shall have rotating blades and pressure

releasing contacts. All isolating and earth switches shall operate through 90 angle from closed position to fully open position.

7.4.2. Contacts: a) The contacts shall be self-aligning and self-cleaning and so designed that binding

cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in a heavily polluted atmosphere.

b) No undue wear or scuffing shall be evident during the mechanical endurance tests. Contacts and spring shall be designed so that readjustments in contact pressure shall not be necessary throughout the life of the isolator or earthing switch. Each contact or pair of contacts shall be independently sprung so that full pressure is maintained on all contacts at all time.

c) Contact springs shall not carry any current and shall not lose their characteristics due to heating effects.

119

d) The moving contact of double break isolator shall have turn-and -twist type or other suitable type of locking arrangement to ensure adequate contact pressure.

7.4.3. Blades: a) All metal parts shall be of non-rusting and non-corroding material. All current carrying

parts shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic copper/aluminium. Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent locking facilities if provided on current carrying parts, shall be made of copper silicon alloy or stainless steel or equivalent. The bolts or pins used in current carrying parts shall be made of non-corroding material. All ferrous castings except current carrying parts shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast-steel. No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of the isolator.

b) The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and other corona producing surfaces, where this is impracticable adequate corona shield shall be provided..

c) Isolators and earthing switches including their operating parts shall be such that they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by short circuit forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks, or accidental touching of the connecting rods of the operating mechanism.

d) The switch shall be designed such that no lubrication of any part is required except at very infrequent intervals i.e. after every 1000 operations or after 5 years whichever is earlier.

7.4.4. Insulators: a) The insulator shall conform to IS: 2544 and/or IEC-60168. The insulators shall have a

minimum cantilever strength of 400 Kgs. for 33/11 kV insulators respectively. b) Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the insulators after the main

blades are fully closed.

7.4.5. Base: Each isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base provided with holes and designed for mounting on a supporting structure.

7.5.0. EARTHING SWITCHES

7.5.1. Where earthing switches are specified these shall include the complete operating mechanism and auxiliary contacts.

7.5.2. The earthing switches shall form an integral part of the isolator and shall be mounted on the base frame of the isolator.

7.5.3. The earthing switches shall be constructionally interlocked with the isolator so that the earthing switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical interlocks. Suitable mechanical arrangement shall be provided for de-linking electrical drive for mechanical operation.

7.5.4. Each earth switch shall be provided with flexible copper/aluminum braids for connection to earth terminal. These braids shall have the same short time current carrying capacity as the earth blade. The transfer of fault current through swivel connection will not be accepted.

7.5.5. The frame of each isolator and earthing switches shall be provided with two reliable earth terminals for connection to the earth mat.

7.5.6. Isolator design shall be such as to permit addition of earth switches at a future date. It should be possible to interchange position of earth switch to either side.

7.5.7. The earth switch should be able to carry the same fault current as the main blades of the Isolators and shall withstand dynamic stresses.

7.6.0. OPERATING MECHANISM

7.6.1. The bidder shall offer manual operated Isolators and earth switches..

7.6.2. Control cabinet/operating mechanism box shall be made of aluminum sheet of adequate thickness (minimum 3 mm).

7.6.3. Gear should be of forged material suitably chosen to avoid bending/jamming on operation after a prolonged period of non-operation. Also all gear and connected material should be so chosen/surface treated to avoid rusting.

7.7.0. OPERATION

7.7.1. The main Isolator and earth switches shall be gang operated.

120

7.7.2. The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service conditions. All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed for negligible deflection. The length of inter insulator and interpole operating rods shall be capable of adjustments, by means of screw thread which can be locked with a lock nut after an adjustment has been made. The isolator and earth switches shall be provided with “over center” device in the operating mechanism to prevent accidental opening by wind, vibration, short circuit forces or movement of the support structures.

7.7.3. Each isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a manual operating handle enabling one man to open or close the isolator with ease in one movement while standing at ground level. Detachable type manual operating handle shall be provided. Suitable provision shall be made inside the operating mechanism box for parking the detached handles. The provision of manual operation shall be located at a height of 1000 mm from the base of isolator support structure.

7.7.4. The isolator shall be provided with positive continuous control throughout the entire cycle of operation. The operating pipes and rods shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain positive control under the most adverse conditions and when operated in tension or compression for isolator closing. They shall also be capable of withstanding all torsional and bending stresses due to operation of the isolator. Wherever supported the operating rods shall be provided with bearings on either ends. The operating rods/ pipes shall be provided with suitable universal couplings to account for any angular misalignment.

7.7.5. All rotating parts shall be provided with grease packed roller or ball bearings in sealed housings designed to prevent the ingress of moisture, dirt or other foreign matter. Bearings pressure shall be kept low to ensure long life and ease of operation. Locking pins wherever used shall be rustproof.

7.7.6. Signaling of closed position shall not take place unless it is certain that the movable contacts, have reached a position in which rated normal current, peak withstand current and short time withstand current can be carried safely. Signaling of open position shall not take place unless movable contacts have reached a position such that clearance between contacts is atleast 80% of the isolating distance.

7.7.7. The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each of the Isolators and earthing switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at the lower end of the vertical rod of shaft for the Isolators and earthing switch. The indicator shall be of metal and shall be visible from operating level.

7.7.8. The contractor shall furnish the following details along with quality norms, during detailed engineering stage. (i) Current transfer arrangement from main blades of isolator along with millivolt drop

immediately across transfer point. (ii) Details to demonstrate smooth transfer of rotary motion from motor shaft to the

insulator along with stoppers to prevent over travel.

7.8.0. TEST AND INSPECTION

7.8.1. The switches shall be subjected to the following type test in accordance to with IS: 9920. I) Dielectric test (impulse and one minute) power frequency withstands voltage. II) Temperature rise test III) Rated off load breaking current capacity IV) Rated active load breaking capacity V) Rated line charging breaking capacity VI) Rated short time current VII) Rated peak withstand current VIII) Mechanical and Electrical Endurance

7.8.2. The equipment shall be subjected to the following routine test. I) Power frequency voltage dry test II) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit III) Operating test.

7.8.3. The porcelain will have pull out test for embedded component and beam strength of porcelain base.

7.9.0. CONNECTORS

7.9.1. Each isolator shall be provided with appropriate number of bimetallic clamping type connectors as detailed in the schedule of requirement. The maximum length of jumper that

121

may be safely connected or any special instruction considered necessary to avoid under loads on the post isolators should be stated by the tenderer.

7.10.0. SUPPORTING STRUCTURES

7.10.1. All isolators and earthing switches shall be rigidly mounted in an upright position on their own supporting structures. Details of the supporting structures shall be furnished by the successful tenderer. The isolators should have requisite fixing details ready for mounting them on switch structures.

7.11.0. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS

7.11.1. Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor shall also perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval.

(a) Insulation resistance of each pole. (b) Manual operation and interlocks. (c) Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors. (d) Ground connections. (e) Contact resistance. (f) Proper alignment so as to minimise to the extreme possible the vibration during

operation. (g) Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch. (h) Resistance of operating and interlocks coils. (i) Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical interlocks. (j) 50 operations test on isolator and earth switch.

7.12.0. TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR ISOLATORS

SL No.

Technical Particulars Isolators class

33 kV 11kV

1 Nominal system voltage, kV 33 11

2 Highest system voltage, kV 36 12

3 Rated frequency, Hz. 50 50

4. Type of Isolator Double Break, center pole rotating

Double Break, center pole rotating

5 Rated continuous current, A 800 1250

6 Rated short time current, kA 16 12.5

7 Rated duration of short time current, Second

3 3

8 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage, kV (peak) i) To earth & between poles ii) Across isolating distance

170 195

75 85

9 Rated 1 minute power frequency withstand voltage, kV (rms) i) To earth & between poles ii) Across isolating distance

70 80

28 32

10 Minimum creepage distance of insulators, mm

900

400

11 Temperature rise As per relevant IS

122

6.16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF OUTDOOR CURRENT AND POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS

5.1.0. SCOPE OF CONTRACT

5.1.1. This Section of the Specification covers general requirements for design, engineering, manufacture, assembly and testing at manufacturer’s works of 33kV and 11 kV outdoor Current and Potential Transformers.

5.2.0. STANDARDS 5.2.1. The equipment covered by this specification shall, unless otherwise stated be designed,

constructed and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of relevant Indian Standards and shall conform to the regulations of local statutory authorities.

5.2.2. In case of any conflict between the Standards and this specification, this specification shall govern.

5.2.3. The current transformer shall comply also with the latest issue of the following Indian standard.

(i) IS: 2705(Part-I) Current transformers: General requirement. (ii) IS: 2705(Part-II) Current transformers : Measuring Current transformers (iii) IS: 2705(Part-III) Current transformers : Protective Current transformers (iv) IS: 2705(Part-IV) Current transformers: Protective Current transformers for

special purpose application. (v) IS: 3156(Part-I) Potential transformers: General requirement. (vi) IS: 3156 (Part-II) Potential transformers : Measuring Potential transformers (vii) IS: 3156 (Part-III) Potential transformers : Protective Potential transformers

5.3.0. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5.3.1. The cores of the instrument transformers shall be of high grade, non-aging CRC steel of low

hysteresis loss and high permeability. 5.3.2. Instrument transformers shall be of Dead Tank design or Live Tank design. 5.3.3. The instrument transformers shall be truly hermetically sealed polycrete type 5.3.4. A complete leak proof secondary terminal arrangement shall be provided with each

instrument transformers, secondary terminal shall be brought into weather, dust and vermin proof terminal box. Secondary terminal boxes shall be provided with facilities for easy earthing, shorting, insulating and testing of secondary circuits. The terminal boxes shall be suitable for connection of control cable gland.

5.3.5. All instrument transformers shall be of single phase unit. 5.3.6. The instrument transformers shall be so designed to withstand the effects of temperature,

wind load, short circuit conditions and other adverse conditions. 5.3.7. All similar parts, particularly removable ones, shall be interchangeable with one another. 5.3.8. All cable ferrules, lugs, tags, etc. required for identification and cabling shall be supplied

complete for speedy erection and commissioning as per approved schematics. 5.3.9. The instrument transformers shall be designed to ensure that condensation of moisture is

controlled by proper selection of organic insulating materials having low moisture absorbing characteristics.

5.3.10. All steel work shall be degreased, pickled and phosphated and then applied with two coats of Zinc Chromate primer and two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint.

5.4.0. COMMON MARSHALLING BOXES 5.4.1. The outdoor type common marshalling boxes shall conform to the latest edition of IS 5039

and other general requirements specified hereunder. 5.4.2. The common marshalling boxes shall be suitable for mounting on the steel mounting

structures of the instrument transformers. 5.4.3. One common marshalling box shall be supplied with each set of instrument transformers.

The marshalling box shall be made of sheet steel and weather proof. The thickness of sheet steel used shall be not less than 3.0 mm. It is intended to bring all the secondary terminals to the common marshalling.

5.4.4. The enclosures of the common marshalling boxes shall provide a degree of protection of not less than IP 55 (As per IS 2147).

5.4.5. The common marshalling boxes shall be provided with double hinged front doors with pad locking arrangement. All doors and removable covers and plates shall be sealed all around with neoprene gaskets or similar arrangement.

123

5.4.6. Each marshalling box shall be fitted with terminal blocks made out of moulded non-inflammable plastic materials and having adequate number of terminals with binding screws washers etc. Secondary terminals of the instrument transformers shall be connected to the respective common marshalling boxes. All out going terminals of each instrument transformer shall terminate on the terminal blocks of the common marshalling boxes. The terminal blocks shall be arranged to provide maximum accessibility to all conductor terminals.

5.4.7. Each terminal shall be suitably marked with identification numbers. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal. At least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided over and above the required number.

5.4.8. All terminal strips shall be of isolating type terminals and they will be of minimum 10 A continuous current rating.

5.4.9. All cable entries shall be from bottom. Suitable removable gland plate shall be provided on the box for this purpose. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied fitted on to this gland plate. Cable glands shall be screw on type and made of brass.

5.4.10. Each common marshalling box shall be provided with two numbers of earthing terminals of galvanised bolt and nut type.

5.4.11. All steel, inside and outside work shall be degreased, pickled and phosphated and then applied with two coats of Zinc Chromate primer and two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint. The colour of finishing paint shall be as follows: -

i) Inside: Glossy White ii) Outside: Light Grey (Shade No. 697 of IS: 5)

5.5.0. TESTS 5.5.1. Routine/Acceptance Tests (all units)

All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standards. All routine/acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Employer/his authorised representative.

5.5.2. Type Tests: The bidder shall furnish type test certificates and results for the all tests as per relevant Standards along with the bid for current and potential transformers of identical design. Type test certificates so furnished shall not be older than 5 (five) years as on date of Bid opening.

5.6.0. NAME PLATES 5.6.1. All equipment shall have non-corrosive name plates fix at a suitable position indelibly mark

with full particular there on in accordance with the standard adapted. 5.7.0. MOUNTING STRUCTURES 5.7.1. All the equipment covered under this specification shall be suitable for mounting on steel

structures. Supply of mounting structures is also in the scope of this tender. 5.7.2. Each equipment shall be furnished complete with base plates, clamps, and washers etc.

and other hardware ready for mounting on existing steel structures. 5.8.0. SAFETY EARTHING 5.8.1. The non-current carrying metallic parts and equipment shall be connected to station

earthing grid. For this two terminals suitable for 40mm X 10mm GI strip shall be provided on each equipment.

5.9.0. TERMINAL CONNECTORS 5.9.1. The equipment shall be supplied with required number of terminal connectors of approved

type suitable for ACSR/XLPE cable. The type of terminal connector, size of connector, material, and type of installation shall be approved by the Employer, as per installation requirement while approving the equipment drawings.

5.10.0. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS 5.10.1. Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor shall also

perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval. (a) Current Transformers

(i) Insulation Resistance Test for primary and secondary. (ii) Polarity test. (iii) Ratio identification test - checking of all ratios on all cores by primary injection of

current. (iv) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable).

124

(v) Magnetising characteristics test. (vi) Tan delta and capacitance measurement (vii) Secondary winding resistance measurement (viii) Contact resistance measurement (wherever possible/accessible).

(b) Potential Transformers (i) Insulation Resistance test for primary (if applicable) and secondary winding. (ii) Polarity test. (iii) Ratio test (iv) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable). (v) Tan delta and capacitance measurement of individual capacitor stacks. (vi) Secondary winding resistance measurement.

5.11.0. TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR CURRENT AND POTENTIALTRANSFORMERS 5.11.1. For 33 kV/11kV CTs the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than 2.5 for

metering core. 5.11.2. TYPE AND RATING:

All instrument transformer shall be outdoor type, single phase, polycrete type suitable for mounting on steel structure. The instrument transformer shall have the following ratings and particulars.

SL No.

Item Ratings and Particulars

33 KV 11 KV

A Nominal system voltage 33 kV 11 kV

B Highest system voltage, kV 36 12

C Rated frequency ,HZ 50 50

D System earthing Solidly earth Solidly earth

E Insulation level

a) Impulse withstand voltage: kVp 170 70

b) One minute p.f. Withstand voltage, kV (r.m.s.) 70 28

F Short time current for one second, kA 16 12.5

G Minimum creepage distance, mm 900 360

H Temperature rise As per ISS As per ISS

J TRANFORMER C.T.

(i) No. of Cores 2 2

(ii) Transformation ratio 200-100/5-5-5A 300-150/5-5-5A

(iii) Rated out put

(a) Core-1 30 VA 30 VA

(b) Core-2 NA NA

(iv) Accuracy class

(a) Core-1 0.5 0.5

(b) Core-2 PS PS

(v) Accuracy limit factor

(a) Core-1 - -

(b) Core-2 - -

(v) Instrument security factor

(a) Core-1 Less than 2.5 Less than 2.5

(b) Core-2 - -

(v) Minimum Knee point voltage, Volts

(a) Core-1 - -

(b) Core-2 400 200

(v) Maximum secondary resistance, ohm

(a) Core-1 - -

(b) Core-2 1.0 1.0

(vi) Maximum exciting current, at Vk/4 mA

125

SL No.

Item Ratings and Particulars

33 KV 11 KV

(a) Core-1 - -

(b) Core-2 30 15

K

NEUTRAL CT (i) No. of Cores (ii) Transformation ratio (i) Accuracy class (ii) Min. Knee point voltage (iii) Maximum CT Resistance (iv) Maximum magnetization current at

Vk/4 LINE CT (i) No. of Cores (ii) Transformation ratio (iii) Accuracy class (i) Out put burden (ii) Instrument Security Factor POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER

- - - - - - 1

200-400/5-5A 0.5

15 VA < 2. 5

1

300-150/5-5 PS 200 1.0

15mA 1

100-200/5-5A 0.5

15 VA < 2.55

(i) No. of secondary windings 1 1

(ii) Transformation ratio

33kV/√3 /110V/√3

11kV/√3 /110V/√3

(iii) Rated out put 100 100

(vi) Accuracy class 0.5 05

(v) Rated voltage factor 1.4 1.4

Note:

(i) It is intended to use different ratios of the same CT at the same time for differential protections and metering cores. The CTS should therefore be suitable for the above purpose by secondary tapings only. The ratio change by secondary taps is acceptable as long as the required CT specifications are achieved at all ratios.

(ii) The knee point voltage specified above shall be at higher ratio/ taps.

126

6.17 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF BATTERY BANK AND CHARGER

1.0 SCOPE This Section of the Specification covers the design, manufacture, and testing at manufacturer’s work, of stationary type sealed, Valve Regulated Lead Acid Battery Bank, Battery Charger, DC Distribution Boards and LTAC Panels complete with all required accessories for various Sub-stations.

2.0 BATTERY BANK 2.1 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF BATTERY BANK

1. Battery Rating 110 V-100 Ah to 1.75 ECV at C10 at 27⁰ C

2. Type of battery Maintenance free valve regulated lead acid (MF-VRLA) battery

3. Battery specification

Batteries conforms to IS 15549:2005 Also conforms to International Standards (I) IEEE 1188 and 1189 (II) BS6290 Part 4/ IEC 896

4. Manufacturers cell designation F 100 P

5. No of Cells 55 Nos.

6. Cycle life of Battery @ 27⁰ C

2000 cycles for 50 % depth of discharge or 1200 cycles for 80 % depth of discharge

7. All efficiency Above 90%

8. WH Efficiency Above 80 %

9. Self discharge/ Week < 1% of rated capacity

10. Max, allowable ambient temp at which cell can safely operate

55⁰ C continuously and 70⁰ C short time

11. Overall dimension of each cell (107.8 x 198.5 x 477)mm approx.

12. Overall weight of each cell 27 kg approx.

13. Recommended Max period of storage 6 months from the date of manufacturing and the

batteries shall be stored in covered area at 27⁰ C

14. Material of container Polypropylene co-polymer

15. Type of separator Highly absorbent micro porous spun glass matrix (AGM)

16. Type of +ve & -ve plates Flat pasted

17. Material of rack Mild steel coated with acid resistance paint

18. Method of connection between cells Bolted

19. Recommended float charge

Batteries shall be charged in constant potential mode with current limit Voltage: 2.23-2.25 Volts per cell Current: Recommended- charging current is 45 amps

20. Recommended boost charge Voltage: 2.3 Volts per cell Current: Recommended- charging current is 45 to 90 amps

21. Time required for boost charge from fully discharged condition at 27⁰ C

9 Hrs for 90 % state of charge (or)

24 hrs for 100 % state of charge

22. Voltage ripple allowable < 2% of the RMS value

23. Type of connectors Lead coated heavy duty copper strips

127

2.1.1 PLATES Positive plates shall be made of flat pasted type using lead-cadmium antimony alloy for durability, high corrosion resistant, maintenance free, long life both in cyclic as well as in ,float applications. Negative plates shall be heavy duty, durable flat plate using lead calcium alloy pasted box grid. Negative plates shall be designed to match the life of positive plates and combination of negative and positive plates shall ensure long life, durability and trouble free operation of battery. PLC operated equipment should be deployed for preparation of paste to ensure consistency in paste quality. Conventional / manual type of paste preparation is not allowed.

2.1.2 CONTAINER AND LID

The containers and lids shall be made of a special grade polypropylene copolymer plastic material. They shall be sufficiently robust and not liable lo deformation under internal operating pressures and within the temperature range naturally encountered, leak proof, non-absorbent and resistant to the acid with low water vapour permeability.

2.1.3 VENT PLUGS :

Each cell shall be equipped with one-way safety valve with opening pressure of 5±1 psi and closing pressure 4±1 psi. The vent plug shall be made with suitable grade of fire retardant plastic material. Each valve opening shall be covered with flame barrier capable in preventing the ingress of flame into the cell interior when the valve opens and hydrogen / oxygen gas mixture is released.

2.1.4 SEPARATORS :

Separator shall be made of spun glass, micro porous matrix and shall be resistant to Sulphuric Acid. It shall be capable of keeping the entire electrolyte and shall be electrically insulated. Sufficient separator overlap and PVC shield protection to top and bottom edges of the plates is to be provided to prevent short circuit formation between the edges of adjacent plates.

2.1.5 CONNECTORS :

The connectors shall be lead coated copper of suitable size to join the cells. The connectors shall be suitably designed and coated to withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid. The coating should be adequate and tenacious. All the copper inter cell connectors shall be provided with heal shrinkable sleeves except at the connecting points.

2.1.6 ELECTROLYTE: The electrolyte shall be prepared from the battery grade Sulphuric Acid confirming to ISS: 266. The batteries shall be supplied in factory filled and charged condition.

2.1.7 WATER Water required for preparation of electrolyte shall conform to IS: I069.

2.1.8 PLATE CONNECTION Lugs of plates of like polarity shall be connected by lead burning to a horizontal strap having an upstanding terminal post adopted for connection to external circuit. Strap and post shall be caste with lead alloy. The positive and negative terminal posts shall be clearly marked for unmistakable identification.

2.1.9 BOLTS AND NUTS Nuts and Bolts for connecting the cells shall be of superior grade passivated Stainless steel.

2.1.10 TERMINALS Terminals shall be of integral lead terminal with solid copper core with M6 threading for fastening. The junction between terminal posts and cover and between the cover and container shall be hermetically sealed.

128

2.1.11 BATTERY RACKS Batteries shall be installed on MS racks to be supplied by the Contractor to fit in the battery room. Racks/Trays shall be powder coated with anti corrosive paint. Rack shall accommodate 55 cells plus 2 spares. Racks/Tray shall be suitably treated before painting for protection against fungus growth and other harmful effects due to tropical environment. The colour of the supporting racks shall conform to RAL 7032 shade.

2.2 BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENTS

2.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The battery charging equipment shall be capable of giving two rate of charging currents namely Boost Charge and Trickle Charge. The charging equipments capable of giving two rate of charging currents shall consist of two separate sections: Boost Charger Section & Trickle Charger Section. The Trickle Charger Section along with all necessary equipments is required for the purpose of float charging one battery bank of 55 cells of capacity 150 Ah at 10 hours discharge rate at the rate of 2.0 volts to 2.3 volts per cell and for meeting a constant D.C. load of 10 Amperes at 110 Volts D.C. simultaneously. The Boost Charger Section along with all necessary equipments is required to charge a battery bank of 55 cells of capacity 150 Ah at 10 hours discharge rate at the rate of 1.85 volts to 2.55 volts per cell and for meeting a constant D.C. load of 10 Amperes simultaneously.

2.2.2 TYPE AND RATING i) TYPE The charger shall be static type, using Silicon Rectifiers. The rectifiers shall be arranged in three phase bridge circuit for full wave rectification. The charger unit shall be suitable for operation on 415 volts three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz A.C. Supply. The Boost and Trickle Charger section shall have an arrangement for automatic and manual D.C. voltage regulating system with an Auto / Manual change over switch. ii). RATING The entire charger circuitry shall have two separate sections eg. Boast charger and Trickle charger sections and shall of following ratings:

2.2.2.1 Float Charger (a) D.C. Output Voltage: (i) The D.C. output voltage of the Float charger shall be 110 volts

(nominal). (ii) The D.C. output voltage of the Float charger shall be adjustable between 110 volts to 126.5 volts.

(b) D.C. Output Current: (i) The Trickle charger shall be capable of supplying a continuous D.C. load of 10 amperes and float a battery bank of 150 Ah at 10 hours discharge rate simultaneously at a normal voltage of 110 volts D.C.

2.2.2.2 Boost charger:

(a) The D.C. output voltage of the Boost charger section shall be adjustable between 101 volts to 140 volts.

(b) D.C. Output Current: The Quick charger shall be capable of charging a battery bank of 150 Ah capacity at 10 hours discharge rate and to meet a continuous D.C. load of 5 amperes simultaneously. Output current of the Boost charger shall not be less than about 20 Amperes.

2.2.3 OPERATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:

The incoming A.C. supply for Quick and Trickle charger shall be controlled by rotary switches. In addition to the rotary switches supplies to the both chargers shall be controlled by two push button operated contractors having overload protection. ‘RED’ & ‘GREEN’ indicating lamps shall be provided to indicate ‘ON’ & ‘OFF’ conditions respectively of the Quick and Float charges in addition to the A.C. ‘ON’ indication.

129

During normal operation of the Trickle charger shall supply the normal direct current requirements of the substation and the station battery shall be floating on D.C. system. In the event of failure of A.C. supply or failure of the charger itself the battery shall come automatically across the load without any interruption. It is intended to supply the D.C. load of the equipment normally by the float charger during boost charging of the bank. Thus, when the Boost charger is switched ‘ON’ the Boost charger and the battery bank shall be isolated from the float charger and the load automatically. If during boost charging operation, the A.C. supply fails, the battery shall come automatically across the load without any interruption. During the infinitely small time required for initiation of the contractor a reduced number of cells shall be available across the load, through the blocking diode. Provision shall also be made so that in the event of failure of Float Charger, the Boost charger shall supply the load as well as charging a battery bank. Arrangement shall be made to limit the voltages across the load to around 110 volts, even if the boost charger is operating at maximum charging voltage. This aspect shall be clearly brought out in the tender by the bidder. In this operation also, the battery bank should come across the load automatically and without any interruption in the event of A.C. mains failure.

2.2.4 VOLTAGE REGULATING SYSTEM

The Float and Boost Charger sections shall have suitable arrangement for regulation of D.C. output voltage by the following methods.

(a) Automatic Voltage Regulation. (b) Manual Voltage Regulation.

(a) Automatic Voltage Regulation: The Automatic Voltage Regulation shall hold the voltage flat from zero to full load within ±1% of pre-set value of the charger with a fluctuation of ±10% in voltage and ±5% in frequency in the A.C. input voltage. The setting device of the automatic voltage regulator shall be so designed that the D.C. output voltage can be set anywhere between (i) 100 volts to 126.5 volts for Float Charger and (ii) 100 volts to 140 volts for Boost Charger. The automatic voltage regulator shall be static type and its characteristics shall be supplied with the tender. (b) Manual Voltage Regulator: The Manual Voltage Regulator for Trickle charger shall have suitable equipments and means to control the D.C. output voltage with the ranges mentioned earlier. The voltage control shall be smooth and continuous. The charger shall have a change over switch for selecting ‘Auto’ or ‘Manual’ mode of regulation to regulate the D.C. voltage. The tenderer shall furnish all the details of the manual voltage regulator in the tender. Both the trickle and boost chargers shall be provided with alarm and indication for the following:

(a) Mains on (b) Charger failed. (c) Rectifier element fuse blown. (d) Charger output fuse blown. (e) AC input failed

In addition to the above arrangement for controlling, regulating and operation of the charger, the bidder may suggest and quote suitable alternative arrangement for the same. The right of acceptance of such an arrangement shall however, lie with the Employer.

2.2.5 INSTRUMENTS, EQUIPMENTS, ETC

i) Rectifier Transformer The rectifier transformers shall be designed to operate at a frequency of 50 Hz and at the r.m.s. voltage between the lines on the line side of transformers of 415+10% volts. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall correspond to the rating of the associated rectifier

130

assembly. The transformer should preferably be air cooled dry / synthetic oil filled type and shall conform to the latest issues of IS: 2026 and IS: 4540.

ii) Rectifier Elements Rectifier elements shall be Silicon and shall be arranged in three bridge circuit. The rectifier elements shall be protected by HRC fuse with fuse blow out indication. The rectifier stacks shall be supplied with their own heat dissipating arrangement for natural air cooling.

iii) Measuring Instruments: The instruments shall be flush type and shall have dust proof and moisture resistant enclosed cases, finished in black and suitable for tropical use. Elements shall be shock resistant and shielded from external magnetic fields. The instruments and meters shall have easy accessible means for calibration testing and adjustment and shall conform to relevant I.S.S.

iv) Air Break Switches and Fuses: The series combination air break rotary switches and HRC fuses shall conform to provisions of the latest issue of IS-4064, IS-4047 and IS-2208. the air break switches and fuses housed in the charger panel shall be so arranged that when they are opened, the terminals are readily accessible. Switches shall be of rotary operated type preferably with silver to silver contacts of adequate making, carrying and breaking current ratings and shall open and close with snap action to minimise arcing. The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ positions of the switches shall be definite and shall be clearly indicated. All fuses shall be of HRC type conforming to the latest issue of I.S. 2208.

v) The charger units shall be provided with but not limited to the following instruments and equipments.

a) 3 Pole A.C. mains ON-OFF switches and HRC fuses of suitable capacity. b) 2 pole air break switches with HRC fuses of suitable capacity output side of

chargers. c) Air break magnetic contactors of suitable ratings complete with push button

and thermal overload devices and red and green indicating lamps for A.C. input ON/OFF to the chargers.

d) Fuse blown out indication for D.C. output fuses. e) HRC fuses for protection of rectifier elements with fuse blow out indication. f) 0-500 volts range, A.C. voltmeters to measure A.C. input voltage to the

chargers. Accuracy class 1.0 as per I.S. 1248. g) Moving coil, flush mounting type voltmeters of suitable ranges to measure

trickle, boost and battery voltages. Accuracy class: 1.0 as per I.S.-1248. h) Moving coil, flush mounting type ammeters of suitable scales to read the

output currents of boost and trickle chargers and load current. Accuracy class : 1.0 as per I.S.-1248.

i) Single pole D.C. contactors of suitable ratings. j) Blocking diode of adequate capacity. k) Cubicle illuminating lamps with door operated switches suitable for 240 volts

A.C. l) All other equipments and accessories for indication and alarm annunciation as

mentioned earlier. m) All other equipments not specifically mentioned but required for proper and

satisfactory operation of the charger shall be provided. n) The charger assembly shall be complete with input / output terminals, cable

glands, internal wiring, earthing terminals, rating plates, etc. 2.2.6 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

The whole battery charging equipments shall be housed in an indoor, floor mounting type; sheet metal clad, cubicle type enclosures which shall also be served as charger panels. The assembly shall be complete in all respect and shall contain all the components described in different clauses and which are essential for the proper operation and control of the equipments. The enclosures shall be totally enclosed dust tight and vermin proof.

131

All doors and covers shall be filled with rubber gaskets. The panels shall have double leaf hinged doors at the back and shall be provided with locks and duplicated keys. The equipments in the panels shall be so located as not to cause congestion and accessibility to the equipments located herein shall be easy and convenient. All incoming and outgoing cables shall enter from bottom and suitable cable terminal boards with cable lugs shall be provided in side of each panel for incoming and outgoing cables. Each terminal of the terminal boards shall be serially numbered to facilitate connections. At least 20% extra terminals shall be provided in each terminal board. Suitable compression type cable glands with base plates shall also be provided. The terminal boards shall be easily accessible for inspection and checking. The panels shall have cable supports and metallic clips for supporting power and control cables for internal wiring of the panels.

2.2.7 TESTS

The battery charger and all the components of the charger shall be routine tested accordingly to their relevant standard. This shall include the following:

a) Operational check for boost and float charger. b) Input / Output test of the chargers. c) Performance test of the charger. d) Temperature rise test of the rectifier transformer. e) Power frequency H.V. test / Insulation tests.

22..33 DDCC DDIISSTTRRIIBBUUTTIIOONN BBOOAARRDD

22..33..11 General Features The D.C. distribution boards shall be indoor, floor mounting of self supporting, sheet metal

clad, and cubicle type. The panels should be totally enclosed, dust tight and vermin proof and shall be made of 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel. The boards shall be provided with double leaf hinged doors at the back. All doors and covers shall be fitted with rubber gaskets. The doors shall be provided with locks and duplicated covers

22..33..22 BBuussbbaarrss The busbars shall be of electrolytic copper of ample cross-section. The busbars shall be

insulated from the structure by means of durable, non-hydroscopic, non-combustible and non tracking materials.

2.3.3 Detail Requirements The 110 Volts D.C. distribution boards shall be provided with the following:

i. One mains failure alarm relay. ii. One earth fault alarm relay. iii. One 110 Volts D.C. bell to be operated by the mains failure alarm relay. iv. One 110 Volts D.C. buzzer to be operated by the earth failure alarm relay. v. One double pole air-break circuit breaker of 200 amp capacity with thermal overload

tripping arrangement to act as incoming breaker of the load bus. vi. One 0-150 volts D.C. moving coil voltmeter to measure the bus-bar voltage. The

display is to be in digital. vii. One pilot lamp to indicate D.C. on conditions. viii. 250 volts, double pole double throw make before break switch with H.R.C. fuses of

following ratings for outgoing feeders. a. 16 Amp, 4 Nos. b. 32 Amp, 3 Nos. c. 63 Amp, 1 Nos

ix. One terminal Board/block for all feeder outlets including cable glands.

132

22..44 LLTTAACC PPAANNEELL

22..44..11 GGeenneerraall AArrrraannggeemmeenntt The 415 volts L.T.A.C. panels shall be indoor floor mountings sheet metal clad type

comprising of combination switch fuse units and busbar chambers and equipped with circuits and equipments as specified. The different circuits shall be mounted above and below the busbar chamber to form a suitable arrangement, except that the incomings will be located at the front and mounted below the bus bar chamber. All equipments shall be suitable for the reception of the cables rising from the ground level. The switchboards shall be so designed as to be readily extensible.

22..44..22 BBuussbbaarrss The phase and neutral busbars shall be of high conductivity Aluminium of adequate uniform

cross section. The busbars shall be insulated from the structure by means of durable non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and non-tracking materials. Busbar joints shall be of bolted type.

2.4.3 DDeettaaiill Requirements The 415 Volts, L.T.A.C. Switchgears shall have following circuits and equipments:

a) INCOMING: One number fitted with following: i. One 200 Amp, four pole MCCB and cable glands suitable for 4 core P.V.C. cable

labeled as ‘INCOMING’. ii. One Voltmeter, 0-500 Volts. iii. One Ammeter, 0-500 Amps. iv. One K.W.H. Digital Energy meter with connected C.T.R 200/5A.

b) OUTGOING Nos. 1 each comprising of :

One 32 Amps T.P.N. Switch fuse unit fitted with 32 Amps H.R.C. fuses and complete with direct connected round projecting pattern ammeter, scaled 0-50 Amps and cable glands suitable for 4 core P.V.C. cable and labeled as ‘Transformer Heater’ and ‘Circuit Breaker Heater’.

c) OUTGOING Nos. 2 comprising of :

One 100 Amps, T.P.N. switch fuse unit, fitted with 100 Amp H.R.C. fuses and cable glands suitable for 4 core, P.V.C. cables and labeled as ‘FILTRATION SET’.

d) OUTGOING Nos. 3, 4 and 5, each comprising of :

One 30 Amps D.P. switch fuse unit fitted with 15 Amp H.R.C. and cable glands suitable for 2 core P.V.C. cable labeled as :

No. 6: ‘Indoor lights and Indicating Lamps’ No. 7: ‘Emergency Lights’ No. 8: ‘Spare’.

e) OUTGOING Nos. 6, 7, and 8 : One 60 Amps T.P.N. switch fuse units fitted with 30 Amp H.R.C. fuses and cable glands

suitable for 4 core P.V.C. cables and labeled as : No. 9: ‘Outdoor Light’ No. 10: ‘Battery Charger’ No. 11: Spare No. 12: ‘Spare’

133

6.18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 SCOPE 1.1. This section of the specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, transport

to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of 415 volts, A.C. 50 Hz A.C. Distribution Board complete with all equipments and accessories as described in subsequent clauses.

2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 2.1 The L.T.AC. panels shall be outdoor, sheet metal clad type comprising of combination

switch fuse units and bus bar chambers. and equipped with the circuits and equipments as specified later. The different circuits shall be mounted above and below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable arrangement, except that the incomings will be located at the front and mounted below the bus bar chambers. All equipments shall be suitable for the reception of the cables rising from the ground level. The switch boards shall be so designed as to be readily extensible.

2.2 Required technical particulars of ACDB

1. Manufacturers Name & Co

2 Bus Bars

a) Make

b) Continuous Current rating in Amps 200A

c) Material Aluminium

d) Current Density 0.9 Amps/sqmm

3 Incoming Switch Fuse Unit

a) Make Havell’s/ Schinder

b) Type SFU

c) Rated Voltage 415 Volts AC

d) Continuous Current carrying Capacity in Amps 200A

4 Indication Lamps

a) Make STD

b) Type LED

c) Voltage 220Volts

5 Fuse

a) Make Havell’s/ Schinder

b) Type HRC

c) Rupturing Capacity 80 KA

6 Switch (triple/double pole)

a) Make Havell’s/ Schinder/ EQV

b) Type SF UNIT

c) Rated Continuous Current carrying Capacity in Amps

63A/32A/16A

7 Current Transformer

a) Make

b) Type Bar primary and ring type

c) Ratio 100-200/5A

d) VA burden rating 15 VA

e) Accuracy class 1

f) Type of Insulation PVC

g) Security factor <5

8 AC Meters/ Energy Meters (Details for Ammeters Voltmeters, Energy Meters shall be furnished separately)

AM VM KWH

a) Make M/S SML,or M/S L&T

b) Type MI 96 mm sq. 3 ph, 4W

c) Range

0-100 A ,200/5 0-200 A 0-500 0-300A

134

d) Accuracy 1.5

9 Internal Wiring

a) Make Supercab/ EQV

b) Type PVC Insulated Copper

c) Voltage Grade 1100 Volts

d) Size Recommended

e) Material used Copper

10 Cable Glands

a) Make Standard

b) Type Compression type

c) Size As per cable size

d) Material used Brass

11 Terminal Block

a) Make Eleco/ STD

b) Type STUND Type

d) Material used Bakelite DMC

12 Switch Board

a) Overall Dimension 1500x900x500 mm(for nine feeders ACDB)

b) Thickness of Steel metal 1.6 mm

c) Finish Light Grey

d) Approximate Weight 250Kg

3.0 COMBINATION MCCB UNIT 3.1. All MCCB shall be of triple pole rotary operated type and shall open and close with snap

action. The series combination MCCB shall conform to the provisions of latest issue of IS – 13947-2.

3.2. The MCCB shall be suitable for rated voltage of 415 volts AC., 50 Hz. The rated current of each unit shall be as specified before.

4.0 BUS BARS 4.0 The phase and neutral bus bars shall be of high conductivity (as per IS 5082) aluminum of

adequate uniform cross section. The bus bars shall be insulated from the structure by means of durable non-hygroscopic, noncombustible and non-tracking materials. Bus bar joints shall be bolted type.

5.0 The 415 Volts, L.T.A.C. switchgear shall have following circuits and equipments: (a) INCOMING: - One number fitted with following:

(i) One 400/300 Amps. as required , unit fitted with cable glands suitable for 4 core XLPE cable labeled "Incoming".

(ii) One voltmeter, 0-500 volts. (iii) One Ammeter, 0-500 Amps. (iv) One KWH Static Electronic Three phase Trivector meter having facility of

downloading the data with connected CTs as mentioned. (b) OUTGOING :- Nos. 1 and 2 each comprising of: One 300/200 Amps. as required, unit fitted with complete with direct connected round protecting pattern ammeter, scaled 0-300 Amps, and cable gland suitable for 4 core XLPE cable labeled as “outgoing”. Name Plate The board shall be provided with nameplate covering all technical data and also name of the project shall be clearly mentioned.

7.0 INSPECTION. Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in· accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

135

6.19 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This section of the specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works,

transport to site, insurance, erection and commissioning of D.C. Distribution Boards

complete with all equipments and accessories as described below:

2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

2.1 The D.C. Distribution Boards shall be indoor, floor mounting of self supporting, sheet metal

clad, cubicle type. The panels / boards shall be totally enclosed, dust tight and vermin

proof. The boards shall have double leaf hinged doors at the back. All doors and covers

shall be filled with rubber gaskets. The doors shall be provided with locks and duplicated

keys. The boards shall be made of 2.0 mm cold rolled sheet steel.

2.2 All incoming and outgoing cables shall enter from bottom. Suitable cable terminal boards

with cable lugs shall be provided inside each panel for incoming and outgoing cables.

Suitable compression type cable glands shall provided to hold the cable so as to avoid any

pressure or tension at the terminal board connection. The terminal boards shall be easily

accessible for inspection and checking.

3.0 AIR BREAK SWITCHES AND FUSES

3.1 The series combination air break rotary switches and fuses shall conform to tile provisions

of IS - 4064, IS - 4047 and IS - 2208. Fuses shall be HRC type. The rating of each unit shall

be as specified later in this section.

4.0 All switches shall be of rotary type double pole, double throw make before type with snap

action and 'OFF' position.

5.0 BUS BARS

5.1 The bus bars shall be of electrolytic copper of ample cross section. The bus bars shall be

insulated from the structure by means of durable non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and

non-tracking material.

6.0 TYPE OF D.C.DISTRIBUTION BOARD

6.1 Type -1- 220 Volt D.C. Distribution Boards

The 220 volt D.C. distribution board sholl comprise of the following.

(i) One mains failure alarm relay.

(ii) One earth fault alarm relay.

(iii) One 220 volt D.C. bell to be operated by the failure alarm relay.

(iv) One 220 volt D.C. buzzer to be operated by the earth fault alarm relay.

(v) One double pole Air-break Circuit Breaker of 200 Amp. Capacity with thermal overload

tripping arrangement to act as incoming breaker of the load bus.

(vi) One of 250 volts D.C. moving coil voltmeter to measure the bus bar voltage.

(vii) One pilot lamp to indicate D.C. on condition.

(viii) 500 volt, double pole, double throw make before break switch with HRC fuses of

following ratings for outgoing feeders.

(a) 60 Amp. ------ 2 (Two) Nos.

(b) 30 Amp. ------ 4 (Four) Nos.

(c) 15 Amp. ------- 8 (Eight) Nos.

(ix) One terminal board I block for all feeder outlets including cable glands.

(x) A.C./ D.C. charge over contacts. Emergency lighting circuit shall be provided by the

bidder such that the lights normally burn on AC., 230 volts, 50 cIs but in case of failure

of AC. these come up on D.C. with the help of automatic change over contactors and

again change over to A.C. with the restoration of AC. supply. There shall be two

136

numbers double pole ONI OFF switch with HRC fuses, one each for AC. and D.C.

5.1. Type - II - 110 Volts D.C. Distribution Boards:

The 110 volts D.C. distribution boards shall comprise of the following :-

(i) One mains failure alarm relay.

(ii) One earth fault alarm relay.

(iii) One 110 volts D.C. bell to be operated by the mains failure alarm relay

(iv) One 110 volts D.C. Buzzer to be operated by earth fault alarm.

(v) One double pole Air-break Circuit Breaker of 100 Amp. Capacity with thermal

overload, tripping arrangement to act as incoming breaker of the load bus.

(vi) One 0-150 volts D.C. moving coil voltmeter to measure the bus bar \ voltage.

(vii) One pilot lamp to indicate D.C. on conditions.

(viii) 250 volts, double pole, double throw make before break switch with HRC fuses of

following ratings for outgoing feeders:

(a) 60 Amp. ------ 2 (Two) Nos.

(b) 30 Amp. ------ 4 (Four) Nos.

(c) 15 Amp. ------- 8 (Eight) Nos.

(ix) One terminal board/block for all feeder outlets including cable glands.

(x) One transformer, 230/110 volts, 5 KVA continuous rated, naturally air cooled for

emergency load.

(xi) AC.lD.C. change over contacts - Emergency Lighting Circuit shall be provided by

the bidder such that the lights normally burn on AC. 110 volts, 50 Hz but in case of

failure of AC. these come up on D.C. with the help of automatic change over

contactors and again change over to AC. with the restoration of AC. supply. There

shall be two numbers double pole ON/OFF switch with HRC fuses one each for AC.

and D.C.

7.0 Name Plate

The equipments shall be provided with name plate covering, rating and other technical data

and also name of the project shall be clearly mentioned "Under ABY-2010-11”

8.0 INSPECTION

Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third

party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and

acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the

supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and

shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

Required technical particulars of DCDB

1. Manufacturers Name & Co

2. Bus Bars

a) Continuous Current rating in Amps 250A

b) Material Aluminium

c) Current Density 0.9 A/Sq mm

3. DC Double incoming MCCB

a) Make Havell’s/ Schinder/ EQV

b) Continuous Current Rating 250 A for 9 feeders

c) Making Capacity 10 KA

d) Rupturing Capacity 10 KA

4. DC Double Pole switch Fuse Unit for outgoing

137

feeders

a) Make RECOM/ STD

b) Continuous Current Rating 60A/40A/16A

c) Making Capacity As per IS-4047

d) Rupturing Capacity 4043-1967

5. DC Voltmeter

a) Make AEE/ Meco

b) Type M.C

c) Range 0 TO 150Volts

d) Accuracy 1

6. Switch Board

a) Overall Dimension 1500x800x500 mm

b) Thickness of Steel metal 1.6 mm to 2.00 mm

c) Finish Light Grey

d) Approximate Weight 150Kg

7. Fuse

a) Make EE/ GEC

b) Type HBC

c) Rupturing Capacity 80 KA

8. Indication Lamps

a) Make STD

b) Type LED

c) Voltage 110 Volts

9. Internal Wiring

a) Make PVC Insulated Copper

b) Type Cont 1.5/ PWT 2.5

c) Voltage Grade 110 Volts

10. Other Features

a) Mains fail Alarm Relay with DC Bell 1 set

b) Earth fault alarm relay with DC Bell 1 set

c)

AC-DC Changeover contacts for

emergency lighting

1 No.

138

66..2211 TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN OOFF PPOOWWEERR AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLL CCAABBLLEESS

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

a. Aluminium conductor XLPE insulated armoured cables shall be used for main power

supply purpose from LT Aux. Transformers to control room only.

b. Aluminium conductor PVC insulated armoured power cables shall be used for various

other applications in switchyard area/control room except for control/protection

purposes.

c. For all control/protection/instrumentation purposes PVC insulated armoured control

cables of minimum 2.5 sq. mm Size with stranded Copper conductors shall be used.

d. Cables shall be laid conforming to IS : 1255.

e. While preparing cable schedules for control/protection purpose following shall be

ensured:

i. Separate cables shall be used for AC & DC.

ii. For different cores of CT & PT/CVT separate cable shall be used

iii. At least one (1) cores shall be kept as spare in each copper control cable of 4C, 5C or

7C size whereas minimum no. of spare cores shall be two (2) for control cables of

10 core or higher size.

f. For control cabling, including CT/PT circuits, 4.0 sq.mm. size copper cables shall be

used per connection..

g. Standard technical data sheets for cable sizes up to and including 1100V are

enclosed at Clause 3.0 Cable sizes shall be offered /manufactured in accordance

with parameters specified in standard technical data sheets. Technical data sheet for

any other cores/sizes required during detailed engineering shall be separately offered

for Employer’s approval by the contractor/supplier.

2.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

General

a. The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and

underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by

water.

b. The XLPE insulated cables shall be capable of withstanding a conductor temperature of

250°C during a short circuit without any damage. The PVC insulated cables shall be

capable of withstanding a conductor temperature of 160°C during a short circuit.

c. The Aluminium/Copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true circular in

shape before stranding and shall be uniformly good quality, free from defects. All

Aluminium used in the cables for conductors shall be of H2 grade. In case of single core

cables, armours shall be of H4 grade Aluminium.

d. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic, fire retardant material, shall be

softer than insulation and outer sheath shall be suitable for the operating temperature of

the cable.

e. Progressive sequential marking of the length of cable in metres at every one

metre shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.

f. Strip wire armouring method shall not be accepted for any of the cables. For control,

cables only round wire armouring shall be used.

g. The cables shall have outer sheath of a material with an oxygen index of not less than

29 and a temperature index of not less than 250°C.

139

h. All the cables shall pass fire resistance test as per IS:1554 (Part-I)

i. The normal current rating of all PVC insulated cables shall be as per IS:3961.

j. Repaired cables shall not be accepted.

k. Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be plus or minus 2 mm.

XLPE Power Cables

The XLPE (90°C) insulated cables shall be of FR type, C1 category conforming to IS: 7098

(Part-I) and its amendments read along with this specification. The conductor shall be

stranded aluminium circular/sector shaped and compacted. In multicore cables, the core

shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloured strips or colouring of insulation. A

distinct inner sheath shall be provided in all multicore cables. For XLPE cables, the inner

sheath shall be of extruded PVC of type ST-2 of IS:5831. When armouring is specified for

single core cables, the same shall consist of aluminium wires/strips. The outer sheath shall

be extruded PVC of Type ST-2 of IS:5831 for all XLPE cables.

PVC Power Cables

The PVC (70°C) insulated power cables shall be of FR type, C1 category, conforming to IS:

1554 (Part-I) and its amendments read along with this specification and shall be suitable for a

steady conductor temperature of 70°C. The conductor shall be stranded aluminium. The

Insulation shall be extruded PVC to type-A of IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall be

provided in all multicore cables. For multicore armoured cables, the inner sheath shall be of

extruded PVC. The outer sheath shall be extruded PVC to Type ST-1 of IS 5831 for all cables.

PVC Control Cables

a. The PVC (70°C) insulated control cables shall be of FR type C1 category conforming

to IS: 1554 (Part-1) and its amendments, read along with this specification. The

conductor shall be stranded copper. The insulation shall be extruded PVC to type A of

IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided in all cables whether armoured or

not. The over sheath shall be extruded PVC to type ST-1 of IS: 5831 and shall be

grey in colour.

b. Cores shall be identified as per IS: 1554 (Part-1) for the cables up to five (5) cores

and for cables with more than five (5) cores the identification of cores shall be done by

printing legible Hindu Arabic Numerals on all cores as per clause 10.3 of IS 1554

(Part-1).

3.0 DATA SHEET FOR CABLES

For Control Cables

Sl. o.

Description

Control cable Size 7x2.5 sqmm

armoured

Control cable Size 4x2.5

sqmm armoured

1 Applicable Standard IS: 1554 (Part-1) IS: 1554 (Part-1)

2 Rated Voltage(volts) 33 KV 33 KV

3 No of cores & cross sectional area No x mm2

7x2.5 4x2.5

4 Thickness of PVC insulation(Nom) mm 0.9 0.9

5 Thickness of inner sheath(min) extruded mm 0.3 0.3

6 Wired armoured cable

a) round wire dia in mm 1.4 1.4

b) Thickness of outer sheath(min) mm 1.24 1.24

c) Approx OD in mm 18.7 16.4

d) net wt of cable Kg/Km 780 590

7 Standard delivery length in Mtrs 1000 1000

8 Current rating

a) direct in ground Amps 20 27

b) in air/duct Amps 17 24

140

6.22 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE END TERMINAL KIT (OUTDOOR AND INDOOR)

Heat shrinkable termination Kit for 6.35/11kV XLPE ,Cable ( 1-core,300 sq mm & 185 sqmm, 3-core -120 sqmm ) both for outdoor and indoor should be as per IS : 13753 and relevant international standard. The terminal cable kit should be for the following technical parameter of cable.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:-

Technical parameters of the cable shall be as follows:

Sl No

Particulars Unit

1 Rated voltage of cable KV 6.35/11kV

2 Type of insulation - XLPE

3 Core - Single ,

4 Armoured /Unarmoured - Armoured

5 Material of Conductor Aluminium

6 System Voltage - 11 KV Earthed

7 Highest System Voltage KV 12

8 Conductor Size Sq. mm 300 Sq mm , 1- core 240 Sq mm , 1- core And 120 sqmm,3-core

9 Material - Stranded Aluminium

ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE FOR TERMINAL KIT

AC Dry withstand voltage 35 KV / 1 minute

DC withstand voltage for 30 minute 48 KV

Lighting impulse withstand voltage 75 KV

Partial Discharge 12.7 KV < 5 pc

Standard tail length for outdoor 600 mm

Standard tail length for indoor 450 mm

KIT COMPONENT

Terminal Lug 1 No

Heat Shrinkable Adhesive Lined Terminal Sleeve

1 No

Lug Sealing Tape / Mastic 1 Strip

Rain Shed for 12 KV System 2 Nos.

Anti Tracking Sleeve 1 No.

Stress Control Sleeve 1 No

Stress Control Mastic 1 Strip

Constant Force Spring Roll 1 No

Copper Braid for Screen Earthing 1 No

Worm Drive Clip 1 No

Adhesive Line Gland Sleeve 1 No

Tinned Copper Braid duly fitted with Terminal Lug at one end + Solder Bock

1 No

141

6.23 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV A.B. GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

1.0 Scope:

This specification covers the design, manufacture and testing at works, transport to site,

insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of outdoor type A.C. Gang Operated Air Break

Switches suitable for use on 11 KV power systems conforming to 155: 1818/1972 with up to-date

amendments and revisions.

2.0 i) Ratings: 11 KV 400 Amps 50 C/S AC, 3-Phase continuous

ii) Type: The insulators should be of tilting type for 11 KV class and should be suitable for

both horizontal and vertical mounting.

iii) Insulators: There will be 3(three) insulators stacks per pole. The insulators should be manufactured strictly conforming to ISS: 731 1971 with its up to date amendments and revisions and it should be easily replaceable in the event of any damage or defect.

The insulator /insulators/stacks and fixture should be procured from reputed insulator

manufacturers as integral union and should bear the manufacturers monogram both on the

insulators as well as on the malleable caps. A certificate should be furnished to the effect

that the insulators along with the fixtures are procured as integral units from the

manufacturers. The fixtures are to be of malleable casting wherever applicable .

iv) Main Contacts : The insulators should be complete with :nale contuc~ blades and self

aligning full-floating jaw type female contacts aided with powerful springs to provide

sufficient contact pressure on both sides of the male contact. The contact surface should be

made of non-ferrous alloy such as bronze, gun-metal of brass. The name of the alloy should

be mentioned clearly. Full floating type contacts shall be preferred. The contacts shall be

designed so as to withstand the rated currents without over-heating and should also be able

to withstand electromagnetic stresses and shattering of rated short time current. The

contact should also assure a good wiping action during engagement and dirt accumulation.

v) Arching Contacts : The insulators should be provided with securely placed and replaceable

type arching contacts to act as the first and the last contacts to prevent burning of the main

contacts. The moving arching contact arm should be of adequate section to withstand the

arching, should be of sufficient mechanical strength and should be placed preferably on the

top of the main male contact.

vi) Current Carrying Path: All current carrying paths should be of non- ferrous Metals. In case

of tilting type of design the flexible cords are to be of honey comb design and should be

made of suitable non-ferrous metal. The terminals of the cord should be of the same width

as that of the cord itself and be fixed with non-ferrous nuts and bolts. While designing

individual areas of all current carrying paths made of nonferrous alloy, prime consideration

of mechanical loading and electrical copper equivalent of 1 Amp! sq.mm. loading should be

considered.

vii) Terminal Connectors : The insulators should be provided with detachable 6 (six) bolted

palm type terminal connectors 100 mm long suitably grooved to accommodate conductors

up to 12.5 mm diameter. The connector including the fixing bolts and nuts should be made

of suitable non-ferrous metals such as brass, bronze and gun-metal which should be clearly

indicated.

The six bolted palm type connector-groove portion should be finely grinded and finished to

accommodate aluminium conductor up to 12.5 mm diameter suitably.

It may be noted that all nonferrous parts should be tinned properly as per best engineering

practice.

A pair of brass plate washer must be provided on each nuts & bolts of the connector.

viii) Operating Mechanism: The isolators should be assembled on M.S. Galvanised channel base with holes suitable for fixing on the mounting structures and should be complete with the follows:

142

For 11 kV Class Tiltinq Type Desiqn : Phase coupling shaft: 2 .5 cm x 2.5 cm C.I. solid bar of 2.30 meter length. Operating Pipe: 2.6 cm outside dia 3.25 mm thick 6 meters long. The operating mechanism should be complete with intermediate guides suitable operating

handle with padlock and chain for locking the handle in both 'ON' & 'OFF' positions. The flexible coupling, in case of tilting type design will be supported on hinged linked made

of suitable pairs of G I straps with suitable space to accommodate the cord and with three hinges. two on the insulator fixtures and one between the line.

The pivots of the hinges shall be of G.1. nuts and bolts with sufficiently strong split pin arrangements of suitable metal. Suitable spring stop mechanism shall be provided at the base the moving post insulator/post insulators stacks of each pole to prevent overshooting and ensure that the contact surface area held in contact uniformly during closed position and also to held it in position after opening.

Necessary and adequate adjustments should be provided in the operating mechanism to ensure, synchronous closing and opening in the three phase of the insulator.

Inter locking should be provided so that earthing switch cannot be operated without first isolating the line. The inter-locking shall be mechanical either through lever arrangements or through locking arrangements or both. Extra for each may be indicated separately. Auxiliary contacts enclosed in a terminal board shall be provided for semaphore indications of open and closed positions of the main isolator as well as open and closed positions of the, earthing contacts.

General considerations: All ferrous parts used in the Isolator units should be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the relevant ISS.

3.0 TEST. The offers shall invariably be supported by complete type test certificate from National Test

House/C.P. R.I/any other recognised 'Public Institutions and as per ISS: 9920 (pt-1 to iv) with up to date amendments. Test certificate should be furnished against individual component parts of the isolator such as insulators etc. The manufacturers should have the facilities of laboratory testing of the isolators at their works as per relevant ISS/ BSS. They should furnish the detailed specifications along with the make and capacity of testing equipments at their disposal along with tender.

4.0 Sample The tenderer shall submit the sample complete with accessories at his own cost along with the

tender. Samples not received within the stipulated time may· disqualify the tender. The tender without sample may be rejected outright.

5.0 Climatic Conditions: a) Maximum temperature of air in shade 40°C b) Minimum temperature of air in shade 2°C

c) Maximum temperature of air in Sun 40°C

d) Maximum Humidity 93%

e) Average number of thunderstorm days 45

f) Average numbers of dust storms per annum 10

g) Maximum rainfall/annum 3500 mm

h) Average rainfall 2280 mm

i) Wind Pressure 97.8 Kg/Sq.mm

j) Altitude above MSL 100 m to 1000 m

6.0 Inspection The man-ufacturer shall afford the inspection representing the purchaser or third party nominee

at works all facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with specification.

Name Plate

The bidder has to provide the following particulars on the name plate of the equipment:

a. Name of the equipment b. Manufacture's name c. Operating range d. Name of the purchaser e. Name of the project "AP-11-12"

143

6.25 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV DROP OUT TYPE EXPULSION FUSE

DISCONNECTS

1.0 Scope

1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture and testing, transport to site, insurance,

storage, erection and commissioning of outdoor type dropout type expulsion fuse disconnects

suitable for use on 11K.V. power system conforming to 155:2692 of 1956 and 15 : 5792/1970

with upto date amendments and revisions.

2.0 Design Considerations

2.1 Ratings

11 kV, 150 Amps, 50 Cycles, A.C.3 Phase.

2.2 Type

The D.O. should be of Bracket type for 11 KV., 150 Amps, and should be suitable for vertical

mounting the fuse barrel being in an angle of 30 degree to vertical when closed and opening

downwards. The fuse shall be opened and closed by a hook-stick.

2.3 Insulators

There should be 2(two) nos. of Insulators/ Insulator stacks for pole. The insulators used should

be manufactured as per ISS:2544/63 with upto date amendments and revisions and it should

be easily, replaceable in the event of any damage to it. The post insulators should be 320 m

Creepage Distance only and tested quality.

The post insulator should be procured from reputed insulator manufacturers only and should

bear the manufacturers monogram on the insulators. A certificate supported by drawing

should be furnished from the manufacturers. The following Insulator manufacturers are

preferable :-

The caps and the posts should be made of Galvanised Cast Iron. It should be integrally cast

by the manufacturers.

2.4 Contacts Top side contact of the D.O.'s shall be lift off type with suitable guides to place the moving

contacts in the position and guides should be provided with sufficiently strong Phosphor Bronze Springs, one set for holding the barrel in position and another type and set for electrical contacts. The contact Phosphor Bronze Springs shall be leaf type and number of leaves (which should be seven pieces) should be clearly stated.

The bottom side contact should be trunion type, provided with leaf springs (7 numbers) to

obtain sufficient electric contact. Adequate facilities for insertion and removal of the fuse barrel

in service should be provided.

All the contacts, contact springs and the current carrying paths should be made of suitable

non-ferrous metal alloy such as Bronze, Gunmetal, Brass etc. which should be clearly

indicated.

2.5 Fuse Barrels

The D.O. Units shall be completed with synthetic resin bonded paper tubes fitted with metal

contacts at each end. These fuses should be manufactured strictly as per ISS : 1314 (Part I) of

1946 and test reports in respects of them to from the manufacturer shall invariably be

furnished along with the offer.

The following manufacturer who claim to manufacture SRBP tube as per BSS: 1314/26 are

preferable:

144

VIZ., I) M/S Bakelite Hylam Ltd.

II) M/S Bengal Laminate Industries

The SRBP tubes should be sufficiently strong mechanically, Fire and Moisture resistant and

should be of the following sizes:

a) For 11 KV Class -outside dia 25 mm, thickness 7 mm and length 39 cm.

The metallic fixtures of the tubes should be made of suitable non-ferrous alloys like Brass,

Gunmetal, Bronze etc. and should be of sufficient sections to carry the rated current

continuously. The name of alloy used should be indicated clearly.' The fuse barrel shall be

capable of swiveling in a vertical plane on hinges mounted on the lower of the two insulators

which hold the barrel in position. Both contacts of the barrel shall be fitted with eye rings into

which hooked operating rod or Hook stick can be inserted from ground level. By pulling the

upper eye ring it shall be possible to pull the fuse barrel out of the top insulator contact' in the

manner of an isolating switch. In the isolated' position, the lower eye ring shall be accessible,

so that the fuse barrel can be removed with hook stick by giving a sharp upward jerk,' for

rewiring purposes.

2.6 Terminal Connections

The D.O. fuse units be provided with detachable 6 (six) bolts plan type 100cm length terminal

connectors smoothly grooved to accommodate conductors upto 12.5 mm dia. The connectors

including the fixing nuts and bolts should be with a pair of grass washer with proper tin plating

suitable ferrous metal such as bronze, gunmetal, brass etc. The name of the metal used

should clearly be indicated.

3.0 Climatic Conditions

The equipment shall be designed for satisfactory operations under the following climatic conditions.

a) Maximum temperature of air in shade 40° C

b) Minimum temperature of air in shade 2° C

c) Maximum humidity 93%

d) Average annual rainfall 2280 mm

e) Average number of rainy days per annum 150

f) Basic wind pressure 150 Kg/M2

g) Isoceraumic level 60

h) Altitude above MSL 100 M to 1000 M

3.1 General

The D.O. units should be supplied complete with mounting brackets etc. so as to fix them. On

mounting structures and with nuts and bolts. Double bolted fixture arrangements with flexible

adjustments in a slot or hole is preferable All ferrous parts should be hot dip galvanised as per

the relevant Indian Standard Specification.

4.0 Tests

The offers for the' 0.0/5 should invariably be 0upported by type test certificates from National

Test Housel CPRI or any other recognized Public Institutions as per ISS: 2692/56 with upto

date amendments and as given in ANNEXURE -II. The D.O. fuse disconnects also shall be

subjected to milivolt drop test temperature rise test and all other electrical and mechanical

tests as per relevant ISS or BSS. Test certificate as per relevant ISS or BSS in respect of each

of the component parts such as insulators, barrels etc. should also be submitted. The

manufacturer should have the necessary facilities for carrying out the laboratory tests, as per

145

ISS or BSS on the product. They should furnish the detailed specification along with the make

and capacity of testing equipments at their disposal along with tender.

The D.O. offered must be supported by a Short Circuit Withstand capacity (not less than 25

KV) cost certificate from competent authorities like CPR I. In absence of such a test certificate

the offer may not be considered.

5.0 INSPECTION

Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third

party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance

of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his

obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent

subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

6.0 Guaranteed Technical Particulars

The guaranteed technical particulars in respect of the D.O.'s offered shall be submitted along

with the tender.

146

6.26 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF XPLE CABLE FOR 11kV SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE:

The specification covers the design, testing, supply and delivery in proper packed condition of different grade of 1 or 3 core. Aluminium Conductor, Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, PVC sheathed, armoured, screened Power Cables.

2.0 LOCATION: 2.1 The cables may be laid buried directly in ground at a depth of one metre in average, any

where in Assam and terminate for outdoor connection to a power transformer or to overhead lines and also indoor connection for indoor switchgear.

2.2 The cables may also be laid within covered cable trenches, in cable racks or open-air ladder trays etc. for certain portion of lengths.

3.0 SYSTEM DETAILS: 3.1 Voltage grade (KV) of cable required … 6.35/11

3.2 Service Voltage … 11 KV

3.3 Highest Voltage … 12 KV

3.4 Earthing System Solidly Earthed

3.5 B.I.L. for Cables 75 KV for 11 KV

3.6 Fault Level (Maxim.) …

3.7 Frequency … 50 C/S.

4.1 STARDARDS: 4.2 The cable shall conform to the following standards to the extent of LAEDCL requirement is

fulfilled. 1) IS : 7098 (Part – II) (Latest) :Specification for cross-linked polyethylene

Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables for working Voltage from 3.3 KV up to and including 33 KV.

2) IS:8130 – 1984 :Specification for Conductors for insulated

electric cables and flexible cords.

3) IS:5830 – 1984 :PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables.

4) IS:3975 – 1979 : Armour for cables (for 3 Crore).

5) IS:10810 – 1984 : Methods for test for cables.

6) IS:10418 – 1982 : Cable Drum for Electric Cables. 3.3 The cable, joints, outdoor and indoor termination and their accessories and fittings may

conform to other Indian and/or equivalent standards or important publications to improve upon their performance, but shall not fall short of the requirement of this specification. The tenderer shall clearly indicate such standards in their offers.

5.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS & PERFORMANCE: 5.1 Description of Cable:

a) 6.35/11 KV Grade 3-Crore : Same as above but insulation shielding with black semi-conducting tape not necessary. Inner sheath to be wrapped not extruded and strip armoured. The design shall fully conform to IS:7098 (Part – II).

b) SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS Technical parameters of the cable shall be as follows:

147

Sl No

Particulars Unit 11 KV

1 Rated voltage KV 11

2 Type of insulation - XLPE

3 Single Core - Single , three

4 Armoured /Unarmoured - Armoured

5 Material of Conductor Material to IS: 8130, H4 Grade Aluminium Conductor, Stranded compacted Circular

6 System - 11 KV Earthed

7 Highest System Voltage KV 12

8 Material - Stranded Aluminium

9 Voltage Grade 6.35/11 KV

10 Conductor Size Sq. mm 1x240,3x120 1x300

11 Nominal dimention of Al. round wire

2.1 mm[for 1x300sqmm ], 2.0mm [for 1x240sqmm & 2.5mm[3x120 sqmm],

12 Nominal thickness of XLE insulationr sheath

3.6 mm

13 Approx overall cable diameter

61.50mm [for 3x120sqmm], 33.00 mm [for 1x240sqmm] 38.00 mm [ for 1x300 sqmm],

14 Current rating

a In ground at 300C 219A(3x120sqmm), 340A(1x240sqmm) 381 A(1x300 sqmm)

b In air at 400C 288A(1x120sqmm), 447A(1x240 sqmm) 512 A(1x300 sqmm

15 Maxm. Conductor Temp

90 oC at maxm. Continuous current

16 Short Ckt.Current for 1 second duration

11.3KA-for120 sqmm, 22.6 KA-for 185 sqmm, 28.3 KA – for 300 sqmm.

17 Maxm.Permissible emergency overload temp. at 25% overload to 100 hrs. per year or 500 hrs. in life of cable

130 oC for one hour

18 Maxm. Permissible short circuit temperature

250 oC for one hour

19 Conductor Screening Extruded, cross linked, semi-conducting compound of.5 mm for 11KV

20 Insulation Screening

21 Conductor Screening : Extruded, cross linked, semi-conducting compound of.5 mm for 11KV

22 Insulation : XLPE of thickness, 3.6 mm (Nominal) for 11KV

a Insulation Screening For 33 KV :

Combination of black extruded semi-conducting tape as the non-metallic part and annealed copper 0.06 mm (minimum) thick tape lapping as metallic part. For 1 core cable, the non-magnetic metal Armour will act as metallic part insulation screening.

b For 11 KV :

It is same but semi-conducting tape is not required

23 Inner Sheathing : Black extruded PVC, Type ST-2 compound for 33 KV and wrapped PVC tape for 11 KV as per ISS. For 1 core there will be no inner sheath.

24 Armouring : Single layer of round galvanized steel wires/strip for 33 KV and galvanized steel strips/wire for 11 KV (3 core) as per IS. For 1

148

core, there will be non-magnetic metal Armour.

25 Overall Sheathing : Coloured PVC, type ST-2 compound to IS: 5831, extruded for both 33KV and 11KV thickness shall be as per ISS

26 Approx. length of cable in a Drum : 250 metres with a tolerance of ± 5% (for 3 core), 500 metres ± 5% (for 1 core)

27 End Sealing H.S. Caps (see clause 6.11.1) (Heat Shrinkable)

a Max. ‘Tan-delta’ at room temp. At nominal phase to neutral voltage (Uo):

0.004

b Maxm. Increment of ‘tan-delta’ between 0.5 Uo to 2 Uo at room temp:

: 0.002

28 Partial discharge value 20 Pc (Maxm.) at 1.6 Uo.

29 Impulse Tests 170 KV for 33 KV and as per ISS for 11 KV

30 H.V. Tests between Conductors & Screen/Armour

48 KV (rms) for 33 KV for 5 minutes and as per ISS for 11 KV

31 Maxm. D.C. Rtance/Km As per relevant I.S.S

* NB the above parameters are applicable for three core and single core cable, if not otherwise specified. 6.0 CABLE CONSTRUCTION:

6.1 XLPE underground cable is to be manufactured in continuous catenary process at controlled elevated temperature and pressure in inert atmosphere with use of suitable materials for XLPE semi-conducting, insulation and XLPE screen. The inner and outer semi-conducting sheaths and main polyethylene insulation between the sheaths are to be simultaneously extruded during the Triple Extrusion Process of manufacturing and main insulation of the Cable is to be extruded unified. The XLPE Cables in this specification does not have any metal sheath and the short circuit rating of the cable will depend on the conductivity and continuity of the strands of the armour wires, which shall be ensured by guarding against corrosion.

6.2 CONDUCTOR SCREENING

6.3 A semi-conducting cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) screening shall be extruded over the conductor to act as an electrical shield which together with elimination of the so called “Strand`Effect” prevents to a great extent air ionization on the surface of the conductor.

6.4 INSULATION: The main insulation of the Cable shall be extruded unfilled, chemically cross-linked

polyethylene (XLPE) inert gas cured satisfying the requirement of ISS: 7098 (Part- II)

6.5 INSULATING SCREEN:

The screen shall be made up as given in Clause the metal screen eliminates tangential stress electrostatic field surrounding the conductor and uniform electrical stress in the insulation.

The semi conducting polyethylene (XLPE) screen shall be extruded over the main poly ethylene-insulating wall to prevent partial discharge at the surface of the insulation. The copper tape shall be wrapped over the semi conducting tape or extrusion as mentioned earlier for 3 core cables. The metal screen so formed around the cores shall be in contact with one another as the cores are laid up at triangular configuration. For single core cable, Aluminium wires armoring shall constitute the metallic part of insulation screen. Conductor screening, insulation and insulation screening shall be extruded in triple extrusion processes so as to obtain continuously smooth interfaces.

6.6 The mechanical and chemical properties of the materials for semi conducting screens are

much more important than their electrical properties, but for obtaining the high overall degree of electrical properties of an E.H.V. cable, the inner and outer semi conducting,

149

sheaths and the main polyethylene insulation between the sheaths shall be simultaneously extruded during the manufacturing, process known as “triple extrusion”. The advantages are:

i) The partial discharge level at the surface of the insulation is brought to a minimum.

ii) There will be no displacement of the semi conducting screen and insulation during expansion and contraction due to load cycles and bending.

iii) The semi conducting screens are easily removable during joining and termination operations.

Note: Manufacturers not having “triple extrusion” process will be disqualified. The Tenderer shall

have to produce necessary process line at the time of bidding.

6.7 LAYING UP: The phase identification of the cores shall be either by colour or numerals as per I.S.S. for 3

core cables only. Core Colour Numeral Red 1 Yellow 2 Blue 3 The screen cores shall be laid up with interstices filled with PVC fillers and taped a binder tape

as to obtain a reasonably circular cable.

6.8 INNER SHEATH:

The cable core shall be supplied with bedding of PVC (Inner sheath) in the form of extruded PVC sheath for 33 KV cables. Wrapped PVC tapes shall be used for 11KV thickness as per clause and as per relevant IS.

6.9 ARMOUR: The cable shall be wire armoured /steel strip in case of 33KV and wire/strip armoured 11 KV, three core cables to insure an adequate return path for the flow of fault current and also provide suitable mechanical protection. Steel wires/aluminum wire / steel strips of required size in requisite number as per clause shall be laid closely in the spiral formation to protect the circumference of the cable fully and to provide adequate cores section area for flow of maximum fault current within limits of specified temperature rise and duration of fault. Direction of the lay of the armour shall be opposite to that of the cable cores in case of single core cable armour should be of non-metallic material.

6.10 OUTER SHEATH:

A reliable surving shall be necessary for maintaining conductivity of the armour particularly under corrosive condition in the form of jacket. Cable shall be therefore finished with extruded PVC over sheath of thickness as per clause. The quality of PVC over sheath (jacket) shall be ensured for service reliability against moisture intrusion and shall confirm to type ST-2 of IS : 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall be follows: For 11 KV cable : Blue The sheaths shall be protected against white ants, vermin and termites by suitable, durable and reliable measures. The suppliers shall suggest suitable materials for use, in the event of damage to the over sheath to prevent the passage of moisture along the cable.

6.11 CABLE IDENTIFICATION:

The following shall be embossed on the outer sheath for the identification. a) Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark. b) Voltage Grade. c) Nominal section and material of conductors and number of cores. d) Year of manufacture.

150

e) Inscription of length of cables at 1.0 mtr interval. f) Name of purchaser APDCL; g) Marking “Power” shall be embossed throughout the length of the cable at

10 mtr spacing. h) Type of insulation i.e. XLPE

6.11.1 CEILING OF CABLE ENDS:

The cable ends of the cable in the wooden drum for delivery shall be sealed with heat shrinkable caps.

7.0 WOODEN DRUMS:

The cable shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums.

The following information shall be marked on each drum.

a) Drum identification number. b) Manufacturer’s name, Trade name / Trade mark, if any. c) Nominal sectional area of the conductor of the cable. d) Number of cores e) Type of cable and voltage grade with cable code f) Length of cable in cable drum g) Direction of rotation of drum (by means of an arrow) h) Appox. Weight: tare: gross: i) Year and country of manufacture j) Purchase order number k) Date of delivery l) Name of the purchaser.

Drum shall be proofed against attack by white ant or termite conforming to IS: 10418. The Drums may also be marked with ISI certificate mark, as applicable.

Safe pulling force : 30 N/mm2 (for conductor)

8.0 Tests to be performed as per IS:7098 (part II) Tenderer shall have to submit type test report (tested at CPRI Bangalore/Bhupal) along with the Bid. Bidder will be disqualified for non-submission of type test reports.

8.1 Type test all the test mentioned below are to be made as per details given in IS:10810

a) Test on conductor i. Tensile test (For aluminum) ii. Wrapping test for aluminum iii. Resistance test.

b) Test for armuoring wire strips. c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath. d) Physical test for insulation.

i. Tensile strength and elongation at break ii. Ageing in air oven. iii. Hot test iv. Shrinkage test. v. Water absorption (Gravimetric)

e) Physical tests for outer sheath i. Tensile strength and elongation at break ii. Ageing in air oven. iii. Shrinkage test. iv. Hot deformation v. Heat shock vi. Loss of mass in air oven vii. Thermal stability viii. Thermal Stability

151

f) Partial discharge test g) Bending test h) Dielectric power factor test

i. As a function voltage ii. As a function of temperature

i) Insulation resistance (volume resistivity) test j) Heating cycle test k) Impulse with stand test l) High voltage test m) Flammability test

8.2 The following test on screen cable shall be performed successfully on the same test sample of completed cable, not less than 10 m. in length between the test accessories.

a) PD test b) Bending test followed by PD test c) Di-electric power factor as function of voltage d) Di-electric power factor as a function of temperature e) Heating cycle test followed by Di-electric power factor as a function of

voltage and PD test. f) Impulse with stand test and g) High voltage test as per para If a sample fails in test (g) one more sample shall be taken for this test, preceded

by test (b) and (e)

8.3 Acceptance test : the following shall constitute acceptance test:

a) Tensile test (For aluminum) b) Wrapping test for aluminum c) Conductor resistance test d) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath e) Hot set test for insulation f) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and outer sheath

g) PD test (Screen enables) only on full drum length h) High voltage test, and i) Insulation resistance ( volume resistivity) test J) Spark test on extruded un-insulated outer PVC sheath as per provision

clause no 3.2 IEC standard (Publication no.229 of 1982)

8.4 Routine test:

The routine test shall be carried out on all cables manufacturer in accordance with this specification. The following routine test shall be made on cable length as specified in ISS.

a) Conductor resistance test b) Partial discharge test on full drum length c) High voltage test as per clause

8.5 Test witness

a) All tests shall be performed in presence of purchaser representatives if so desired by the purchaser.

b) The contractor shall give at least 15 days advance notice for witnessing such tests.

9.0 Test Certificate

9.1 Certified copies of all routine test carried out at work shall be furnished in 6 copies for approval of the Purchaser.

152

9.2 The cable shall be dispatched from works only after receipt of Purchaser’s written approval of shop test report.

9.3 Type test certificates of the cable offered shall be furnished. Otherwise the cable shall have to be type tested on similar rating as per clause 10 free of any charges to prove the design.

10.0 Descriptive literatures test results etc.

The following details for the cable shall be submitted with bid a) Manufacturers catalogue giving cable construction details and characteristics b) Manufacturing process in details for cables highlighting the steps of control

i. Contamination ii. Formation of water trees iii. Effects of by products of cross linking iv. Stress control etc.

c) Cross section drawing of the cable d) Cable current ratings for different types of installation inclusive of derating factors

due to ambient temperature, grouping etc. e) Over-load characteristics of the cable without endangering the normal life and

electrical quality of the insulation. f) Complete technical date of the cables. g) Type test certificate from government testing units/government authorized testing

units.

with the quality assurance plan submitted by the firm, the offer shall be liable for rejection.

11.0 Guarantee:

The guarantee period should either be 60 (Sixty) month from the date of commissioning or 68 (Sixty eight) month from the date of material received at site. The tenderer shall have to replace the damage cable (electrical damage/physical deformation) within 30 days from reporting.

153

6.27 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1.1 KV GRADE SINGLE CORE UNARMOURED L.T. XLPE CABLE

1 .0. SCOPE:

This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site of 1.1 kV grade single core 16/25/50/95/120/185/240/300 Sq. mm. XLPE Cables for use with effectively earthed distribution system.

1.1. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of material. However the material shall confirm in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not.

1.2. Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation. But any deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must be mentioned in the “Deviation Schedule” with reasons duly supported by documentary evidences and advantages of such deviation. Such deviation suggested may or may not be accepted. But deviation not mentioned in “Deviation Schedule” will not be considered afterwards.

12.0 Location The cables may be laid buried directly in ground at a depth of one metre in average,

anywhere in Assam and terminate for outdoor connection to a distribution transformer or to

overhead LT lines and also indoor connection for indoor switchgear

a. STANDARDS:

3.1. The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications with latest amendments thereto.

Indian Standard No.

Title Internationally Recognized

standard

IS-7098 Part-I/1988 Specification for Cross Linked Polyethylene Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables for working Voltages Up to and including 1100V

IEC 502 (1983)

IS-5831/1984 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables

IEC 502 (1983)

IS-8130/1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and Flexible cords

IEC 228 (1978)

IS 3975/1979 Specification for armouring

IS-10418/1982 Specification for cable drum

Material conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal

or higher quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. . In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS, (ii) IEC, (iii) Other standards. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification, the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. Moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.

154

3.0. SYSTEM DETAILS : The material shall conform to the following parameters:

Sl. No. Item

Specification

1. Type of Installation

Outdoor

2. System Voltage 433 V (+10% -15%)

3. System Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%

4. No. of Phases Three

5. System of earthing Solidly grounded

4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: 4.1 MAIN FEATURES:

The power cables shall be of LT 1.1 kV Grade, stranded compacted, high conductivity, aluminum conductor, XLPE insulated, ST-1 type extruded PVC outer sheathed, conforming to relevant standards suitable for LT AC three phase, 50 c/s, effectively earthed distribution system.

4.2 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION: 4.2.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Technical parameters of the cable shall be as follows

Sl

No

Cable Size

(Sq.mm) Al. Strand

Min. thickness

of XLPE

(mm)

Min. thickness

of Outer

sheath

(mm)

Min

Overall dia

(mm)

Max. D.C

Resistance at

200C

(Ohm/Km)

Max. A.C

Resistance

at 700C

(Ohm/Km)

Min. current carrying

capacity at 300C

(Amps) Short Ckt

current/sec

(KA/1sec)

Min.

weight.

Kg/Km

Ground Air

1 25 7 0.9 1.8 11.0 1.200 1.540 96 98 2.4 169

2 120 19 1.2 1.8 19.0 0.253 0.325 225 268 11.3 538

4.2.1 CONDUCTOR:

The cable conductor shall be made from stranded aluminum to form compacted shaped conductor having resistance within the limits specified in IS-8130/1984

4.2.2 INSULATION:

The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for the specified system voltage. The manufacturing process shall ensure that the insulation is free from voids. The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state as well as transient operating conditions. The extrusion method shall give smooth surface of insulation. The insulation shall be so applied that it fits closely on the conductor and it shall be easily possible to remove it without damaging the conductor.

4.2.3 OUTER SHEATH: Extruded PVC outer sheath of black colour shall he applied with suitable additives to prevent attack by rodents and termites. Outer sheathing shall be designed to offer high degree of mechanical protection and shall also be heat, oil, chemical, abrasion and weather resistant. Common acids, alkalies, saline solutions etc., shall not have adverse effects on the PVC sheathing material used.

155

4.2.4 CONSTRUCTION:

1) All materials used in the manufacture of cable shall be new, unused and of finest quality. All materials shall comply with the applicable provisions of the tests of the relevant Standards.

2) The PVC material used in the manufacture of cable shall be of reputed make.No recycling of the PVC is permissible. The purchaser reserves the right to ask for documentary proof of the purchase of various materials to be used for the manufacture of cable and to check that the conductor is complying with quality control.

4) Cables shall have suitable fillers laid up with the conductors to provide a substantially circular cores section before the sheath is applied. Fillers shall be suitable for the operating temperature of the insulation & compatible with the insulation material

4.2.5 CURRENT RATING:

The cables shall have current ratings and derating factors as per relevant Indian Standards. The current ratings shall be based on maximum conductor temperature of 90 deg. C with ambient site condition specified for continuous operating at the rated current.

4.2.6 OPERATION:

Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation, under a power supply system frequency variation of +/- 5 c/s, voltage variation of +10% or-15%. Cables shall have heat and moisture resistance properties; these shall be of type and design with proven record on Distribution Network service.

4.2.7 LENGTH: The cable shall be supplied in wooden drums and the standard drum length shall be as follows- 1x25 mm

2 1000 meters +/- 5%

1x120 mm2 500 meters +/- 5%

Substandard drum length of not less than 100 meters upto a maximum of 5% of the quantities ordered shall be accepted. However substandard drum length upto a maximum of 5% shall be acceptable only in a particular lot offered for inspection

4.2.8 IDENTIFICATION: For identification of individual cores, coloured strips of red, yellow and blue colours respectively shall be used on the cores to identify phase conductors as per relevant ISS.

4.2.7 EMBOSSING: The cable shall be embossed through out the length with the name of the manufacturer and the letters "Property of APDCL., Specification No., voltage grade with cable size and the year of manufacture". The embossing shall be done only on the outer sheath, the distance between any two consecutive embossings shall not be more than 2 Meter. The cable shall also be embossed (clearly visible) for the verification of its length at intervals of 1 Meter say 1,2,3 up to full length.

4.2.8 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The guaranteed technical particulars as detailed in the specification annexure-I shall be guaranteed and a statement of guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished in the format along with the bid without which the Bid shall be treated as Non -Responsive. Immediately after completion of the electrical tests (during routine/acceptance tests), the ends of the cable shall be enclosed by rubber/PVC caps of wall thickness not less than 2.5 mm and then sealed by non hygroscopic material (the cores being suitably insulated from the cap). The cap shall be of robust construction and tight fit, and it shall have the trademark of the manufacturer embossed thereon

5.0. TESTS: 5.1 Type Test:

The material offered shall be fully type tested at independent test laboratories by the Bidder as per the relevant standards but test reports shall not be more than five years old from the date of opening of bid. The bidder shall furnish complete set of following type test reports

156

along with the bid. The bids received without these type test reports shall be treated as Non-responsive. 1. Tests on conductors 2. Test for thickness of insulation and sheath 3. Physical tests for insulation 4. Physical tests for outer sheath 5. Insulation resistance test 6. High voltage test

5.2. Acceptance and Routine test: All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of purchaser's representative.

6.0 INSPECTION:

6.1 The inspection shall be carried out by the purchaser’s representative during manufacture and before dispatch. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the manufacturing programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection. The manufacturer shall grant free access to the purchaser’s representative, at a reasonable time, when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing the equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

6.2 All Acceptance tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the Bidder and purchaser at the time of purchase. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/ routine testing of the bought out items. The supplier shall give 15 days (for local supply)/ 30 days (incase of foreign supply) advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests. Material shall be dispatched only after getting the dispatch authorization from Inspectors representing purchaser, after successful testing. 6.3 If successful type tests have been carried out on the offered design during last five years (counted from the date of tender opening), repetition of type tests is not required. On the other hand, if the offered design is not type tested during last five years, the cable shall be subjected to all type test in accordance with IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 and amendment thereof at recognized test house of repute. All charges/fee/transportation etc. to conduct these tests shall be borne by Contractor. Regular supply of the material shall commence only after successful type testing and dispatch authorization from the competent authority. However, the purchaser reserves the right to get cable type tested at any stage during the currency of contract at his own expenses in any reputed test house. The transportation and arrangement of testing of sample to test laboratory shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 6.4 Routine tests report shall be sent by the manufacturers with their offer for inspection, the following acceptance tests as laid down in the referred ISS (with latest amendments) shall be carried out by the inspecting officer of the APDCL on Samples selected at random as per Appendix `A ‘ in IS-1554 (Part-I) 1988.

1. Tests on conductor Reference to I.S.S. a) Tensile test IS: 8130-1984 b) Conductor resistance test IS: 8130-1984 2. Test on armoring strips: a) Measurement of dimension IS: 3975 – 1979 b) Tensile test IS: 3975 – 1979 c) Elongation test & winding test IS: 3975 – 1979 d) Zinc coating IS: 2633 – 1984 3. Test for thickness of insulation and sheath IS: 5831 – 1984 4. Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath IS:5831 – 1984

157

5. Insulation Resistance Test IS: 5831 – 1984 6. High voltage test at room temperature IS: 1554 (Part-I) – 1988 In addition to above, length/weight check and bending test on one drum per inspection shall also be carried out by the inspecting officers for which contractor will make all necessary arrangements and provide all necessary facilities at his own cost.

7.0 CALBE DRUMS:

The cables shall be supplied in non-returnable substantially lagged wooden drums of heavy construction suitable for transportation by goods train or truck and for storage at site. The wood used for construction of the drum shall be properly seasoned and sound and wood preservative shall be applied to the entire drum. All ferrous parts shall be treated with a suitable rust preventive finish or coating to avoid rusting during transit or storage. The drum shall also conform to specn. No. IS: 10418-1982 with latest amendment thereof.

Each drum shall have the following information marked on it with indelible ink alongwith other important information including technical data: - 1. Property of APDCL & Specification No. – 2. Designation of consignee & destination railway station. 3. Drum Number. 4. Aluminium Core Cable. 5. Cable rating eg. Voltage grade, No. of cores, sizes etc. 6. Height of empty drum. 7. Length of Cable. 8. Gross weight of drum with cable. 9. Year of manufacture.

8.0 PACKING AND TRANSPORT:

All the material covered under this specification shall be adequately packed for transportation by Rail/Road. A layer of waterproof paper shall be applied to the surface of the drums and over the outer cable layer. A clear space of atleast 40 mm shall be left between the cable and the laggings. The packing shall be adequate to protect the cable from damage, in transit and contractor shall be responsible for it and make good at his own expense any and all damages due to improper packing etc.

9.0 VARIATION OF QUANTITY: The supplied quantity can vary within Plus/Minus 1% of the ordered quantity.

158

6.28 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COMPOSITE INSULATORSFOR USE IN 11KV AND 33 KV SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE

Long rod insulator for conductors in tension application at angle/ cut point, the insulator shall

be of boll and socket type or tongue & Clevis type.

1.1 STANDARDS

Sl. No.

Indian Standard

Title International

Standard

1.

Definition, test method and acceptance criteria for composite insulators for a. c. overhead lines above.

IEC:61109

2. IS:731

Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V

IEC:60383

3. IS:2071 Methods of High voltage testing IEC:60060-1

4.

IS:2486

Specification for insulator fitting for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V General Requirements and tests Dimensional Requirements locking devices.

IEC:60120 IEC:60372

5.

Thermal mechanical performances test on string insulator units.

IEC:60575

6. IS:13134

Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions.

IEC:60815

7.

Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type.

IEC:60433

8. Hydrophobicity classification STRI GUIDE 1.92/1

9.

Radio interference characteristics of overhead power lines and high-voltage equipment

CISPR:18-2 PART2

10. IS:8263 Methods of RI test of HV insulators IEC:60437

11.

Standard for insulators- composite distribution dead end type

ANSI c29.13-2000

12. IS:4759

Hot dip Zinc coatings on structural steel & other allied products.

ISO:1459 ISO:1461

13. IS:2629

Recommendation of weight for hot, dip galvanization for iron and steel

ISO:1461(E)

14. IS:6745

Determination of weight of Zinc coatings on zinc coated iron and steel articles

ISO:1460

15. IS:3203

Method of testing of local thickness of electroplated coating

ISO:2178

16. IS:2633

Testing of uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles

17. Standard specification for glass fiber standards ASTM D 578-05

18.

Standard test method for compositional analysis of thermogravimetry

ASTME 1131- 03

19. IS:4699 Specification for refined secondary Zinc

1.2 SERVICE CONDITION

Maximum ambient temperature : *480 C

Minimum ambient temperature : - 50 C

Relative humidity : 0 to 100%

The size of composite insulator, minimum creepage distance and mechanical strength

alongwith hardware fittings shall be as follows.

159

Sl

.

N

o.

Type of

composite

insulator

Nominal

system

voltage

KV

(rms)

Higest

system

voltage KV

(rms)

Visible

discharge

test voltage

KV (rms

Wet power

frequency

withstand

voltage KV

(rms

Impulse

withstand

voltage KV

(rms

Minimum Creepage

distance (mm)

Min. Failing

load KN

Pin ball

shankdi

ameter

mm

Normal &

moderately

polluted

(20mm/ KV)

Hea vily

pollu ted

(25mm/

KV)

i Long rod

insulator

11 12 9 35 75 240 320 45 16

33 36 27 75 170 720 900 45/70**

ii

Post/ pin

insulator

11 12 9 35 75 240 320 5

33 36 27 75 170 720 900 10

Dimensional Tolerance of composite insulators

±(0.04d=1.5) mm when d < 300 mm

±(0.025d=6) mm when d < 300 mm

Inter changeability

The composite insulators including the end fitting connection shall be of standard design

suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make conforming to relevant IEC/IS

standards.

Corona and RI performance

All surfaces shall be clean, smooth without cuts, abrasions or projections. No parts shall be

subjected to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so

designed and manufactured that it shall avoid local corona formation and not generate any

radio interference beyond specified limit under the operating conditions.

Core

It shall be a glass – fiber reinforce epoxy resin rod of high strength (FRP rod). Glass fibers

and resin shall be optimized in the FRP rod. Glass fibers shall be Boron free electrically

corrosion resistant(ECR) glass fiber or boron free E- class and shall exhibit both high

electrical integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion . the matrix of the FRP rod shall be

Hydrolysis resistant. The FRP rod shall be manufactured through pultrusion process . the

FRP rod shall be void free.

Housing (Sheath)

The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicon elastometric compound or

silicon alloy compound of a thickness of 3 mm minimum.

It should protect the FRP rod against environment influences, external pollution and

humidity. It shall be excluded or directly moulded on the core and shall have chemical

bonding with the FRP rod. The strength of the bond shall be greater than the tearing

strength of the polymer. Sheath material in the bulk as in the sealing/ bonding area shall be

free from voids.

Weather sheds

The composite polymer weather sheds made of silicon elastomeric compound of silicon

alloy shall be firmly bounded to the sheath, vulcanized to the sheath or moulded as part of

the sheath and shall be free from imperfections. The weather sheds should have silicon

content of minimum 30% by weight. The strength of the weather sheds to sheath interface

shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The interface, if any, between

sheds and sheath (housing) shall be free from voids.

End Fittings

160

End fittings transmit then mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of spheroid

graphite cast iron, malleable cast iron or forged steel or aluminium alloy. They shall be

connected to the rod by means of a controlled compression technique. The gap between

fitting and sheath shall be sealed by a flexible silicon elastomeric compound or silicon alloy

compound sealant. System of attachment of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior

sealing performance between housing, i.e. seamless sheath and metal connection. The

sealing must be moisture proof.

The dimensions of end fittings of Insulators shall be in accordance with the standard

dimensions stated in IS:2486/IEC:60120

Equipment Marking

5.1 Each insulator unit shall be legibly and marked with the following details as per IEC-61109

(a) Month & Year of manufacture

(b) Min. Failing load/ guaranteed mechanical strength in kilo Newton followed by the word

KN to facilitate easy identification.

(c) Manufacture’s name / trade mark.

5.2 One 10mm thick ring or 20mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on the

end fitting of each composite long rod of [particular strength in case of 33 KV insulators

for identification in case both type of insulators are procured by the utility. The paint shall

be not have deteriorating effect on the insulator performance, following codes shall be

used as identification mark:

For 45 KN Long unit : Blue

For 70 KN Long unit : Red

6.0 Bid Drawings

6.1 The full description and illustration of the materials offered.

6.2 The bidder furnish alongwith the bid the outline drawing ( 3 copies ) of each insulator unit

including a cross sectional view of the long rod insulator unit. The drawing shall include but

not be limited to the following information.

(a) Long rod diameter with manufacturing tolerance.

(b) Minimum creepage distance with positive tolerance.

(c) Protected creepage distance.

(d) Eccentricity of the long rod unit

(i) Axial run out

(ii) Radial run out

(e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics

(f) Size and weight of ball and socket/ tongue & cleaves

(g) Weight of composite long rod units

(h) Materials (i) Identification Mark (ii) Manufacturer’s catalogue number

7.0 Type tests Sl.No. Description of type test Test procedure / standard

1. Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage test As per IEC 61109 (Clause 6.1)

2. Wet power frequency test As per IEC 61109 (Clause 6.2)

3. Mechanical load- time test As per IEC 61109 (Clause 6.4)

4. Radio Interference test As per IEC 61109 (Clause 6.5) revised

5. Recovery of Hydrophobicity test Annexure-B This test may be repeated every 3 yrs by the manufacturer

6. Chemical composition test for silicon content Annexure-B or any other test method acceptable to the owner

7. Brittle fracture resistance test Annexure-B

161

8.0 Acceptance (Sample) Tests

8.1 For Composite Insulators

A Verification of dimensions Clause 7.2 IEC:61109

B Verification of the locking system ( if possible) Clause 7.3 IEC:61109

C Galvanizing Test IS 2633 / IS 6745

D Verification of the specified mechanical load Clause 7.4 IEC:61109

8.2 Routine Tests

Sl. No. Description Standard

1. Identification of marking As per IEC:61109 Clause 8.1

2. Visual Inspection As per IEC:61109 Clause 8.2

3. Mechanical routine test As per IEC:61109 Clause 8.3

8.3 Tests During Manufacture

Following tests shall also be carried our

A Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing

B Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle

inspection for malleable castings

C Chemical analysis, hardness and magnetic particle inspection for forigngs

162

TECHNLCAL PARICULARS OF COMPOSIT POLYMERIC INSULATOR FOR 11 KV , 45 KN ( T & C ) TYPE

S n Description Unit 11KV , 45 KN , T& C type

1. Type of Insulator Composite polymeric Insulators

2. Standard according to which the Insulator manufacture and tested

IES-61109 with up to date amendments

3. Name of material used in manufacture Of the insulator with class/grade

Silicon/ Polyolefin material

(a) Material of core (FRP rod) i) E-glass or ECR- glass ii) Boron content

ECR glass boron content free

(b) Material of housing &Weather sheds Silicon content by weight

36%

(c) ( material of end fitting ) Hot dip galvanized high strength steel

(d) Sealing compound for end fittings Silicon based sealants

4. Color Grey/ Red

5. Electrical characteristics

(a) Normal system voltage KV(rms ) 11 KV

(b) Highest system voltage KV(rms) 12 KV

(c) Dry power Frequency withstand voltage KV(rms ) 35 KV

(d) Wet power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms ) 35 KV

(e) Dry flashover voltage KV(rms) >35KV

(f) Wet flashover voltage KV(rms) >35KV

(g) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage a) Positive b)Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

75KV 75 KV

(h) Dry lighting impulse flashover voltage c) positive d) Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

95KV 95 KV

(i) R/V at 1MHz when energized at 10KV/30KV(rms) under dry condition

Microvolt As per IES specification

(j) Creepage distance (mm) mm 320 mm

6. Mechanical characteristics

(a) Minimum failing load KN 45KN

7. Dimension of insulator As per attached drawing No.COM/PIN/33

(i) Weight Kg 0.90 Kg (Approx)

(ii) Dia of FRP rod mm 16 mm

(iii) Length of FRP rod mm As per drawing attached

(iv) Die. Of Weather sheds mm As per drawing attached

(v) Thickness of housing mm (3mm-Min)

(vi) Dry arc distance mm As per drawing attached

Dimension drawing of insulator including weight with clearances min weight enclosed

Provided

8. Method of fixing of sheds to housing (specify single moulder Modular construction moulding )

Modular Design

9. No. of Weather sheds As per drawing attached

10. Types of sheds As per drawing attached

(i) Aerodynamic Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs -------------------------

11. Packing details Each insulator in poly bag then packed in master carton- 7Ply

(a) Types of packing Corrugated Bodies

(b) No. of insulator each pack One master carton box containing 16Pcs

(c) Gross weight of package 17 KG ( approx. )

12. Any other particulars which the bidder may like to give

-----------------------

163

TECHNLCAL PARICULARS OF COMPOSIT POLYMERIC INSULATOR FOR 11 KV , 5 KN PIN INSULATOR TYPE

Sl. No Description Unit 11KV , 5 KN , PIN INSULATOR

1. Type of Insulator Composite polymeric Insulators

2. Standard according to which the Insulator manufacture and tested

IES-61109 with up to date amendments

3. Name of material used in manufacture Of the insulator with class/grade

Silicon/ Polyolefin material

(a) Material of core (FRP rod) i) E-glass or ECR- glass ii) Boron content

ECR glass boron content free

(b) Material of housing &Weather sheds Silicon content by weight

36%

(c) ( material of end fitting ) Hot dip galvanized high strength steel

(d) Sealing compound for end fittings Silicon based sealants

4. Color Grey/ Red

5. Electrical characteristics

(a) Normal system voltage KV(rms ) 11 KV

(b) Highest system voltage KV(rms) 12 KV

(c) Dry power Frequency withstand voltage KV(rms ) 35 KV

(d) Wet power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms ) 35 KV

(e) Dry flashover voltage KV(rms) >35KV

(f) Wet flashover voltage KV(rms) >35KV

(g) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage a) Positive b)Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

75KV 75 KV

(h) Dry lighting impulse flashover voltage c) positive d) Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

95KV 95 KV

(i) R/V at 1MHz when energized at 10KV/30KV(rms) under dry condition

Microvolt As per IES specification

(j) Creepage distance (mm) mm 320 mm

6. Mechanical characteristics

(a) Minimum failing load KN 5KN

7. Dimension of insulator As per attached drawing No.COM/PIN/33

(i) Weight Kg 1.0 Kg (Approx)

(ii) Dia of FRP rod mm 16 mm

(iii) Length of FRP rod mm As per drawing attached

(iv) Die. Of Weather sheds mm As per drawing attached

(v) Thickness of housing mm (3mm-Min)

(vi) Dry arc distance mm As per drawing attached

Dimension drawing of insulator including weight with clearances min weight enclosed

Provided

8. Method of fixing of sheds to housing (specify single moulder Modular construction moulding )

Modular Design

9. No. of Weather sheds As per drawing attached

10. Types of sheds As per drawing attached

(i) Aerodynamic Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs -------------------------

11. Packing details Each insulator in poly bag then packed in master carton- 7Ply

(a) Types of packing Corrugated Bodies

(b) No. of insulator each pack One master carton box containing 16 Pcs

(c) Gross weight of package 16 KG ( approx. )

12. Any other particulars which the bidder may like to give

-----------------------

164

6.29 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STAY SET (HT )

1. Scope: This specification covers the design, manufacture testing at manufacturer's works,

transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of the Stay Sets (HT) required from the distribution lines at designated locations.

2.0 Standard: All the materials of stay sets shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the latest

edition of the relevant Indian or British Standard specification except in so far as they are modified this specification.

3.0 Design Consideration: Stay Rods shall be Galvanised and shall be of circular Cross-section with bow, thimble, nuts

and bolts. The Rods shall be threaded at one end up to a minimum of 30 cm length and shall be complete with Galvanised M.S. Anchor Plates with all necessary accessories. All parts shall be heavily galvanised.

4.0 Testing: Type and Routine Tests should be carried on different components of each stay sets as per

relevant Indian Standard specification and certified copies of the above should be submitted along with the tender.

5.0 Schedule Requirement: Stay sets complete with Thimble bow stay Rod/Anchor plate with nuts etc. and made of

Rolled mild Steel Rod and plates as per detailed given below: a) Anchor Plate:

I) Thickness not below 5 mm. II) Size not below 300 mmX300 mm with smooth edges (for HT) III) Well galvanised IV) Materials M.S. Rolled plate V) About 20 mm square hole at centre for locking the plate with the Anchor Rod (for HT)

b) Anchor Rod: i. Length 1800 mm or above ii. Threaded length 30 cm or above iii. Diameter 18 mm or above (for HT) iv. Anchor plate and head: square size 30mm X 30mm with thickness 25 mm

having matching square size shank for locking the Anchor plate. v. One ratched lock nuts, grooves must match the grooves at bow flange vi. One check nut. vii. Materials H.S.

viii. Component well galvanised with extra care for the threaded portion. ix. Both lock and check nuts should be matching to the Anchor Rod thread such

that punching of thread after assembly at site safeguards them against removal.

c) Thimble: The match bow diameter and bend should be well galvanised. d) Bow: Rod diameter 12mm/16mm or above overall length 35cm/40cm or above.

Flange with well formed locking grooves matching the locking nut, bow ends will be riveted securely with the flange. All items to be galvanised

6.0 Inspection: All tests and inspections shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise

agreed by the purchaser and the manufacturers at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser or third party nominee, all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserves the right to have the test carried out at his cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of the materials supplied.

7.0 Marking The equipments shall be marked with name of manufacturer, year and name of project.

165

6.30 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. STAY WIRE

1.0 Scope The specification covers design, manufacturing and testing, transporting to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of G.I. Stay Wire 7/10SWG and 7/14SWG.

2.0 Materials.

The wire shall be manufactured from steel, made by any suitable process and shall not contain sulphur and phosphorus exceeding 0.065 percent each.

The wires shall be coated with Zinc Grade Zn 98 of IS:209-1966 The general requirements for the supply of Galvanized stay strand shall be in accordance with IS:1387-1967 3.0 Construction 3.1 Grades: The wire shall be of Grade-I and tensile strength range 45 up to and including Kg/mm 3.2 The Galvanized stay strand shall be of 7/2 mm and 7/3.15 mm. the lay of the strands shall be of the length of 7/2

mm and Tables-I of IS: 2141-1963. the wires shall be so stranded together that when and evenly distributed pull is applied at the end of the completed strand each wire will take equal share of the pull.

3.3 The length of the strand which may be supplied without joints in the individual wires comprising it, depend on the length of wire which may be carried by the bobbin in a normal stranding machine. The normal lengths of strand which shall be supplied without joints in the individual wires, excluding welds made in the rod before drawing shall be as given below. The lengths may be exceeded by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

Diameter of wire in strand Normal length without joints of weld 3.15 mm 1000 M 2.0 mm 3000 M 3.4 In cases where joints are permitted, they shall be made by welding of brazing joints in the same wire shall be

separated by a length of not less than that shown in 3.3 and joints in different wires in a strand shall not be less than 20 M apart.

4.0 Freedom from Defects : 4.1 Each coil shall be warranted to contain no weld joint or splice other than in the rod before it is drawn and those

permitted in 3.4. The wire shall be circular and shall be free scale, irregularities imperfections flaws splits and other defects. The Zinc coating shall be smooth, even the bright.

5.0 Tests: 5.1 Chemical Analysis: Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, the chemical analysis

be carried out. 5.2 Tensile Test: The wire when tested in accordance with IS: 1521-1960, on gauge length of 100 mm shall have the

minimum tensile strength specified in Tables 1 of IS : 2141/1968 according to the grade of the wire. 5.2.1 The tensile strength of the finalised strand shall be not less tI~an 93 percent of the aggregate of the single

wires. 5.3 Delivery test: The wire shall be subjected to the wrapping test in accordance with IS : 1755/1961. When

wrapped eight times round its own diameter and on being subsequently strengthened the wire shall not break or split.

5.3.1 Coating test: The uniformity of Zinc coating shall be tested by the method specified in IS : 2633/1964. The wire shall withstand the number or dips as specified in IS : 4826-1968.

6.0 Marking: 6.1 Each coil shall be provided with a label, fixed firmly on the inneJ part of the coil, bearing 'the following

information. a. Manufacturer's name or trade mark b. Lot number and coil number c. A brief description and quality of the materials. d. Weight and e. Any other particulars specified by the purchaser f. Name of the project ABY.

6.2 The label may also be marked with the ISI certification mark. 7.0 Inspection:

The test should be carried out in presence of the inspecting officer deputed by purchaser or third party nominee and the test should be in conformity with relevant IS .

166

6.31 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HT GUY INSULATOR

1.0 Scope This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of the strain type porcelain Guy Insulator used in distribution overhead power lines.

2.0 Standard This insulators shall comply with Indian Standard specification IS: 5500/1969 and as amended from time to time except where they conflict with the requirements in this specification.

Offers conforming to any other internationally accepted standard which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned will be acceptable.

3.0 General Requirements This porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smooth glazed.

The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses to expansion and contraction at any part of the insulator shall not load to its deterioration.

The glaze, unless otherwise specified, shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover the entire porcelain surface parts except those areas that serves as supports during firing or area otherwise required to be left unglazed.

4.0 Insulator Characteristics

The Guy Strain Insulators shall have the electrical and mechanical characteristics as shown below:

H.T. Strain Type Porcelain Guy Insulator 1) Length 140 mm 2) Diameter 85 mm 3) Cable hole dia 25 mm + 1.5 4) Minimum failing load 88 KN 5) Creepage distance 48 mm 6) Dry one minute power frequency withstand 27 KV (rms) voltage 7) Wet one minute power frequency withstand 13 KV (rms) voltage

5.0 Test All insulators shall comply the following test as per IS : 5300 A) Routine test: The following shall be carried out as., routine test.

a) Visual Examination Every insulators shall be visually examined. The insulators shall be free from physical

distortion of shape and defects, and thoroughly verified and smoothly glazed. They should be free from cracks or any other defects likely to be prejudicial to the satisfactory performance in service.

b) Type test: The following shall constitute the type test and those shall be conducted in the order given

below:

i. Visual examination ii. Verification of dimensions iii. Temperature cycle test iv. Dry one minute power frequency voltage withstand test

167

v. Wet one minute power frequency voltage withstand test vi. Mechanical strength test vii. Porosity test.

The number of samples for type test are to be agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.

c) Acceptance Test (to be conducted in the following order) i. Verification of Dimensions ii. Temperature cycle test iii. Mechanical strength test iv. Porosity test

The number of samples for acceptance test shall be in accordance to IS: 5300.

d) Type test certificate from National Test House/ Govt. recognized institutions/ Govt. recognized public Testing Laboratories are also to be submitted along with the offer, failing which the offer is liable for rejection.

6.0 Marking Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to shown the following:

a.Name of trade mark of the manufacturer b.Year of manufacture and name of project ABY 2010-11

Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing. Insulators may also be marked with the ISI certification mark.

7.0 Inspection All tests and inspections shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise

agreed by the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser or the third party nominee, all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy that materials are being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser reserves the right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of materials supplied.

8.0 Drawing Drawing specifically showing all dimensions is to be submitted along with technical bid.

168

6.32 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON EARTH PIPE

1 Scope

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of the cast iron earth pipe for use on line & substation as earthing pipe

2 Standard The Earth pipe shall comply with the Indian Standard specification IS: 1729/1964 and as amended from time to time except where they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification.

e) Manufacture

Metal used for the manufacture of pipes shall be good quality cast iron. Casting shall be stripped with all precautions necessary to avoid wrapping and shrinkage defects. They shall be free from defects which effect the use of castings. By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, minor defects may be rectified. Pipes shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or machines. Bolts, buts & washers shall be made of Steel and well galvanized. The bolts shall be of 200 mm length, 16 mm diameter with 2(two) nos. plain washers, one locknut & one check nut. Threaded length of the bolts should be 50 mm.

f) Sizes

Dimensions of pipe & socket shall be conform to the sizes shown below and as per drawing enclosed:

Nominal length of the pipe with socket 1800 mm Nominal diameter of pipe 100 mm External diameter of pipe 110 mm Thickness of pipe 5 mm Projection of spigot bead 3 mm Width of spigot bead 15 mm Internal dia of socket 129 mm Thickness of socket 6 mm Internal depth of socket 70 mm Internal Radius of socket 5 mm Width of grooves of socket 10 mm External dia of grooves socket 155 mm Depth of grooves of socket 5 mm Nominal weight of pipe (Exclusive of ear) 21.67 Kg

g) Tolerance

The Tolerance of the 100 mm nominal diameter pipe shall be ±3.5 mm The Tolerance of pipe thickness shall be - 15 percent The Tolerance of length of the pipe shall be - ± 20mm The Tolerance of weight of the pipe shall be - 10 Percent

Pipes weighing more than the nominal weight may be accepted provided they comply in every other respect with the requirements of this standard.

h) TEST

6.33 Hammer test: Each pipe when tested for soundness by striking with a light hand hammer

shall emit a clear ringing sound.

6.34 Hydraulic test : If so required by the purchaser, pipe shall be tested hydraulically at a

pressure of 0.4 kg/cm2 without showing any sign of leakage, sweating or other defect of any

kind. The pressure shall be applied internally and shall be maintained for not less than 15

seconds. The tests shall be conducted before coating of pipe.

169

7 Inspection

All tests and inspection shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise

agreed by the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall

afford the inspector representing the purchaser or third party nominee all reasonable

facilities without charge to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per

specification. The purchaser reserves the right to have the test carried out at his cost by an

independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of materials supplied.

All incoming consignment shall be checked at stores.

8 Coating

Normally pipes, unless specially ordered, shall be supplied free of coating on surfaces.

9 Marking

Each pipe shall have the Trade mark of the manufacturer and nominal size suitably marked

on it. The pipe marked with the ISI certificate mark, shall be preferred. The equipments shall

be marked with name of manufacturer, year and name of project.

170

6.33 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE

a) Scope This specification covers the manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of Galvanised Iron Wire of sizes 4 mm and 5 mm diameter.

2.0 General requirements

It relating to the supply of mild steel wire shall be as per IS: 1387/1967 and the wire shall be drawn from the wire rods conforming to IS: 7887/1975. The requirements for chemical composition for the wires shall conform to IS:7887/1975. Mild steel wire for General Engineering purpose shall be of following sizes: I) 4mm - diameter (8 SWG) II) 5mm - diameter (6 SWG) Tolerance permitted on the diameter of wire shall be as per Table -1 of IS:280/1978.

3.0 Climatic Conditions

The cross arms should be suitable for the climatic condition mentioned In these bidding documents:

4.0 Mechanical Properties 4.1 Tensile Test: Tensile strength of wire when tested in accordance with IS: 1521-1972, shall be within the limits given in Table-2 of IS: 280/1978. 4.2 Wrapping Test: Wires shall be subjected wrapping test in accordance with IS: 1755-1961. The

wire shall withstand without breaking or splitting. being wrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened.

5.0 Surface finish

a. The wire shall have galvanized finishes. The galvanized coating of steel wire shall conform to the requirements for anyone of the types of coatings given in IS: 4826-1968 as per agreement with the purchaser.

b. The coating test for finishes other than galvanized, copper coated or tinned shall be subject to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

c. Unless otherwise agreed to the method of drawing representative samples of the material and the criteria for conforming shall be as prescribed in Appendix (A) of IS: 280/1978.

d. All finished wires shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions specified. The wire shall be sound, free from splits, surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges and other harmful surface defects.

e. Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitably wrapped.

6.0 Marking

Each coil of wire shall be marked legibly with the finish size of wire, lot number and trade mark of the name of the manufacturer. The material may also be marked with the ISI certification mark and name of the project ABY.

7.0 INSPECTION

Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

171

6.34 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 kV DANGER NOTICE PLATE

1 SCOPE:

This specification covers Danger Notice Plates to be displayed in accordance with rule No.35 of Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS.

Unless otherwise modified in this specification, Danger Notice [Plates shall comply with IS:-1982 or the latest version thereof.

3 DIMENSIONS.

Size of Danger Notice Plates as follows are recommended For display at 33KV installation - 250 x 200 mm. The comers of the plate shall be rounded off. The location of fixing holes as shown in Figs. 1 to 4 is provisional and can be modified to suit the requirements at site.

4 LETTERINGS

All letterings shall be centrally spaced. The dimensions of the letters, figures and their respective position shall be as shown in figs. 1 to 4. The size of letters in the words in each language and spacing between them shall be so chosen that these are uniformly written in the space earmarked for them.

5 LANGUAGES

I. Under Rule No. 35 of Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, the owner of every medium, and extra high voltage installation is required to affix permanently in a conspicuous position a danger notice in Hindi or English and in addition, in local language, with the sign of skull and bones.

II. The type and size of lettering to be done in Hindi is indicated in the specimen danger notice plates shown in fig: 2 and 4 and those in English are shown in fig. 1 and 3.

III. Adequate space has been provided in the specimen danger notice plates for having the letterings in local language for the equivalent of Danger, 33000 ‘Volts’

6 MATERIAL AND FINISH

The plate shall be made from mild sheet of at least 1.6 mm thick and vitreous enameled white, with letters, figures and the conventional skull and cross-bones in signal red colour (refer 1S: 5-1978) on the front side. The rear side of the plate shall also be enameled.

7.0 TESTS. The following tests shall be carried out. i) Visual examination as per 18:2551-1982. ii) Dimensional check as per IS: 2551-1982. iii) Test for weather proofness as per IS: 8709-1977 (or its latest version).

8.0 MARKING.

Maker's name and trade mark and the purchaser's name shall be marked in such a manner and position on the plates that it does not interfere with the other information.

9.0 PACKING.

The plates shall be packed in wooden crates suitable for rough handling and acceptable for

rail/road.

172

SECTION -7

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL

PARTICULARS

173

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PSC POLES [9.75M ]

(To be filled in by the bidder)

SL NO

ITEM PARAMETERS

Name and address of manufacturer

1 Type of Pole 9.75 M PSC pole

2 Applicable Standard

3 Length of pole

4 Depth of Plantation

5 Bottom Depth

6 Top Depth

7 Breath

8 Diameter of pre-stressing wire

9 No. of tensioned wire per pole

10 Minimum Ultimate Tensile strength of 4 MM HT wire

11 Minimum initial pull of 4 mm wire

12 Spacing HT wires

13 Quantity of HT wire/ pole

14 Min Quantity of cement

15 Quantity of Stone chips

16 Quantity of sand

17 Link & spiral

18 M.S spiral

19 Maximum Aggregate size

20

21 Total weight per pole

22 Minimum clear cover

23 Factor of safety

24 Concrete grade

25 Ultimate Load

26 Earthing shall be provided by 4 MM dia. Galvanized iron wire embedded in concrete

27 one marks to be provided at ground level

28 28 days cube strength of concrete ( Min) as per IS : 456/2000.

174

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

(To be filled in by the bidder)

1. Name of the Manufacturer

2. Country of Origin

3. Manufacture’s type and Designation

4. Number of poles

5. Rated Voltage (KV)

6. Standards Applicable

7. Normal Current Rating

a)IEC conditions

b)Site conditions

8. Frequency in cycles per second

9. Making capacity in peak kilo-amperes

10. Breaking capacity

a) Symmetrical in KA

b) A-Symmetrical in KA

11. Three second short time current rating

12. Total Break time in milli second

a) At 10% rated interrupting capacity

b) At 30% rated interrupting capacity

c) At 60% rated interrupting capacity

d) At 100% rated interrupting capacity

13. Maximum temperature rise above ambient

a) Live parts (Degree C)

b) Enclosure (Degree C)

14. Whether suitable for three phase auto reclosing

15. Breaker

a) Opening time in milli – seconds with no current

b) Opening time in Milli-seconds at rated breaking current

c) Arcing time in milli-seconds

d) Time in milli-seconds from Arc Extinction to contact fully open

e) Dead time in mill-seconds for three phase reclosing

f) Time in milli-second

j) From circuit energized to contacts make

ii) From contacts make to contacts fully closed

16. 1.2/50 microsecond lightening impulsive with stand voltage to earth (in KV peak)

17. One minute power frequency dry. Withstand voltage to earth (in KV rms)

18. One minute power frequency wet withstand voltage to earth (in KV rms)

19. First pole to clear factor

20. Out of phase switching capability of the breaker

21. Rated out of phase breaking current

22. Switchgear component load requirement

a) Circuit breaker

i) Spring charging motor

ii) Close coils

iii) Open coils

iv) Heaters

b) Control cubicle

i) Relays

175

ii) Heaters

iii) Indications

c) Other requirements

23. Maximum line charging current that the breaker can interrupt (in Amperes)

24. Maximum over voltage developed while breaking line charging current

a) Supply slide (KV)

b) Line side (KV)

25. Maximum shunt capacitor bank switching capacity of breaker (single bank MVA)

26. Maximum cable charging current breaking capacity (in Amps) and corresponding over voltage (in KV)

a) Supply side

b) Line side

27. Short line fault current breaking capacity (KV)

28. Maximum over voltage developed while breaking magnetizing current of transformer (KV)

29. Rated operating duty cycle

30. Minimum clearance in air

a) Between poles (mm)

b) Between live part (mm) to earth

c) Between live part to ground level (mm)

31. Creepage distance

a) To ground (mm)

b) Between terminals (mm)

32. Protected creepage distance (mm)

33. Number for breaks in series per pole

34. Type of main contacts

35. Type of arcing contacts

36. a) contact silver plated or not

b) Thickness of silver plating

c) Contact pressure

d) Electric contract resistance at 20 degree C (ohm)

37. Type of device, if any used to limit rate of rise of restricting voltage

38. Number and type of spare auxiliary switches provided

a) Those closed when breaker is closed

b) Those open when breaker is closed

39. Rated voltage of auxiliary contacts

40. Material of auxiliary contact

41. Current carrying capacity of auxiliary contacts

42. Type and make of vacuum interrupter

43. Dynamic load to be transferred to foundation

a) Co-Operation (Compressive)

b) Co-operation (Tensile)

44. Guaranteed number of operations

a) With no load current

b) With full fault current

c)Those adjustable with respect to position of main contact

45. Over all dimensions

i) Height (mm)

ii) Width (mm)

iii) Length (mm)

46. Weight of complete circuit breaker for foundation design

47. Seismic level for which the breaker is designed

a) Horizontal acceleration

176

b) Vertical acceleration

48. Height of supporting structure

49. Material of supporting structure

50. Noise level of circuit breaker at 5 meters distance

51. Whether the circuit breaker is fixed trip or trip-free

52. Short circuit type test report

53. Porcelain bushings

i) Type

ii) Dry flashover voltage

iii) Wet flashover voltage

iv) Dry 60-S withstand test voltage

v) Wet 80-S withstand test voltage

vi) Under-oil flashover or puncture withstand test voltage (power frequency)

vii) Full wave impulse withstand test voltage

viii) Creepage distance in air (total) mm

ix) Protected creepage distance (mm)

x) Whether the bushing is suitable for outdoor installation and extreme humid conditions

xi) Weight of the assembled bushing (Kg)

xii) Whether terminal connection for all bushing included in scope of supply

xiii) Test (routine/type) to be conducted on the bushing

xiv) Bushing, clearance in (mm)

a) Between phases

b) Between phase to ground

xv) Performance guarantee

177

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS 3333 kkVV CCOONNTTRROOLL AANNDD RREELLAAYY PPAANNEELLSS

FFOORR FFEEEEDDEERR (To be filled in by the bidder)

Technical Particulars M.W.

Meters Volt Meters Ammeters

A. METERS

a i) Type of instrument

aii] Name of manufacturer

b) Size

c) Whether magnetically shielded or not

d) Limits of error in the effective range

e) Scale length

f) Short time overload capacity

g) VA burden

i) Current coil

ii) Potential coil

h) BSS grade accuracy

i) Description leaflet reference Nos. submitted

B. STATIC ENERGY METERS

a) Rating of current coil & potential coil

b) Continuous withstand capacity of the above coils

c) Limits of error at unity pf and

i) 125/25% rated current

ii) 10% rated current

iii) 5% rated current

d) Limits of error at 0.5 pf (lag) and

i) 125/25% rated current

ii) 10% rated current

e) Power losses per element

i) Current coil

ii) Potential coil

f) Minimum running current (percent of marked current)

g) Variation of voltage to cause a change of not more than 1% at any load from full to 1/10

h) Variation of air temperatures maximum temperature co-efficient of error in percent per Deg.C at

i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

i) Variation dur of heating by main current in percent at

i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

j) Variation of frequency percent error due to 5% variation in frequency

i) At unity pf

ii) At 0.5 pf (lag)

k) Overload capacity

i) Continuous

ii) ½ second

l) Excess voltage permissible fr 30 minutes

178

m) Type of register mechanism with register constant

n] Type of instrument

o] Name of manufacturer

C. PROTECTIVE RELAYS

C1 . Non-directional over current relays

a i) Type of instrument

aii] Name of manufacturer

b) Current coil range

c) Tap range

d) Power consumption

i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

c) Time of operation at maximum time dial setting at

i) 5 times tap setting current

ii) 10 times tap setting current

f) Type of characteristic

g) Whether draw out type or not

h) Trip contact rating Amps

i) Whether seal in contact provided or not

2. Non-directional earth fault relays

a) Type

b) Current coil range

c) Tap range

d) VA burden

i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

e) Power consumption

i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

f) time of operation at maximum time dial setting at

i) 5 times tap setting current

ii) 10 times tap setting current

g) Whether draw out type or not

h) Trip contact rating Amps

i) Whether seal in contact provided or not

C2 Differential Relay Details as above to be provided along with manufacturers leaflets

D. ANNUNCIATIONS

a) Type of annunciation system offered

b) Make of the system

c] Any deviation from specification to be stated.

c) Sequence and scheme of operation of the annunciation system (Drawings shall be enclosed) together with details of components involved.

E. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

a) Response time

b) Burden for pre-warm up facility per window

c) No. of lamps per window

d) Burden per window

i) With flashing

179

ii) With steady light

iii) During off condition

f) Whether annunciation system is suitable for 110 V DC supply

F. GENERAL

a) Panel sheet thickness

b) Over all dimensions

i) Width

ii) Depth

iii) Height

c) Total weight of panel

d) Internal finish

e) External finish

180

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33KV ISOLATOR

(To be filled in by the bidder)

1.1 Supplier’s name & address

1.2 Manufacturer's name & address

1.3 Guaranteed delivery schedule

1.4 System Voltage

1.5 Maximum permissible service voltage

1.6 Continuous current rating

1.7 Short time current rating

i) for 1 sec

ii) for 3 sec

1.8 Rated peak short circuit current

1.9 Rated peak short circuit current of earthing blade

1.10 Temperature with corresponding to

i) Maximum current rating at 60 deg. C ambient temperature

ii) Short time current rating

1.11 Fault current which can be made by earth switch

1.12 Maximum current that can be safely interrupted between equi-potential busbars

1.13 Clearance in air (minimum) in mm

i) between phases

ii) between live parts and earth

iii) distance between centres of outer stacks of insulators

1.14 Power frequency withstand voltage test for complete assembled switches

i) Against ground

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

ii) Across open contacts

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

iii) Between phases

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

1.15 Particulars of main contacts in fixed (main and earthing switch) and moving contacts (main and earthing switch)

i) Type

ii) Material

iii) Surface treatment

iv) contact area

v) Contact pressure

1.16 Current density of minimum cross section of switch blade

181

1.17 No. of operations without need for inspection

1.18 Type and materials of connectors

1.19 Whether arcing contacts provided and if yes, give materials used

1.20 Whether adjustable gap type arcing horns provided and if yes, give materials used

1.21 Insulators

i) Creepage distance of insulators in mm

ii) Bending strength of insulators in KN

1.22 location and type of bearings

1.23 Weight of complete isolators with insulator

i) With earthing blade, Kg

ii) Without earthing blade, Kg

1.24 Operating efforts required for manual operation, Kg

1.25 Type of interlocking between isolating switch and earth switch

1.26 Details of mounting (centre to centre)

1.27 Guaranteed weight of mounting structure including nuts and bolts in Kg

1.28 Auxiliary contacts

i) Normally Open (NO) contacts

ii) Normally Close(NC) contacts

1.29 Auxiliary DC Supply

182

Guaranteed technical particulars of 33kV Current Transformer

(To be filled in by the bidder)

1.0 General

1.1 Manufacturer’s name and address

2.0 Current Transformer

2.1 Standard applicable

2.2 Type

2.3 Rated voltage kV

2.4 Rated frequency Hz

2.5 No of cores

2.6 Rated primary current

2.7 Rated secondary current

2.8 Turns ratio

2.9 Rated output VA

2.10 Accuracy class

2.11 Accuracy limit factor

2.12 Instrument security factor

2.13 Maximum Knee point voltage ,V

2.14 Max. secondary resistance Ohm

2.15 Exciting current, mA

i) At knee point voltage

ii) at 50% of knee voltage

iii) at 50% of knee voltage( at highest ratio tab)

2.16 Rated output at different tap, VA

2.17

One minute power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms) i) Primary winding ii) Secondary winding

2.18 Standard impulse withstanding voltage of primary winding kV(peak)

2.19 Creepage distance mm

2.20 Rated thermal current A

2.21 Rated short time current kA

2.22 Rated time for above current(sec)

2.23 Rated dynamic current kA(peak)

2.24 Class of insulation

2.25 Rated continuous current temp. rise over ambient degree

2.26

Time period for which secondary winding can be left open when rated primary current is flowing in primary winding

2.27 Quantity of oil litre

2.28 Total weight Kg

2.29 Whether PRV provided

183

Guaranteed technical particulars of 33kV Potential Transformer (To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl no.

Specification

1.0 Manufacturer’s name and address

1.1 Potential Transformer

1.2 Standard applicable

1.3 Type

1.4 Rated voltage kV

1.5 Rated frequency Hz

1.6

One minute power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms) i) Primary winding ii) Secondary winding

1.7 Standard impulse withstanding voltage of primary winding kV(peak)

1.8 Creepage distance mm

1.9 Temperature at 1.2 times rated burden in degree C

1.10 Quantity of oil litre

1.11 Total weight Kg

1.12 Hermetically scaling arrangements

1.13 Transformation ratio

1.14

1.15 Rated burden VA

1.16 Accuracy class

1.17 Maximum ratio error with rated burden and at 5% normal voltage

184

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ALL ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR (AAAC)

(To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl.No. Description Unit Particulars

1.0 Maker’s name & Address

2.0 Conductor size and Code

3.0 IS Standard applicable

4.0 Wire diameter in mm mm

5.0 Diameter of complete conductor in mm mm

6.0 Number of strands Nos.

7.0 Sectional area of alloy Aluminum mm²

8.0 Total sectional area mm²

9.0 Particulars of Raw Materials

9.1 Aluminum

a) Minimum Purity of Aluminum %

9.2 Zinc %

a) Minimum Purity of Zinc

9.3.0 Aluminum Strands after stranding

9.3.1 Diameter

a) Nominal Mm

b) Maximum Mm

c) Minimum Mm

9.3.2 Minimum breaking Load Strand kN

9.3.3 Maximum Resistance of 1 M length Ohm

10.0 Galvanizing

a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per uncoated wire

surface gm/m²

b) Minimum number of one minute dips galvanized

strand can withstand in the test Nos.

c) Minimum number of twists in a gauge length times

dia of wire which the strand can withstand in the

torsion test (after stranding)

Nos.

11.0 AAAC stranded conductor

11.1 UTS of conductor kN

11.2 Lay ratio of conductor Max

a) 1st layer

b) 2nd

layer

11.3 D.C resistance of conductor at 20°C Ohm/Km

11.4 Standard length of conductor M

11.5 Continuous current rating at 75°C (Enclose

supporting calculations)

185

11.6 Final modulus of elasticity

11.7 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion

11.8 Strand

a) Standard diameter mm

b) Minimum

c) Maximum

d) Cross-Sectional area of Nominal diameter wire mm²Nos.

e) Weight in Kg/KM

f) Minimum breaking load

Before Stranding

After stranding

Kg/kN

g) Coefficient of linear expansion

11.9 Joints in strands

a) Aluminum Alloy

b) Method of making joint

c) Ultimate tensile Strength of Joint

12.0 Maximum single length of conductor that can be

manufactured if required for single stretch Meter

13.0 Tolerance of standard length of conductor %

14.0 Direction of lay for outside layer

14.1 Linear mass of the conductor

a) Standard Kg/KM

b) Minimum Kg/KM

c) Maximum Kg/KM

15.0 No. of cold pressure butt welding available at

works

16.0 Standard according to which the conductor will be

manufactured and tested

a) Certification mark if any

b) Test Certificate enclosed Yes/No

17.0 Initial & Final sag and tension charts furnished

18.0 Stress/Strain data corresponding to different

tensions temperatures furnished

19.0 Curves/tables of creep compensation

corresponding to different tension temperatures

furnished

20.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

186

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF HH..TT.. GGUUYY IINNSSUULLAATTOORR

(To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl.NO. PARAMETER GUARANTEED VALUE

1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address

2 Type of insulator

3 Standards to which insulator will conform

4 Dimensions

5 Hole diameter (mm)

6 Color of glaze

7 Dry Power Frequency withstand Voltage (kV)

8 Wet Power Frequency withstand Voltage (kV)

9 Minimum failing load (Newton)

10 Minimum Creepage distance (mm)

11 Weight per piece (Kg)

12 Temperature cycle test (as per ISS)

13 Porosity test (as per ISS)

14 Tolerance, if any (as per ISS)

15 Performance guarantee

187

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS FFOORR GG..II.. WWIIRREE

(To be filled in by the bidder)

A. G.I.Wire (4 mm dia) :

1. Size of Wire :

2. Tolerance in size of wire :

3. Tensile strength :

4. Wrapping list :

5. Galvanising conforming to IS :

4826 – 1968

:

6. Guarantee :

B. G.I.Wire (5 mm dia) :

1. Size of Wire :

2. Tolerance in size of wire :

3. Tensile strength :

4. Wrapping list :

5. Galvanising conforming to IS :

4826 – 1968

:

6. Performance guarantee :

188

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS FFOORR CC..II.. PPIIPPEE ((EEAARRTTHH))

(To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl.No. G.I.Wire (4 mm dia) :

1. Length of Pipe :

2. Diameter of Pipe :

3. External Dia of Pipe :

4. Thickness of Pipe :

5. Internal Dia of Socket :

6. Thickness of Socket :

7. Internal Depth of Socket :

8. Internal Radius of Socket :

9. Width of Grooves of Socket :

10. External Dia of Grooves Socket

11. Weight of Pipe :

12. Hydraulic Test :

13. Guarantee :

189

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS

(To be filled in by the bidder)

A. TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS

Size of conductor for which the fitting is designed

1. Electrical resistance of dead end assembly Ohms

2. Slip strength of dead end assembly kN

3. Total weight of assembly

a) Single Tension Kg

b) Double Tension Kg

4. UTS of Tension string hardware

a) Single Tension kN

b) Double Tension kN

5. Purity of zinc used for galvanizing %

6. Min. No. of dips in standard Preece test the ferrous parts can withstand

No.

B. MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR CONDUCTOR

Size of conductor for which the fitting is designed

1. Suitable for conductor size Mm

2. Material of Aluminum sleeve

a) Aluminum

b) Purity of Aluminum sleeve

3. Outside diameter of sleeve before compression

a) Aluminum mm

b) Steel mm

4. Inside diameter of sleeve before compression

a) Aluminum mm

b) Steel mm

5. Length of sleeve before compression

a) Aluminum mm

b) Steel mm

6. Dimensions of sleeve after compression

a) Aluminum

i) Corner to Corner mm

ii) Face to Face mm

b) Steel

190

7. Length of sleeve after compression

a) Aluminum mm

b) Steel mm

8. Weight of sleeve

a) Aluminum Kg

b) Steel Kg

c) Total Kg

9. Slipping strength kN

10. Conductivity of the compressed unit expressed, as percentage of the conductivity of equivalent length of bare conductor

%

C. REPAIR SLEEVE FOR CONDUCTOR

Size of conductor for which the fitting is designed

1. Suitable for conductor size Mm

2. Material of Sleeve

a) Aluminum/Aluminum Alloy

b) Purity of Aluminum %

3. Inside diameter of sleeve before compression mm

4. Outside dimensions of sleeve

a) Dia before compression mm

b) After compression mm

i) Corner to Corner

ii) Face to Face

5. Length of sleeve

a) Before compression mm

b) After compression mm

6. Weight of sleeve Kg

D. PARTICULARS OF VIBRATION DAMPER FOR CONDUCTOR

Size of conductor for which the fitting is designed

1. Suitable for conductor size mm

2. Total weight of one damper Kg

3. Diameter of each damper mass mm Right

Left

4. Length of each damper mass mm

5. Weight of each damper masses Kg

6. Material of damper masses

7. Material of the stranded messenger cable

191

8. Material for clamp

9. Number of strands in stranded messenger cable

10. Lay ratio of stranded messenger cable

S.NO. Description Unit Particulars

11. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of stranded messenger cable

Kg/mm

12. Slipping strength of stranded messenger cable (mass pull off)

kN

a) First frequency Hz

b) Second frequency Hz

14. Designed clamping torque Kg-m

15. Slipping strength of damper clamp

a) Before fatigue test kN

b) After fatigue test kN

16. Magnetic power loss per vibration damper at a conductor Current of 350 Ampere, 50 hz AC-

Watts

17. Percentage Variation in reactance after fatigue test in comparison with that before fatigue

%

18. Percentage Variation in power dissipation after fatigue test in comparison with that before fatigue

%

E. SPAN OF COMPRESSION JOINT FOR GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE

Size of Earthwire for which the fitting is designed

1. Material of joint

a) Type of Material with Chemical composition

b) Hardnes of steel sleeve (Brinnel Hardness)

2. Inside diameter of sleeve before compression

a) Steel Sleeve mm

b) Aluminum Sleeve mm

c) Aluminum Filter Sleeve mm

3. Outside diameter of sleeve

a) Steel Sleeve mm

b) Aluminum Sleeve mm

c) Aluminum Filter Sleeve mm

4. Outside dimensions of sleeve after compression

a) Steel Sleeve mm

b) Corner to Corner mm

192

c) Surface to Surface mm

5. Length of Steel Sleeve

a) Before compression mm

b) After compression mm

6. Length of Aluminum Sleeve

a) Before compression mm

b) After compression mm

7. Weight of Sleeve

a) Steel mm

b) Aluminum mm

c) Filler Aluminum Sleeve mm

8. Slipping Strength

9. Conductivity of the compressed unit expressed as a percentage of the conductivity of equivalent length of bare earthwire

%

F. VIBRATION DAMPER FOR GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE (7/3.15mm)

Size of Earthwire for which the fitting is designed

1. Suitable for earthwire size mm

2. Total weight of one damper Kh

3. Diameter of each damper mass mm

4. Length of each damper mass mm

5. Weight of each damper mass Kg

6. Material of damper mass Kg

7. Material of Clamp

8. Material of Stranded massenger cable

9. Number of Strands in stranded messenger cable

10. Lay ratio stranded messenger cable

11. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of stranded messenger cable

Kg/Sq.mm

12. Slipping strength of stranded messenger cable (mass pull off)

kN

13. Resonance frequencies

a) First frequency Hz

b) Second frequency Hz

G. FLEXIBLE COPPER BOND

1. Stranding

2. Cross Sectional Area Sq.mm

193

3. Minimum Copper equivalent area Sq.mm

4. Length of Copper Cable mm

5. Material of lugs

6. Bolt Size

a) Diameter mm

b) Length mm

7. Resistance Ohm

8. Total Weight of Flexible Cu bond Kg

H. TENSION CLAMP FOR GALVANIZED STEEL EARTHWIRE

Size of earthwire for which the fitting is designed

1. Material

i) Shackle

ii) a) Compression clamp

b) Hardness of the material (BHN) BHN

2. Inside diameter of the clamp before compression

mm

3. Outside dimensions of sleeve before compression

4. Outside dimensions of sleeve

a) Corner to Corner mm

b) Surface to Surface mm

5. Length of Clamp

a) Before Compression mm

b) After Compression mm

6. Weight Kg

7. Slip strength (minimum) kN

8. Compression Pressure T

9. Minimum Breaking Strength of assembly (excluding clamp)

kN

10. Performance guarantee

194

GUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF 3333 kkVV PPIINN IINNSSUULLAATTOORR (To be filled in by bidder)

Sl. No. Description Particulars

1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address

2 Type of insulator offered

3 Drawing Numbers

4 Over all Dimensions (mm)

a)Height

b)Out Diameter

5 Nominal System Voltage(kV)

6 Highest System Voltage (kV)

7 Minimum Failing Load (kN)

8 Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

9 Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

10 Puncture Withstand Voltage (Power Frequency) (kN)

11 Min. Creepage Distance (mm)

12 Impulse Flashover Voltage : (kV)

a)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Positive Polarity

b)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Negative Polarity

13 Impulse Withstand Voltage : (kV)

a)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Positive Polarity

b)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Negative Polarity

14 Dry Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

15 Wet Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

16 Minimum Visible Discharge Test Voltage

17 Net Weight (Approx.) (Kg)

18 Standard According to which Porcelain Insulators be Manufactured and Tested

19 Tolerance in Dimensions, if any (as per ISS)

20 Temperature Cycle Test (as per ISS)

21 Porosity Test (as per ISS)

22 Performance guarantee

195

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF GGII PPIINN FFOORR 3333 KKVV PPIINN IINNSSUULLAATTOORR

(To be filled in by the bidder)

S.NO. PARAMETER GUARANTEED VALUE

1 Name & address of the manufacturer

2 Physical dimensions

a. Stalk length in mm

b. Shank length in mm

c. Thickness of collar in mm

d. Diameter of collar in mm

e. Diameter of shank in mm

f. Threaded length of shank in mm

g. Dia of stalk head in mm

h. Threaded length of stalk in mm

3 Gross weight in kg.

4 Weight of zinc coating in gms

5 Mechanical failing load in KN

6 Other particulars

7 Performance guarantee

196

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV GOAB SWITCH

A. Isolating Switches

Name of Manufacturer of Isolating Switches Particulars for Isolating Switches

a. MVA Ratings b. Number of Poles c. Voltage Rating d. Current rating (Amps)

i. Normal ii. Maximum iii. Short Time

e. Temperature rise of the following at the full rated current in Degree °C over in ambient 50°C

i. Terminals ii. Contacts iii. Metal parts

f. Thickness in mm of Silver Plating / Tin Plating g. Voltage drop across:

i. Each Contact ii. Terminals

h. Frequency i. Short Time Current and duration j. Type of Materials used in Contacts k. Materials used in Contacts l. Type & Materials of the Terminal connectors provided m. Diameter and length of the channels of GI Operating Pipe n. Size & Length of the channels provided for mounting

three phases o. Minimum clearance between phases.

(i.e. the centre distance between the insulating of the adjacent phases in the assembled position of the Switches

p. Minimum clearance in air i. Between the poles ii. Between live parts & earth

q. Type & Detail of operating Mechanism i. Rotating Insulator Stack ii. Operating Shaft

r. Whether the switch is complete with the necessary universal joints Guides locking arrangements with padlock and key and stops etc.

s. Type of monitoring t. Number of Breaks per phase u. Number of breaks v. Materials of the rotating parts w. Weight of insulators & mechanism x. Dimensions of the flexible cords

i. Thickness ii. Length iii. Weight

xi. Materials used in flexible cord, its terminal place and the terminal block

2.1 Impulse withstand voltage with 1/50 micro-seconds wave positive and negative polarity

i. Across Isolating distance ii. To earth & between poles

2.2 One minute power frequency withstand voltage i. Across Isolating distance ii. To earth & between Poles

197

3.0 Does the equipments conform to ISS:1818/1961 B. Insulators 1.0 Particulars for Insulators

1.1 Type of Insulator 1.2 Name of the Manufacturer of the Insulator 1.3 Height of Insulator 1.4 Diameter of the Largest Shed 1.5 Number of units per stack

2.0 Electrical Characteristics (for one Insulator) 2.1 Flashover voltage

a. Dry Power Frequency b. Wet Power Frequency c. Impulse voltage of 1/50 micro-secs. (+ve) d. Impulse voltage of 1/50 micro-secs. (-ve)

2.2 Withstand Voltage a. Dry Voltage b. Wet voltage c. Impulse voltage of 1/50 micro-secs. (+ve) d. Impulse voltage of 1/50 micro-secs. (-ve)

2.3 Power frequency puncture withstand of unit 2.4 Mechanical characteristics

a. Cantilever strength upright b. Cantilever strength under hand c. Torsional strength d. Tensile strength e. Compression strength

2.5 General characteristics a. Minimum creepage distance b. Weight of complete unit c. Weight of non-ferrous parts (total) d. Weight of ferrous parts (total)

2.6 Standard to which insulator conforms Note: Value for Insulators should be given in metric units and should be for one insulator only 3.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

198

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF 3333 KKVV DDIISSCC IINNSSUULLAATTOORR –– 7700 kkNN ((BB && SS))

(To be Filled in by the bidder)

Sl.NO. PARAMETER GUARANTEED VALUE

1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address

2 Type of insulator offered

3 Drawing Numbers

4 Over all Dimensions (mm)

a)Height

b)Out Diameter

5 Nominal System Voltage (kV)

6 Highest System Voltage (kV)

7 Minimum Failing Load (kN)

8 Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

9 Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

10 Puncture Withstand Voltage (Power Frequency) (kN)

11 Min. Creepage Distance (mm)

12 Impulse Flashover Voltage : (kV)

a)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Positive Polarity

b)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Negative Polarity

13 Impulse Withstand Voltage : (kV)

a)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Positive Polarity

b)1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Negative Polarity

14 Dry Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

15 Wet Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

16 Minimum Visible Discharge Test Voltage

17 Net Weight (Approx.) (Kg)

18 Standard According to which Porcelain Insulators be Manufactured and Tested

19 Tolerance in Dimensions, if any (as per ISS)

20 Temperature Cycle Test (as per ISS)

21 Porosity Test (as per ISS)

22 Performance guarantee

199

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR XLPE CABLES (To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl. No. Description 11 KV

1. Manufacturer's Name & Address

2. Voltage Grade

3. Core & Cross Section

4. Type & Designation (as per ISS)

5. List of Standards applicable

6. Suitable for system with (a) Service Voltage (b) Neutral Earthing

7. Maximum Conductor temperature (a) Continuous (in Deg. C)

(b) Short time (in Deg.C)

8. Conductor (a) Material to IS-8130(Class/Grade) (b) Size (Sq.mm.)

(c) No./Nominal diameter of wires in each conductor (No./mm.) (d) Form of Conductor (Circular/shaped)

9. Shielding/screening on Conductor (a) Material (b) Type (c) Whether thermosetting

10. Insulator (a) Material (b) Thickness(mm.) (c) Whether triple co-extrusion with radiant curing process

11. Shielding/screening on insulation (a) Material (b) Type (c) Thickness (mm.) (i) Non-metallic

(ii) Metallic

12. Inner-sheath (a) Material

(b) Type (c) Thickness (mm.) (d) Extruded/Wrapped

(e) Approx. Outside diameter over sheath(mm)

13. Armouring (a) Material (b) Size (c) D.C. resistance at 20

oC(Ohm/Km.)

(d) A.C. resistance at 20 oC

14. Overall Sheath: (a) Material (b) Type

200

(c) Thickness (mm.)

15. Approx. Overall dia. of the Cable (mm.)

16 Standard Drum length with tolerance (Mtr.)

17. Net Weight of Cable (approx.) Kg/Km.

18. Continuous current rating for standard condition, laid direct

(a) In ground at temp. 30 oC

(b) In duct at temp. oC

(c) In air at temp. 40 oC

19. Charging current at rated system voltage

20. Short Circuit Current at rated system voltage (a) for 1 sec. (b) for 0.5 sec.

21. Electrical Parameters (a) Maxm. D.C. resistance/Km of

conductor at 20 oC

(b) AC resistance/kilometer (approx.) (c) Reactance/kilometer (approx.) (d) Capacitance/Kilometer(approx.)

(e) Di-electric losses at rated(Uo/U) system KV, 50 cycles/sec, in watts/KV/Phase) (f) (i) Tan-delta at 0.5 Uo

(ii) Tan-Delta at Uo (iii) Tan-Delta at 1.5 Do

(iv) Tan-Delta at 2 Uo

22. Vol. Resistively at 27 oC (Ohm/Cm)

23. Recommended minimum bending radius

24. Derating factor for following ambient temperature in Air/Ground.

(a) at 30 oC

(b) at 35 oC

(c) at 45

oC

(d) at 50 oC

25. Type test results of the similar Cable to be furnished with Tender as specified under Clause-8.0 of the Spec.

26. (a) Tests on Conductor: (i) Tensile test (for aluminum) (ii) Wrapping test (for aluminum) (iii) Resistance test (b) Test for armoring wires/strips. (c) Test for thickness of insulation & sheath (i) Tensile strength & elongation at break (ii) Ageing in air oven (iii) Hot test (iv) Shrinkage test (v) Water absorption (Gravimetric) (d) Physical : (i) Tensile strength & elongation at break (ii) Ageing in air oven (iii) Shrinkage test (iv) Hot deformation (v) Loss of mass in air oven (vi) Heat shock (vii) Thermal stability (e) Partial discharge test (f) Banding test (g) Di-electric power factor test

201

(i) As a function of Voltage (ii) As a function of temperature (h) Insulation Resistance (Volume receptivity)* Test (i) Heating Cycle test (j) Impulse with stand test (i) High Voltage test (j) Flammability test

27. Cable Drums : (a) Length/Drum (Kg) (b) Dimension of Drum (Kg) (c) Shipping weight (Kg)

28. Safe pulling force (Kg.)

29. Partial discharge value.

30. Details of the protective measures against attach by white ante. varnish etc. to be X.L.P.E's outer sheath during manufacture.

31. Type of curing of XLPE insulation

32. Cut ends of the Cable shall be sealed with

33. Cable identification shall b made as per Clause 6.11 (Yes/No)

34. Cable Drums shall be marked with the information of Clause 7.0 conspicuously (Yes/No) :

SIGNATURE OF THE BIDDER

202

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL ARTICULARS FOR 1.1 KV GRADE SINGLE CORE [1X185 ,1x300 &

3X120] SQ.MM. LT XLPE CABLE (To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl.No. Particulars

1 2 3

1. Name & address of manufacturer.

2. Type and make of cable

3. Location of factory.

4. Standard specification to which cable shall conform.

5. Standard specification to which core shall conform.

6. Voltage rating.

7. Permissible variation in voltage, frequency & combined voltage & frequency.

8. Standard specification to which drum shall conform.

9. CONDUCTOR :

9.1 Material and its composition.

9.2 Shape of conductor.

9.3 Total area of conductor.(In Sq. mm)

9.4 Stranding details :- i) No. of nominal strands in a core. ii) Dia of each strand in a core (before stranding) (in mm)

9.5 Maximum D.C Resistance/Core at 20°C (In Ohms/Km.)

10. INSULATION :

10.1 Type of Insulation

10.2 Composition of Insulation

10.3 Nominal thickness of Insulation (in mm).

10.4 Tolerance on thickness of Insulation.

10.5 Dia of core over insulation.

10.6 Minimum volume resistivity at 27°C (Ohm.Cm.)

10.7 Minimum volume resistivity at 70°C (Ohm.Cm.)

10.8 Minimum tensile strength of Insulation material.

10.9 Minimum Elongation percentage

10.10 Average di-electric strength (KV/MM)

10.11 Suitability with regard to Moisture, Ozone, Acid, Oil and Alkaline surroundings.

11.0 SHEATHING DETAILS

11.1 OUTER SHEATH :

i) Material & composition

ii) Type of sheathing by extrusion ST-1

iii) Thickness of sheathing (in mm)

iv) Tolerance on thickness of sheathing.

v) Calculated diameter under the sheath (in mm).

vi) Nominal diameter of cable over outer sheath (in mm)

vii) Whether anti termite treatment has been given in the outer sheath.

12. ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES

12.1 i) Under continuous full load (in DC)

ii) Under transient conditions ( in DC)

12.2 Thermal resistivity of Soil (DC Cm/W)

12.3 Thermal Resistivity of XLPE (DC Cm/W)

12.4 Depth of laying (in Cm.) (To the highest point of cable laid direct in the ground or to the top surface of ducts.

12.5 Current ratings of the cable under basic assumptions :

i) Laid in ground (at ground tamp. 30

203

ii) Laid in duct ( duct temp.30°C)Amp.

iii) Laid in air (air temp. 40°C) Amp.

12.6 Rating factors under various conditions of installation.

12.7 Capacitive reactance per Km. of cable at 50 C/S (Ohms per Km.)

12.8 Inductive reactance per Km. of Cable at 50 C/S (Ohms per KM)

13.0 MECHANICAL DATA :

13.1 Approx overall dia of cable (mm)

13.2 Minimum bending radius of cable.

13.3 Whether identification marking i.e.

i) Property of APDCL

ii) Name of manufacture

iii) Voltage and grade and size

iv) Year of manufacture is being provided at the regular

intervals of two metres of outer most sheath of cable.

v) Whether length of cable at every interval of 1 meter shall be

printed over outer sheath.

13.4 Name of manufacturers of bought out raw materials.

i) Aluminium

ii) PVC

iii) Galvanised Steel strip/ wire for armouring

iv) Any other.

13.5 a) Whether similar cable has been type tested Yes/No

b) If yes, when and where was it tested.

c) It is expected that you will enclose an electro state copy of

type test report of similar cable. Please inform whether or not

you have entered the same.

d) If yes, how many sheets does it contain. No. of sheets.

e) Only a design better than or equal to what type tested and

proven shall be accepted, please inform whether you will abide

by this condition. Yes/No

13.6 Whether wood preservative shall be applied to whole drum?

13.7 Whether all ferrous parts shall be treated with rust preventive

finish or coating ?

13.8 Whether waterproof paper layer shall be applied to the surface

of drum & over the outer cable layer.

13.9 Reference of license to use-ISI certification mark, if any.

13.10 Do you agree to all the provisions of technical specification. In

case of any deviation, state clearly.

THE FIRM ……………………………………………………………………..

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER ..….……………………………………….

DESIGNATION & SEAL DATE………………

204

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl.No. Description Particulars

1 Make & manufacturer

2 Place of manufacture

3 Rated ratio

i) HV (KV)

ii) LV (KV)

4 Rated current

i) HV (KV)

ii) LV (KV)

5 Connection sysmbol

6 Tapping (if applicable)

i) Number of steps

ii) Range of Tapping

7 Core material used and grade

a) Flux density

b) Over flushing without saturation (curve to be furnished by the manufacturer in support of his claim)

8 Maximum temperature rise of

a) Winding by resistance

b) Oil by thermometer

9 Magnetizing (No Load) current at

a) Nominal voltage

b) Maximum voltage

10 Core loss in watts at 75°C

a) Nominal voltage

b) Maximum voltage

11 Resistance of windings at 20°C (with 5% tolerance)

a) HV winding (ohm)

b) LV winding (ohm)

12 Full load losses (watts) at 75°C

13 Current density used for

a) HV winding

b) LV winding

14 Clearances

a) Core & LV

b) LV & HV

c) HV phase to phase

d) End insulation clearance to earth

e) Any point of winding to tank

15 Efficiency at 75°C

a) Unity pf

b) 0.8 pf

i) 125% load

ii) 100% load

iii) 75% load

iv) 50% load

v) 25% load

16 Regulation at

a) Unity pf

b) 0.8 pf at 75°C

17 % impedance at 75°C

18 Flash test

19 HV 28 KV/50 Hz for 1 Minute

20 LV 3 KV/50 Hz. for 1 Minute

205

21 Over potential test double

22 Voltage & double frequency for 1 minute

23 Impulse test

24 Weight content of

a) Core lamination (min)

b) Winding (min)

C) Tank & fittings

d) Oil

e) Oil qty. (min)

f) Total weight

25 Oil data

a) Qty. for first filing (min)

b) Grade of oil used

c) Maker’s name

d) BDV at the time of filling

26 Transformer

Overall length X breadth X height

27 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE OF DTR

206

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS FFOORR 3333 kkVV DDRROOPP OOUUTT FFUUSSEE

(To be filled in by the bidder)

1. Standard applicable 2. Type 3. Rated Voltage (KV) 4. Rated normal current Amp 5. Rated frequency Hz 6. Rated lightning impulse

i) To earth and between poles ii) Across the pole distance

7. Power frequency one minute withstand voltage i) To earth and between pole ii) Across the pole distance

8. Rated short time current 9. Rated breaking current 10. Creepage distance 11. Rated line charging breaking current (A) 12. Total weight 13. Performance guarantee

207

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF 1111 KKVV DDIISSCC IINNSSUULLAATTOORR –– 4455 kkNN ((BB && SS)) (To be filled in by the bidder)

S.NO. PARAMETER GUARANTEED VALUE

1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address

2 Type of insulator offered

3 Drawing Numbers

4 Over all Dimensions (mm)

a) Height

b) Out Diameter

5 Nominal System Voltage (kV)

6 Highest System Voltage (kV)

7 Minimum Failing Load (kN)

8 Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

9 Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

10 Puncture Withstand Voltage (Power Frequency) (kN)

11 Min. Creepage Distance (mm)

12 Impulse Flashover Voltage : (kV)

a) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Positive Polarity

b) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Negative Polarity

13 Impulse Withstand Voltage : (kV)

a) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Positive Polarity

b) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Negative Polarity

14 Dry Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

15 Wet Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

16 Minimum Visible Discharge Test Voltage

17 Net Weight (Approx.) (Kg)

18 Standard According to which Porcelain Insulators be Manufactured and Tested

19 Tolerance in Dimensions, if any (as per ISS)

20 Temperature Cycle Test (as per ISS)

21 Porosity Test (as per ISS)

22 Performance guarantee

208

GAURANTEED TECHNLCAL PARTICULARS OF COMPOSIT POLYMERIC INSULATOR FOR 11 KV , 45 KN ( T & C ) TYPE

(To be Filled in by the bidder)

Sl. No Description Unit 11KV , 45 KN , T& C type

1. Type of Insulator

2. Standard according to which the Insulator manufacture and tested

3. Name of material used in manufacture Of the insulator with class/grade

(a) Material of core (FRP rod) i) E-glass or ECR- glass ii) Boron content

(b) Material of housing &Weather sheds Silicon content by weight

(c) ( material of end fitting )

(d) Sealing compound for end fittings

4. Color

5. Electrical characteristics

(a) Normal system voltage KV(rms )

(b) Highest system voltage KV(rms)

(c) Dry power Frequency withstand voltage KV(rms )

(d) Wet power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms )

(e) Dry flashover voltage KV(rms)

(f) Wet flashover voltage KV(rms)

(g) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage a) Positive b)Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

(h) Dry lighting impulse flashover voltage c) positive d) Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

(i) R/V at 1MHz when energized at 10KV/30KV(rms) under dry condition

Microvolt

(j) Creepage distance (mm) mm

6. Mechanical characteristics

(a) Minimum failing load KN

7. Dimension of insulator

(i) Weight Kg

(ii) Dia of FRP rod mm

(iii) Length of FRP rod mm

(iv) Die. Of Weather sheds mm

(v) Thickness of housing mm

(vi) Dry arc distance mm

Dimension drawing of insulator including weight with clearances min weight enclosed

8. Method of fixing of sheds to housing (specify single moulder Modular construction moulding )

9. No. of Weather sheds

10. Types of sheds

(i) Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs

11. Packing details

(a) Types of packing

(b) No. of insulator each pack

(c) Gross weight of package

12. Any other particulars which the bidder may like to give

209

GAURANTEED TECHNLCAL PARTICULARS OF BATTERY BANK

(To be Filled in by the bidder)

1. Battery Rating

2. Type of battery

3. Battery specification

4. Manufacturers cell designation

5. No of Cells

6. Cycle life of Battery @ 27⁰ C

7. All efficiency

8. WH Efficiency

9. Self discharge/ Week

10. Max, allowable ambient temp at which cell can safely operate

11. Overall dimension of each cell

12. Overall weight of each cell

13. Recommended Max period of storage

14. Material of container

15. Type of separator

16. Type of +ve & -ve plates

17. Material of rack

18. Method of connection between cells

19. Recommended float charge

20. Recommended boost charge

21. Time required for boost charge from

fully discharged condition at 27⁰ C

22. Voltage ripple allowable

23. Type of connectors

210

GAURANTEED TECHNLCAL PARICULARS OF COMPOSIT POLYMERIC INSULATOR FOR 11 KV , 5 KN PIN INSULATOR TYPE

(To be Filled in by the bidder)

Sl. No Description Unit 11KV , 5 KN , PIN INSULATOR

1. Type of Insulator Composite polymeric Insulators

2. Standard according to which the Insulator manufacture and tested

IES-61109 with up to date amendments

3. Name of material used in manufacture Of the insulator with class/grade

(a) Material of core (FRP rod) i) E-glass or ECR- glass ii) Boron content

(b) Material of housing &Weather sheds Silicon content by weight

(c) ( material of end fitting )

(d) Sealing compound for end fittings

4. Color

5. Electrical characteristics

(a) Normal system voltage KV(rms )

(b) Highest system voltage KV(rms)

(c) Dry power Frequency withstand voltage KV(rms )

(d) Wet power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms )

(e) Dry flashover voltage KV(rms)

(f) Wet flashover voltage KV(rms)

(g) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage a) Positive b)Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

(h) Dry lighting impulse flashover voltage c) positive d) Negative

KV(peak) KV(peak)

(i) R/V at 1MHz when energized at 10KV/30KV(rms) under dry condition

Microvolt

(j) Creepage distance (mm) mm

6. Mechanical characteristics

(a) Minimum failing load KN

7. Dimension of insulator

(i) Weight Kg

(ii) Dia of FRP rod mm

(iii) Length of FRP rod mm

(iv) Die. Of Weather sheds mm

(v) Thickness of housing mm

(vi) Dry arc distance mm

Dimension drawing of insulator including weight with clearances min weight enclosed

8. Method of fixing of sheds to housing (specify single moulder Modular construction moulding )

9. No. of Weather sheds

10. Types of sheds

(i) Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs

11. Packing details

(a) Types of packing

(b) No. of insulator each pack

(c) Gross weight of package

12. Any other particulars which the bidder may like to give

211

GAURANTEED TECHNLCAL PARICULARS of ACDB

(To be filled in by the bidder)

1. Manufacturers Name & Co

2 Bus Bars

a) Make

b) Continuous Current rating in Amps

c) Material

d) Current Density

3 Incoming Switch Fuse Unit

a) Make

b) Type

c) Rated Voltage

d) Continuous Current carrying Capacity in Amps

4 Indication Lamps

a) Make

b) Type

c) Voltage

5 Fuse

a) Make

b) Type

c) Rupturing Capacity

6 Switch (triple/double pole)

a) Make

b) Type

c) Rated Continuous Current carrying Capacity in Amps

7 Current Transformer

a) Make

b) Type

c) Ratio

d) VA burden rating

e) Accuracy class

f) Type of Insulation

g) Security factor

8 AC Meters/ Energy Meters (Details for Ammeters Voltmeters, Energy Meters shall be furnished separately)

a) Make

b) Type

c) Range

d) Accuracy

9 Internal Wiring

a) Make

b) Type

c) Voltage Grade

d) Size

e) Material used

10 Cable Glands

a) Make

b) Type

c) Size

d) Material used

11 Terminal Block

a) Make

b) Type

d) Material used

12 Switch Board

a) Overall Dimension

b) Thickness of Steel metal

c) Finish

d) Approximate Weight

212

Guaranteed technical particulars of Battery Charger

1. Battery Rating : 110 V-100 Ah to 1.75 ECV at C10 at 27⁰ C

2. Type of battery : Maintenance free valve regulated lead acid (MF-VRLA) battery

3. Battery specification :

Batteries conforms to IS 15549:2005 Also conforms to International Standards (I) IEEE 1188 and 1189 (II) BS6290 Part 4/ IEC 896

4. Manufacturers cell designation : F 100 P

5. No of Cells : 55 Nos.

6. Cycle life of Battery @ 27⁰ C :

2000 cycles for 50 % depth of discharge or 1200 cycles for 80 % depth of discharge

7. All efficiency : Above 90%

8. WH Efficiency : Above 80 %

9. Self discharge/ Week : < 1% of rated capacity

10. Max, allowable ambient temp at which cell can safely operate

: 55⁰ C continuously and 70

⁰ C short time

11. Overall dimension of each cell : (107.8 x 198.5 x 477)mm approx.

12. Overall weight of each cell : 27 kg approx.

13. Recommended Max period of storage :

6 months from the date of manufacturing and the batteries shall be stored in covered area

at 27⁰ C

14. Material of container : Polypropylene co-polymer

15. Type of separator : Highly absorbent micro porous spun glass matrix (AGM)

16. Type of +ve & -ve plates : Flat pasted

17. Material of rack : Mild steel coated with acid resistance paint

18. Method of connection between cells : Bolted

19. Recommended float charge :

Batteries shall be charged in constant potential mode with current limit Voltage: 2.23-2.25 Volts per cell Current: Recommended- charging current is 45 amps

20. Recommended boost charge : Voltage: 2.3 Volts per cell Current: Recommended- charging current is 45 to 90 amps

21. Time required for boost charge from fully

discharged condition at 27⁰ C

: 9 Hrs for 90 % state of charge

(or) 24 hrs for 100 % state of charge

22. Voltage ripple allowable : < 2% of the RMS value

23. Type of connectors : Lead coated heavy duty copper strips

213

GAURANTEED TECHNLCAL PARICULARS of DCDB

(To be Filled in by the bidder)

1. Manufacturers Name & Co

2. Bus Bars

a) Continuous Current rating in Amps

b) Material

c) Current Density

3. DC Double incoming MCCB

a) Make

b) Continuous Current Rating

c) Making Capacity

d) Rupturing Capacity

4. DC Double Pole switch Fuse Unit for outgoing

feeders

a) Make

b) Continuous Current Rating

c) Making Capacity

d) Rupturing Capacity

5. DC Voltmeter

a) Make

b) Type

c) Range

d) Accuracy

6. Switch Board

a) Overall Dimension

b) Thickness of Steel metal

c) Finish

d) Approximate Weight

7. Fuse

a) Make

b) Type

c) Rupturing Capacity

8. Indication Lamps

a) Make

b) Type

c) Voltage

9. Internal Wiring

a) Make

b) Type

c) Voltage Grade

10. Other Features

a) Mains fail Alarm Relay with DC Bell

b) Earth fault alarm relay with DC Bell

c) AC-DC Changeover contacts for emergency

lighting

214

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33/11 KV SURGE ARRESTORS (To be filled in by the bidder)

Sl. No.

Description Particulars

1 Name & Address of Supplier & Manufacturer

Surge Arrestor

Line Disconnector

Metal Oxide Block

Terminal Clamp

2 Name & address of collaborator, if an

3 Standard to which surge arrestors conforms

4.0 Surge Arrestor

4.1 Voltage rating (KV rms)

4.2 Continuous Operating Voltage (KV rms)

a) Continuous Operating Voltage (KV rms)

b) Leakage current at continuous operation voltage

c) Permitted leakage current of arrestor beyond which arrestor is faulty.

5 Frequency (Hz.)

6 Nominal discharge current (wave shape – 8/20 micro second) (KA)

7 Pressure relief rated current (KA rms)

8. Steep current protection level at 10 KA

a) Lightning impulse protection level with 40 X 80 mico-sec. Wave at 500/1000 A

9 Long duration current impulse withstand capacity and virtual duration

10 Line discharge class

11 Thermal runway limit arrestor

12 Energy capability (kj/KV)

13 Pressure relief rating

14 Dry arcing distance

15 Reference current and reference voltage

16 Arrestor Housing

16.1 Power frequency one minute wet withstand voltage (kV rms)

16.2 Lightning impulse dry withstand voltage (kVP)

16.3 Creepage distance

a) Protected

b) Total

16.4 Short Circuit withstand capacity

16.5 Bending moment (mm)

17 Dis-connector

a) Constructional Details

b) Other information as applicable to surge arrestor

18 Surge Monitor

a) Constructional Details

b) Degree of protection

19 Suitable for hot line washing

20 Dimension and Weight

21 G.A Drawing indicating height of complete unit from base to line, minimum recommended center to center spacing, clearance from ground equipment at various height of Arrestor, earthing arrestor, earthing arrangement on earthed side of arrestor etc.

22 Details of Packing

23 License number and date for using ISI certification mark if any

24 Ammeter for discharge current

a) Type & Make

b) Accuracy

c) Range (mA)

25 Residual voltage

26 Follow Current

27 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

215

GTP for 9 unit 11kV VCB indoor panel

Description Unit Particulars 1.00 Switchgear Panel-General Incomer Bus Coupler Outgoing

1.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address 1.02 Rated Voltage 1.03 Rated Frequency 1.04 Rated Short time current and its duration

1.05 Making current (Peak)

1.06 Dynamic current rating

1.07 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 1.08 Impulse withstand voltage 1.09 Minimum temperature rise over ambient 1.10 Interchangableility of similar equipment

1.11 Overall dimension for each switchboard

a) Length

b) Height c) Depth

1.12 Total weight 1.13 Load for foundation design (dead weight plus impact load)

1.14 Weight of movable unit

1.15 Truck withdrawal space required i.e. depth of trolly when moved out

1.16 Whether fully compartmentalised design or not 1.17 Applicable standard and degree of protection 1.18 Type of installation (indoor/outdoor)

1.19 Max. heat dissipation

1.20 Type of sheet steel (hot rolled or cold rolled) and sheet thickness

1.21 Rated voltage and kW rating of space heater 1.22 Whether each switchboard is extendable on either side

1.23 Recommended clearances

a) Front

b) Rear c) Sides

2.00 Busbar

2.01 Conductor material

2.02 Conductor cross-section

2.03 Current density in Amp/mm2

2.04 Bare/painted/PVC sleeves/Epoxy encapsulated 2.05 Rated short time current and its duration 2.06 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 2.07 Impulse withstand voltage

2.08 Rated continuous current at specified ambient temp.

2.09 Maximum temperature rise over ambient temperature for current rating as per 7

2.10 Minimum clearance in air a) Between phases

b) Phases to earth

216

2.11 Applicable standard

2.12 Calculation establishing adequacy of cross section and supports for short circuit and thermal currents

2.13 Material for phase barriers 2.14 Bus joints silver plated 2.15 Material for bus bar supports

2.16 Voltage class of support and through bushing

2.17 Standard to which bus bar supports

2.18 Dimensions and mounting details 3.00 Vacuum Circuit breaker (VCB) 3.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address 3.02 Type

3.03 Short Circuit Type Tests: Certificate or report No. (Attach photocopy)

3.04 Rated voltage and frequency

3.05 Rated short time withstand current and its duration with breaker as housed in the panel

3.06 Making current (peak)

3.07 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 3.08 1.2/50 microsecond Impulse wave withstand voltage 3.09 Maximum temperature rise over ambient specified 3.10 Interchangeability of similar equipment

3.11 Duty cycle

3.12 Whether horizontal drawout (Yes/No)

3.13 Standard to which conforms

3.14 Whether anti pumping device provided (Yes/No)

3.15 Whether control circuitry suitable for monitoring of closing and tripping circuit (Yes/No)

3.16 Maximum design voltage

a) Symmerical breaking capacity for various breakers (in

KA and MVA)

b) Asymmeterical breaking capacity for various breakers

(in KA and MVA)

a) Rated continuous current rating for various breakers &

corresponding temperature

b) Rated continuous current rating for various breakers at

the specified ambient temperature

3.17 Number of breaks/phases

3.18 Type of material of contacts : a) Main b) Arcing

3.19 Whether contacts silver are plated and thickness of plating

3.20 Whether breaker designed to close and latch on making current release ?

3.21 Whether trip free or fixed trip mechanically and electrically 3.22 Type of closing 3.23 Type of tripping 3.24 Normal voltage of :

a) Closing/tripping mechanism

b) Spring charging motor

3.25 Allowable variation of voltage for above 3.26 Power required at normal voltage for

a) Trip coil b) Closing coil

c) Spring charging motor

217

3.27 Weight of circuit breaker with arc extinguishing medium

3.28 Opening time in cycles

3.29 Making time in cycles

3.30 Opening time at : a) 10% of rated short circuit current b) 50% of rated short circuit current c) 100% of rated short circuit current

3.31 Heat dissipation at normal current (KW)

3.32 Contact Resistance at close condition

3.33 Minimum clearance in vacuum 3.34 Between phases 3.35 Between live parts & earth 3.36 Minimum clearance in Air

3.37 Between phases

3.38 Between live parts & earth

3.39 Whether 12 Nos. adjustable (either in ‘NO’ or ‘NC’) auxiliary contacts over and above those required for been provided or not.

3.40 Current carrying capacity of auxiliary switches.

3.41 No. of breaker operations necessary (before inspection and maintenance of :

a) Switching at rated load

b) faults of 100% capacity

c) Faults of 50% capacity d) Making under fault conditions

3.42 Accessibility of line connection 3.43 Whether terminals suitable for XLPE cable

3.44 Minimum value of pick up current for

a) Closing coil

b) Tripping coil 3.45 Schematic control diagram of circuit breaker enclosed 3.46 Make of interrupter 3.47 Vacuum breakers (Technical details)

a) Pressure inside the interrupter

b) Contract wear indication provided (Yes/No)

c) mechanical facility for checking loss of vacuum

provided (Yes/No)

d) Vacuum monitoring relay provided (Yes/No)

e) Adequate shielding against X-Ray radiations provided.

(Yes/No)

f) Short time rating of vacuum bottle

g) No of full short circuit operations as per test duly 1 to 5

of IEC:56, which the vacuum bottle offered can safely withstand

h) Whether the vacuum bottles used in incoming and

outgoing panels are same or different.

3.48 Switching over voltages generated by the circuit breakers with and without surge suppressors

4.00 Current Transformers

4.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address

4.02 Type

4.03 Rated voltage and frequency 4.04 Rated short time current and its duration

218

4.05 Dynamic current rating (Peak)

4.06 Rated primary current

4.07 Rated secondary current

4.08 No. of cores

4.09 One minute power frequency withstand voltage of primary and secondary winding

4.10 Impulse withstand voltage

4.11 Rated thermal current rating (continuous)

4.12 Maximum temperature rise over ambient 4.13 Class of insulation 4.14 Standard applicable 4.15 Metering CTs

a) Ratios in line with single line diagram

b) Rated VA burden

c) Accuracy class d) Instrument security factor

4.16 Protection CTs a) Ratios in line with single line diagram

4.17 Magnetization curve of CT core

4.18 Total weight

4.19 Rated VA burden

4.20 Accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

5.00 Potential Transformer 5.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address

5.02 Type

5.03 Rated transformation ratio

5.04 Rated frequency 5.05 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 5.06 Impulse withstand voltage 5.07 Maximum temperature rise over ambient

5.08 Interchangeability of similar equipment

5.09 Standard applicable

5.10 Class of insulation 5.11 Number of secondary winding 5.12 Winding connections 5.13 Rated secondary voltage

5.14 Rated for dual purpose of protection and measurement

5.15 Rated output of each secondary winding

5.16 No. of auxiliary draw out contacts on VT

5.17 Rated voltage factor a) Continuous b) 8 hours

5.18 Temperature rise for rated output

5.19 Rated output at accuracy class 0.5/3P

a) Sec. Winding-1

b) Sec. Winding-2 c) Sec. Winding-3

5.20 Rating of HV side fuse

219

5.21 Characteristics of HV/LV side fuse furnished

5.22 Accuracy class

5.23 Rupturing capacity of HV/LV side fuse (to be provided in 3 phase and single phase VTs)

5.24 Are PTs located on Bus ?

6.00 Relays (Over Current & Earth Fault)

6.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address

6.02 Type a) Rated current

b) Current setting range in percentage of rated current

voltage at taps provided

c) Continuous rating

d) Error on different setting e) Sensitivity

6.03 Re-setting ratio

6.04 Rated short-time thermal current/voltage for 1 sec. At different taps.

6.05 One minute power frequency withstand test voltage

a) No. of type of contacts (normally closed or normally

open)

b) Rating of contacts

6.06 Operating time of instantaneous/ current relays

6.07 Time settings of inverse or definite time current.

6.08 Current time characteristics for inverse or definite time current relays

6.09 Resetting time

6.10 Rated burden at lowest and highest settings

6.11 Details of series or shunt seal in units if provided

6.12 Hand reset flag indicating provided or not 6.13 Detailed literature furnished with reference 6.14 Details of testing facilities 6.15 Detailed literature enclosed

7.00 Auxiliary Relays

7.01 Manufacturer’s name and Address 7.02 Type 7.03 Rated current/voltage and permissible variation 7.04 Rated burden

7.05 No. and type of contacts (whether ‘NO’ or ‘NC’)

7.06 Rating of contacts

7.07 Total operating time of relays

7.08 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 7.09 Detailed literature furnished with reference (Yes/No) 7.10 Details of testing facilities provided

8.00 Indicating Lamp

8.01 Manufacturer’s name and address

8.02 Type 8.03 Rated voltage 8.04 Rated power consumption (watts) 8.05 Series resistor provided (Yes/No)

220

9.00 Indicating Meters

9.01 Ammeter

a) Make b) Type of meter c) Size (Square mm) d) Scale size in degree

e) Accuracy

f) Range offered in line with specification

g) VA burden h) Applicable standard

10.00 Voltmeter a) Make

b) Type of meter

c) Size (Square mm)

d) Scale size in degree e) Accuracy f) Range offered in line with specification g) VA burden

h) Applicable standard 11.00 PF meter

a) Make

b) Type of meter c) Size (Square mm) d) Display size e) Accuracy

f) Range offered in line with specification

g) VA burden:- Current Coil Pressure Coil

h) Applicable standard 12.00 Energy Meter

a) Rating of current coil & potential coil b) Continuous withstand capacity of the above coils

c) Limits of error at unity pf and

i) 125/25%

ii) 10 % rated current

iii) 5% rated current d) Limits of error at 0.5 pf(lag) and i) 125/25% rated current ii) 10% rated current

e) Power losses per element

i) Current Coil

ii) Potential coil f) Minimum running current (Percent of marked current)

g) Variation of voltage to cause a change of not more than 1% at any load from full to 1/10

h) Variation of air temperatures maximum temperature co-efficient of error in percent per Deg. C at

i) Unity pf ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

221

i) Variation dur of heating by main current in percent at

i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

j) Variation of frequency percent error due to 5% variation in frequency

i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

k) Overload capacity

i) Continuous ii) ½ Second l) Excess voltage permissible for 30 minutes m) Type of register mechanism with register constant

13.00 Annunciation System

13.01 Size of facia

13.02 Background of facia 13.02 Size fo each window 13.03 Size of character on each window

13.04 Number of characters of above sizes that can be accommodated per line

13.05 Colour of characters on facia

13.06 Two lamps per facia provided 13.07 Test facility for annunciation system provided 13.08 The sequence of annunciation system type to be furnished

14.00 Control Wiring (panel)

14.01 Material and size of conductor

a) for CT & PT circuit b) for other circuit

14.02 Number of strands in conductor 14.03 Tinned/untinned

14.05 Material of insulation and sheath

14.06 Voltage grade of control wiring

14.07 Colour coding of wires a) For AC metering circuit b) For DC control circuit c) AC auxiliary power circuit like panel space heater

d) Earthing

14.08 Numbered ferrules at both ends

14.09 Terminals

a) Make b) Current rating c) Clamp type or bolt type

d) Maximum conductor size and number of conductor which it can receive.

e) Disconnecting type of CT circuit f) Terminal making facility provided g) Crimp type connectors provided at the terminals h) Spare terminals

222

GUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF 1111 kkVV PPIINN IINNSSUULLAATTOORR

(To be filled in by Tenderer)

S.NO.

Description Particulars

1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address

2 Type of insulator offered

3 Drawing Numbers

4 Over all Dimensions (mm)

a) Height

b) Out Diameter

5 Nominal System Voltage (kV)

6 Highest System Voltage (kV)

7 Minimum Failing Load (kN)

8 Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

9 Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (kV)

10 Puncture Withstand Voltage (Power Frequency) (kN)

11 Min. Creepage Distance (mm)

12 Impulse Flashover Voltage : (kV)

a) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Positive Polarity

b) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wage of Negative Polarity

13 Impulse Withstand Voltage : (kV)

a) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Positive Polarity

b) 1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave of Negative Polarity

14 Dry Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

15 Wet Power Frequency 1 Min. Withstand Voltage (kN)

16 Minimum Visible Discharge Test Voltage

17 Net Weight (Approx.) (Kg)

18 Standard According to which Porcelain Insulators be Manufactured and Tested

19 Tolerance in Dimensions, if any (as per ISS)

20 Temperature Cycle Test (as per ISS)

21 Porosity Test (as per ISS)

22 Performance guarantee

223

GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS OOFF GGII PPIINN FFOORR 1111 KKVV PPIINN IINNSSUULLAATTOORR

(To be filled in by the tenderer)

1. Name & address of the manufacturer

2. Physical dimensions

a. Stalk length in mm

b. Shank length in mm

c. Thickness of collar in mm

d. Diameter of collar in mm

e. Diameter of shank in mm

f. Threaded length of shank in mm

g. Dia of stalk head in mm

h. Threaded length of stalk in mm.

4. Gross weight in kg.

5. Weight of zinc coating in gms

6. Mechanical failing load in KN

7. Other particulars

8. Performance guarantee